Bss radio network parameter dictionary s12

BSS Radio Network ParameterDictionary

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007

# Nokia Siemens Networks 1 (951)

BSC3119Nokia BSC/TCSM, Rel. S12, ProductDocumentation, v.2

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and describes only theproduct defined in the introduction of this documentation. This documentation is intended for theuse of Nokia Siemens Networks customers only for the purposes of the agreement under whichthe document is submitted, and no part of it may be used, reproduced, modified or transmitted inany form or means without the prior written permission of Nokia Siemens Networks. Thedocumentation has been prepared to be used by professional and properly trained personnel,and the customer assumes full responsibility when using it. Nokia Siemens Networks welcomescustomer comments as part of the process of continuous development and improvement of thedocumentation.

The information or statements given in this documentation concerning the suitability, capacity, orperformance of the mentioned hardware or software products are given “as is” and all liabilityarising in connection with such hardware or software products shall be defined conclusively andfinally in a separate agreement between Nokia Siemens Networks and the customer. However,Nokia Siemens Networks has made all reasonable efforts to ensure that the instructionscontained in the document are adequate and free of material errors and omissions. NokiaSiemens Networks will, if deemed necessary by Nokia Siemens Networks, explain issues whichmay not be covered by the document.

Nokia Siemens Networks will correct errors in this documentation as soon as possible. IN NOEVENT WILL NOKIA SIEMENS NETWORKS BE LIABLE FOR ERRORS IN THISDOCUMENTATION OR FOR ANY DAMAGES, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO SPECIAL,DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR ANY LOSSES, SUCH AS BUTNOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF PROFIT, REVENUE, BUSINESS INTERRUPTION, BUSINESSOPPORTUNITY OR DATA, THAT MAYARISE FROM THE USE OF THIS DOCUMENT OR THEINFORMATION IN IT.

This documentation and the product it describes are considered protected by copyrights andother intellectual property rights according to the applicable laws.

The wave logo is a trademark of Nokia Siemens Networks Oy. Nokia is a registered trademark ofNokia Corporation. Siemens is a registered trademark of Siemens AG.

Other product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks of their respective owners,and they are mentioned for identification purposes only.

Copyright © Nokia Siemens Networks 2007. All rights reserved.

2 (951) # Nokia Siemens Networks DN9813866Issue 25-3 en

13/04/2007

BSS Radio Network Parameter Dictionary

Contents

Contents 3

List of tables 22

List of figures 23

Summary of changes 25

1 Structure and conventions of BSS Radio Network ParameterDictionary 31

2 Autoconfiguration Pool (ACP) radio network object parameters 352.1 Circuit (CRCT) 352.2 pool id 362.3 pool size (SIZE) 37

3 Adjacent GSM cell (ADJC/ADCE) radio network objectparameters 39

3.1 adjacent cell identification (CI) 393.2 adjacent cell index (INDEX) 403.3 adjacent cell layer (ACL) 413.4 Adjacent GPRS enabled (AGENA) 423.5 AMR target cell of direct access to desired layer (DADLA) 433.6 background BCCH frequency (BFREQ) 443.7 background network colour code (BNCC) 463.8 Background BTS colour code (BBCC) 473.9 BCCH frequency (FREQ) 483.10 BTS colour code (BCC) 493.11 C/I estimation weight (W1-W5) 503.12 cell identification of reference cell (CI1-CI5) 513.13 cell type (CTY) 523.14 chained adj cell (CHAIN) 533.15 directed retry threshold (DRT) 543.16 DTM enabled (DTM) 553.17 DTM power budget margin (DPM) 563.18 enable HO margin lev qual (MRGS) 573.19 fast moving threshold (FMT) 583.20 GPRS cell barred (GBAR) 593.21 GPRS MS TX pwr max CCH (GTXP1) 603.22 GPRS MS TX pwr max CCH 1x00 (GTXP2) 613.23 GPRS penalty time (GPET) 623.24 GPRS reselect offset (GREO) 633.25 GPRS rxlev Access min (GRXP) 643.26 GPRS temporary offset (GTEO) 653.27 HCS signal level threshold (HCS) 663.28 HO level umbrella (AUCL) 673.29 HO load factor (OF) 673.30 HO margin lev (LMRG) 68

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

3.31 HO margin pbgt (PMRG) 693.32 HO margin qual (QMRG) 703.33 HO priority level (PRI) 713.34 HO target area (HOTA) 723.35 level adjustment (L1-L5) 743.36 location area code (LAC) 753.37 location area code of reference cell (LAC1-LAC5) 763.38 mobile country code (MCC) 773.39 mobile country code of reference cell (MCC1-MCC5) 783.40 mobile network code (MNC) 793.41 mobile network code of reference cell (MNC1-MNC5) 803.42 MS pwr opt level (POPT) 813.43 MS TX pwr max gsm (PMAX1) 823.44 MS TX pwr max gsm1x00 (PMAX2) 833.45 NCCR EGPRS PBGT margin (EPM) 843.46 NCCR EGPRS quality margin (EQM) 853.47 NCCR GPRS PBGT margin (GPM) 863.48 NCCR GPRS quality margin (GQM) 873.49 network colour code (NCC) 883.50 priority class (PRC) 893.51 reporting priority (REP) 903.52 routing area code (RAC) 913.53 RX lev min cell (SL) 923.54 synchronised (SYNC) 923.55 target cell of direct access to desired layer (DADL) 943.56 TRHO target level (TRHO) 95

4 Adjacent WCDMA RAN cell (UADJC/ADJW) radio network objectparameters 97

4.1 adjacent cell index (INDEX) 974.2 cell identification (CI) 984.3 direct access Ec/Io threshold (DET) 994.4 downlink transmission diversity (DIV) 994.5 ISNCCR FDD quality threshold (FQT) 1004.6 location area code (LAC) 1014.7 minimum CPICH Ec/Io level (MET) 1024.8 mobile country code (MCC) 1034.9 mobile network code (MNC) 1044.10 radio network controller identifier (RNC) 1054.11 reporting priority (REP) 1064.12 scrambling code (SCC) 1074.13 service area code (SAC) 1084.14 WCDMA downlink carrier frequency (FREQ) 109

5 Authorised network (ANE) radio network object parameters 1115.1 authorised networks identification (ANE) 1115.2 authorised networks name (NAME) 1125.3 network mobile country code (MCC1...6) 1135.4 network mobile network code (MNC1...6) 1135.5 network technology (TECH1...6) 114

6 BCCH allocation frequency list (BA/BAL) radio network object


13/04/2007


parameters 1176.1 frequency 1176.2 identification of BCCH frequency list 1196.3 type of BCCH frequency list 120

7 Base Control Function (BCF) radio network object parameters 1217.1 Add BCF to chain / Remove BCF from chain (ADD / REM) 1217.2 administrative state 1227.3 autoconfigure (AC) 1237.4 BCCH TRX shutdown timer (BTIM) 1247.5 BCF identification (BCF) 1257.6 bit rate (BR) 1267.7 BSC-BSC interface failure (BSCBSC) 1277.8 BTS battery backup procedure (BBU) 1287.9 clock source (CS) 1307.10 D-channel link set name (DNAME) 1317.11 D-channel link set number (DNBR) 1327.12 external input number (INBR) 1337.13 external outputs ON / external outputs OFF (ON/OFF) 1347.14 external synchronization source (ESS) 1367.15 FACCH LAPDm T200 (T200F) 1377.16 identification of test equipment (TEST) 1387.17 master clock BCF identification (MCBCF) 1397.18 master clock TRX (MCT) 1407.19 polarity (POL) 1417.20 route (ROU) 1417.21 RX difference limit (RXDL) 1437.22 SDCCH LAPDm T200 (T200S) 1447.23 severity (SEV) 1457.24 site type (TYPE) 1467.25 synch enabled (SENA) 1477.26 Synchronization Mode (SM) 1487.27 text ID (TID) 1507.28 text ID of the output 1...6 (OUT1-OUT6) 1517.29 TRX shutdown timer (NTIM) 152

8 Base Station Controller (BSC) radio network object parameters 1538.1 alarm limit for full rate TCH availability (ALFRT) 1538.2 alarm limit for half rate TCH availibility (ALHRT) 1548.3 alarm limit for SDCCH availability (ALSDC) 1558.4 Alarm Threshold For Number Of Channel Seizure Requests (CSR) 1558.5 Alarm Threshold For Number Of Channel Seizures (CS) 1568.6 Alarm Threshold For SDCCH Congestion (CNGS) 1578.7 Alarm Threshold For SDCCH Failure Rate (SCHFR) 1588.8 Alarm Threshold For TCH Congestion (CNGT) 1598.9 Alarm Threshold For TCH Failure Rate (TCHFR) 1608.10 alarm threshold for the share of high TCH interference (HIFSHR) 1618.11 AMH lower load threshold (ALT) 1628.12 AMH Max Load Of Target Cell (AML) 1638.13 AMH upper load threshold (AUT) 1648.14 AMR Configuration In Handovers (ACH) 1658.15 AMR set grades enabled (ASG) 166

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

8.16 Background traffic class scheduling weight for ARP 1 (BGSW1) 1678.17 Background traffic class scheduling weight for ARP 2 (BGSW2) 1678.18 Background traffic class scheduling weight for ARP 3 (BGSW3) 1688.19 BCSU load threshold (BCSUL) 1698.20 BIM confidence probability (BCP) 1708.21 BIM interference threshold (BIT) 1718.22 BIM update guard time (BUGT) 1728.23 BIM update period (BUP) 1738.24 BIM update scaling factor (BUSF) 1758.25 BTS site battery backup forced HO timer (TIM) 1758.26 C/I Target 14.4 (CIT) 1768.27 C/I target AMR FR (CIAF) 1778.28 C/I target AMR HR (CIAH) 1788.29 C/I Target FR (CIF) 1798.30 C/I target HR (CIH) 1808.31 C/I target UL offset (CIUL) 1818.32 CS load balancing value 1828.33 CS NRI length 1838.34 CS NRI list 1848.34.1 CN identity (CN_ID) 1868.34.2 default SPC (DEF_SPC) 1878.34.3 mobile country code (MCC) 1888.34.4 mobile network code (MNC) 1898.34.5 NRI (NRI List) 1898.34.6 NRI (NRI List) 1908.34.7 NRI (NRI List) 1918.34.8 NRI (NRI List) 1928.34.9 NRI (NRI List) 1938.34.10 NRI (NRI List) 1948.34.11 NRI (NRI List) 1958.34.12 NRI (NRI List) 1968.34.13 NRI (NRI List) 1978.34.14 NRI (NRI List) 1988.34.15 signalling point code (SPC) 1998.35 CS TCH allocation calculation (CTC) 1998.36 CS TCH allocation RTSL0 (CTR) 2018.37 DCS macrocell threshold (DMAC) 2028.38 DCS microcell threshold (DMIC) 2038.39 delay of HO and PC for emergency calls (DEC) 2058.40 DFCA channel allocation method (DCAM) 2058.41 disable external DR (DEXDR) 2078.42 disable internal HO (DINHO) 2078.43 DL high priority SSS (DHP) 2088.44 DL low priority SSS (DLP) 2098.45 DL normal priority SSS (DNP) 2108.46 DTM fragmentation penalty (DFP) 2118.47 DTM pfc packet flow timer (DPPFT) 2138.48 EGPRS inactivity criteria (EGIC) 2148.49 enable answer to paging call on FACCH (EPF) 2158.50 enable call re-establishment on FACCH (ERF) 2158.51 enable emergency call on FACCH (EEF) 2178.52 enable ordinary calls on FACCH (EOF) 218


13/04/2007


8.53 ending moment for supervision of BTS (EMBNT) 2188.54 ending moment for supervision of BTS (EMBNT) 2198.55 events per hour for EGPRS inactivity alarm (IEPH) 2208.56 Expected BSC-BSC interface delay (EBID) 2218.57 FEP in PC HO use (FPHO) 2228.58 free TSL for CS downgrade (CSD) 2238.59 Free TSLs For CS Upgrade (CSU) 2248.60 GPRS territory update guard time (GTUGT) 2258.61 GSM Macrocell Threshold (GMAC) 2268.62 GSM Microcell Threshold (GMIC) 2278.63 HO preference order interference DL (HDL) 2288.64 HO preference order interference UL (HUL) 2288.65 IMSI based handover gsm cells anonymous ms (IBGA) 2298.66 IMSI based handover WCDMA cells anonymous ms (IBWA) 2308.67 initial AMR channel rate (IAC) 2318.68 internal handover to external (IHTA) 2338.69 intra segment SDCCH HO guard (ISS) 2348.70 ISHO preferred for non-DTM MS (IPND) 2358.71 LAPD load threshold (LAPDL) 2368.72 load rate for channel search (CLR) 2378.73 lower limit for FR TCH resources (HRL) 2388.74 maximum mean holding time for SDCCHs (MAXHTS) 2398.75 maximum mean holding time for TCHs (MAXHTT) 2398.76 maximum number of DL TBF (MNDL) 2408.77 maximum number of UL TBF (MNUL) 2418.78 maximum TCH transaction rate (MTTR) 2428.79 mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 2 UL TSL (BL02) 2438.80 mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 3 UL TSL (BL03) 2448.81 mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 4 UL TSL (BL04) 2458.82 mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 1 with 2 UL TSL (BL12) 2468.83 mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 1 with 3 UL TSL (BL13) 2478.84 mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 1 with 4 UL TSL (BL14) 2488.85 mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 2 with 3 UL TSL (BL23) 2498.86 mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 2 with 4 UL TSL (BL24) 2508.87 measurement period for high TCH interference supervision

(PRDHIF) 2518.88 measurement period for SDCCH mean holding time supervision

(PRDMHS) 2518.89 measurement period for supervision of BTS with no transactions

(PRDBNT) 2528.90 measurement period for supervision of channel failure rate

(PRDCFR) 2538.91 measurement period for supervision of congestion in BTS

(PRDCNG) 2548.92 measurement period for TCH mean holding time supervision

(PRDMHT) 2558.93 minimum mean holding time for TCHs (MINHTT) 2568.94 MS distance behaviour (DISB) 2578.95 NACC enabled (NACC) 2588.96 NCCR control mode (NCM) 2598.97 NCCR idle mode reporting period (NIRP) 2608.98 NCCR neighbor cell penalty (NNCP) 261

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

8.99 NCCR return to old cell time (NOCT) 2628.100 NCCR target cell penalty time (NTPT) 2638.101 NCCR transfer mode reporting period (NTRP) 2648.102 number of ignored transcoder failures (ITCF) 2658.103 number of preferred cells (NPC) 2668.104 penalty trigger measurement period (PTMP) 2678.105 PFC ack BLER limit for transfer delay 1 (ABL1) 2688.106 PFC unack BLER limit for SDU error ratio 1 (UBL1) 2698.107 pre-emption usage in handover (PRE) 2708.108 priority level (PR) 2708.109 public served count (PSC) 2718.110 QC drop action trigger threshold (QCATD) 2728.111 QC NCCR action trigger threshold (QCATN) 2738.112 QC QoS renegotiation action trigger threshold (QCATQ) 2748.113 QC reallocation action trigger threshold (QCATR) 2758.114 RNW configuration Identification (RNW ID) 2768.115 RNW fallback configuration identification (FB ID) 2778.116 RNW plan configuration identification (PLAN ID) 2788.117 RNW plan database state 2798.118 RX antenna supervision period (RXANT) 2818.119 RX level balance (RXBAL) 2818.120 RX level based TCH access (RXTA) 2828.121 RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 2 UL TSL (RL02) 2838.122 RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 3 UL TSL (RL03) 2848.123 RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 4 UL TSL (RL04) 2858.124 RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 1 with 2 UL TSL (RL12) 2868.125 RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 1 with 3 UL TSL (RL13) 2878.126 RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 1 with 4 UL TSL (RL14) 2888.127 RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 2 with 3 UL TSL (RL23) 2898.128 RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 2 with 4 UL TSL (RL24) 2908.129 SAIC DL C/I offset (SCIO) 2918.130 service area penalty time (SAPT) 2928.131 slow AMR LA enabled (SAL) 2938.132 soft blocking C/I 14.4 (SBCI) 2948.133 Soft Blocking C/I AMR FR (SBAF) 2958.134 soft blocking C/I AMR HR (SBAH) 2968.135 soft blocking C/I FR (SBF) 2978.136 Soft Blocking C/I HR (SBH) 2988.137 soft blocking C/N 14.4 (SBCN) 2998.138 soft blocking C/N AMR FR (SBCNAF) 3008.139 soft blocking C/N AMR HR (SBCNAH) 3018.140 soft blocking C/N FR (SBCNF) 3028.141 Soft Blocking C/N HR (SBCNH) 3038.142 starting moment for supervision of BTS (SMBNT) 3038.143 starting moment for supervision of BTS (SMBNT) 3048.144 subscriber type (ST) 3058.145 supervision period length for EGPRS inactivity alarm (SPL) 3068.146 TCH in handover (HRI) 3078.147 TCH transaction count (TTRC) 3098.148 threshold for high TCH interference level (HIFLVL) 3108.149 time limit WPS (TLW) 3108.150 time limit WPS handover (TLWH) 311


13/04/2007


8.151 TRHO Guard Time (TGT) 3128.152 triggering threshold for service area penalty (TTSAP) 3138.153 UL priority 1 SSS (UP1) 3148.154 UL priority 2 SSS (UP2) 3158.155 UL priority 3 SSS (UP3) 3168.156 UL priority 4 SSS (UP4) 3168.157 upper limit for FR TCH resources (HRU) 3178.158 upper limit of MS speed class 1 (MSSCF) 3188.159 upper limit of MS speed class 2 (MSSCS) 3198.160 variable DL step size (VDLS) 3208.161 WCDMA FDD NCCR enabled (WFNE) 3218.162 WCDMA FDD NCCR preferred (WFNP) 3228.163 WPS preference capacity (WPEC) 3238.164 WPS priority capacity (WPIC) 324

9 Base Transceiver Station (BTS) radio network object parameters 3259.1 adaptive LA algorithm (ALA) 3259.2 administrative state 3269.3 AMR FR codec mode set (FRC) 3279.4 AMR FR hysteresis 1 (FRH1) 3299.5 AMR FR hysteresis 2 (FRH2) 3309.6 AMR FR hysteresis 3 (FRH3) 3319.7 AMR FR initial codec mode indicator (ICMI and FRI) 3329.8 AMR FR start mode (FRS) 3349.9 AMR FR threshold 1 (FRT1) 3359.10 AMR FR threshold 2 (FRT2) 3369.11 AMR FR threshold 3 (FRT3) 3379.12 AMR HR codec mode set (HRC) 3389.13 AMR HR hysteresis 1 (HRH1) 3409.14 AMR HR hysteresis 2 (HRH2) 3419.15 AMR HR hysteresis 3 (HRH3) 3429.16 AMR HR initial codec mode indicator (ICMI and HRI) 3439.17 AMR HR start mode (HRS) 3459.18 AMR HR threshold 1 (HRT1) 3469.19 AMR HR threshold 2 (HRT2) 3479.20 AMR HR threshold 3 (HRT3) 3489.21 antenna hopping (AHOP) 3509.22 background BTS hopping mode (BHOP) 3519.23 background hopping sequence number 1 (BHSN1) 3529.24 background hopping sequence number 2 (BHSN2) 3539.25 background MAIO offset (BMO) 3549.26 background MAIO step (BMS) 3559.27 background mobile allocation frequency list (BMAL) 3569.28 background underlay BTS hopping mode (BUHOP) 3579.29 background underlay hopping sequence number (BUHSN) 3599.30 background underlay MAIO offset (BUMO) 3609.31 background underlay MAIO step (BUMS) 3619.32 background underlay mobile allocation frequency list (BUMAL) 3629.33 boundary 0 (BO0) 3639.34 boundary 1 (BO1) 3649.35 boundary 2 (BO2) 3659.36 boundary 3 (BO3) 366

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

9.37 boundary 4 (BO4) 3679.38 boundary 5 (BO5) 3689.39 BTS downlink throughput factor for CS1-CS4 (TFD) 3699.40 BTS downlink throughput factor for MCS1-MCS9 (TFDM) 3709.41 BTS hopping mode (HOP) 3719.42 BTS identification (BTS) 3729.43 BTS load in SEG (LSEG) 3739.44 BTS name (NAME) 3749.45 BTS uplink throughput factor for CS1-CS4 (TFU) 3759.46 BTS uplink throughput factor for MCS1-MCS4 (TFUM1) 3769.47 BTS uplink throughput factor for MCS1-MCS9 (TFUM) 3779.48 C/N threshold (CNT) 3789.49 coding schemes CS3 and CS4 enabled (CS34) 3799.50 dedicated GPRS capacity (CDED) 3809.51 default GPRS capacity (CDEF) 3819.52 DFCA mobile allocation frequency lists (DMAL) 3829.53 DFCA mode (DMOD) 3839.54 DFCA unsynchronized mode MA frequency list (DUMAL) 3849.55 DL coding scheme in acknowledged mode (DCSA) 3859.56 DL coding scheme in unacknowledged mode (DCSU) 3879.57 DL noise level (DLN) 3889.58 EGPRS enabled (EGENA) 3899.59 EGPRS inactivity alarm end time (EAE) 3909.60 EGPRS inactivity alarm end time (EAE) 3909.61 EGPRS inactivity alarm start time (EAS) 3919.62 EGPRS inactivity alarm start time (EAS) 3929.63 EGPRS inactivity alarm weekdays (EAW) 3939.64 forced AMR HR mode C/I threshold (FAHT) 3959.65 forced HR mode C/I averaging period (FHR) 3969.66 forced HR mode C/I threshold (FHT) 3979.67 forced HR mode hysteresis (FHH) 3989.68 frequency band in use (BAND) 3999.69 GPRS non BCCH layer rxlev lower limit (GPL) 4009.70 GPRS non BCCH layer rxlev upper limit (GPU) 4009.71 hopping sequence number 1 (HSN1) 4019.72 hopping sequence number 2 (HSN2) 4039.73 MAIO offset (MO) 4049.74 MAIO Step (MS) 4059.75 max GPRS capacity (CMAX) 4069.76 mobile allocation frequency list (MAL) 4079.77 MS tx pwr min (PMIN) 4089.78 non BCCH layer offset (NBL) 4099.79 PCU identifier (PCU ID) 4109.80 radius extension (EXT) 4119.81 RX diversity (RDIV) 4129.82 STIRC enabled (STIRC) 4139.83 transport type (TRAT) 4149.84 UL coding scheme in acknowledged mode (UCSA) 4159.85 UL coding scheme in unacknowledged mode (UCSU) 4169.86 UL noise level (ULN) 4179.87 underlay BTS hopping mode (UHOP) 4189.88 underlay hopping sequence number (UHSN) 420


13/04/2007


9.89 underlay MAIO offset (UMO) 4219.90 underlay MAIO step (UMS) 4229.91 underlay mobile allocation frequency list (UMAL) 423

10 SEG-specific Base Transceiver Station (BTS) radio network objectparameters 425

10.1 adjacency on other band (DBC) 42510.2 allow IMSI attach detach (ATT) 42610.3 AMH lower load threshold (ALT) 42710.4 AMH max load of target cell (AML) 42810.5 AMH upper load threshold (AUT) 42910.6 AMR Radio Link Timeout (ARLT) 43010.7 averaging period (AP) 43110.8 background BTS colour code (BBCC) 43210.9 background network colour code (BNCC) 43310.10 BCCH allocation usage for active MS (ACT) 43510.11 BTS colour code (BCC) 43610.12 BTS load threshold (BLT) 43710.13 BTS measure average (BMA) 43810.14 C31 hysteresis (CHYS) 43910.15 C32 qual (QUAL) 44010.16 calculation of minimum number of slots (CALC) 44110.17 call reestablishment allowed (RE) 44210.18 cell bar qualify (QUA) 44310.19 cell barred (BAR) 44410.20 cell identity (CI) 44510.21 cell load for channel search (CLC) 44610.22 cell reselect hysteresis (HYS) 44710.23 cell reselect offset (REO) 44810.24 cell reselection parameter index (PI) 44910.25 cell type (CTY) 45010.26 coding scheme hop (CODH) 45110.27 coding scheme no hop (COD) 45210.28 direct GPRS access BTS (DIRE) 45310.29 directed retry method (DRM) 45410.30 directed retry used (DR) 45510.31 DL adaption probability threshold (DLA) 45610.32 DL BLER crosspoint for CS selection hop (DLBH) 45710.33 DL BLER crosspoint for CS selection no hop (DLB) 45810.34 DTM enabled (DENA) 45910.35 DTX Mode (DTX) 46010.36 early sending indication (ESI) 46110.37 EGPRS link adaptation enabled (ELA) 46210.38 emergency call restricted (EC) 46310.39 FDD cell reselect offset (FDD) 46410.40 GPRS cell barred (GBAR) 46510.41 GPRS cell reselect hysteresis (GHYS) 46610.42 GPRS enabled (GENA) 46710.43 GPRS fdd cell reselect offset (GFDD) 46810.44 GPRS max number of retransmission (GRET) 46910.45 GPRS minimum fdd threshold (GFDM) 47010.46 gprs ms txpwr max cch 1x00 (GTXP2) 472

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

10.47 GPRS MS txpwr max cch (GTXP1) 47310.48 GPRS not allowed access classes (GACC) 47410.49 GPRS number of slots spread transmission (GSLO) 47510.50 GPRS rxlev access min (GRXP) 47710.51 GPRS threshold to search WCDMA RAN cells (QSRP) 47710.52 HCS threshold (HCS) 47910.53 HSCSD cell load lower limit (HCL) 48010.54 HSCSD cell load upper limit (HCU) 48110.55 HSCSD downgrade guard time (HDT) 48210.56 HSCSD minimum exhaust (HME) 48310.57 HSCSD regular cell load upper limit (HRCU) 48410.58 HSCSD TCH capacity minimum (HTM) 48510.59 HSCSD upgrade gain (HUG) 48610.60 HSCSD upgrade guard time (HUT) 48810.61 identification of BCCH frequency list (IDLE) 48910.62 IMSI based handover GSM enabled (IGE) 49010.63 IMSI based handover WCDMA enabled (IWE) 49110.64 initial MCS for acknowledged mode (MCA) 49210.65 initial MCS for unacknowledged mode (MCU) 49310.66 intelligent directed retry used (IDR) 49410.67 limit for free TCHs (LIMIT) 49510.68 location area code (LAC) 49610.69 lower limit for FR TCH resources (FRL) 49710.70 maximum BLER in acknowledged mode (BLA) 49810.71 maximum BLER in unacknowledged mode (BLU) 49910.72 max number of repetition (NY1) 50010.73 max number of retransmission (RET) 50110.74 max queue length (MQL) 50210.75 max time limit directed retry (MADR) 50310.76 mean BEP offset 8PSK (MBP) 50410.77 mean BEP offset GMSK (MBG) 50510.78 measurement BCCH Allocation list (MEAS) 50610.79 minimum fdd threshold (FDM) 50710.80 min time limit directed retry (MIDR) 50810.81 MS max distance in call setup (DMAX) 50910.82 MS priority used (MPU) 51010.83 MS txpwr max CCH1x00 (TXP2) 51110.84 MS txpwr max CCH (TXP1) 51310.85 MS txpwr max GSM1x00 (PMAX2) 51410.86 MS txpwr max GSM (PMAX1) 51510.87 mobile country code (MCC) 51610.88 mobile network code (MNC) 51710.89 multiband cell reporting (MBR) 51810.90 network colour code (NCC) 51910.91 network service entity identifier (NSEI) 52010.92 new establishment causes support (NECI) 52210.93 not allowed access classes (ACC) 52310.94 number of blocks for access grant msg (AG) 52410.95 number of multiframes (MFR) 52510.96 number of slots spread trans (SLO) 52610.97 number of traffic channels reserved for priority subscribers only

(TCRP) 528


13/04/2007


10.98 packet service entity identifier (PSEI) 52910.99 PAGCH blocks (PAB) 53010.100 PBCCH blocks (PBB) 53110.101 penalty time (PET) 53210.102 PLMN permitted (PLMN) 53310.103 power offset (PO) 53410.104 PRACH blocks (PRB) 53510.105 prefer BCCH frequency GPRS (BFG) 53510.106 priority class (PRC) 53710.107 queueing priority call (QPC) 53810.108 queueing priority non-urgent handover (QPN) 53910.109 queueing priority urgent handover (QPH) 54010.110 queue priority used (QPU) 54110.111 radio link timeout (RLT) 54210.112 ra reselect hysteresis (RRH) 54310.113 reselection time (RES) 54410.114 reservation method used in trunk reservation (REM) 54510.115 restricted use of priority channels in incoming handover (RUP) 54610.116 routing area code (RAC) 54710.117 rxlev access min (RXP) 54810.118 scale ord (SCO) 54910.119 SEG identification (SEG) 55010.120 SEG name (SEGNAME) 55110.121 SMS CB used (CB) 55210.122 Table Identification (TBL) 55310.123 TCH rate intra-cell handover (TRIH) 55410.124 temporary offset (TEO) 55610.125 threshold to search WCDMA RAN cells (QSRI) 55710.126 time limit call (TLC) 55910.127 time limit handover (TLH) 56010.128 timer for periodic MS location updating (PER) 56110.129 traffic types (TT) 56210.130 TRHO guard time (TGT) 56310.131 trunk reservation used (TR) 56410.132 TRX priority in TCH allocation (TRP) 56510.133 UL adaption probability threshold (ULA) 56610.134 UL BLER crosspoint for CS selection hop (ULBH) 56710.135 UL BLER crosspoint for CS selection no hop (ULB) 56810.136 upper limit for FR TCH resources (FRU) 569

11 Dynamic Abis Pool (DAP) radio network object parameters 57111.1 BCSU ID (BCSU) 57111.2 circuit (CRCT) 57211.3 new first time slot (NFT) 57411.4 new last time slot (NLT) 57511.5 packet service entity identifier (PSEI) 57611.6 PCU index (PCU) 57711.7 pool identification (ID) 57811.8 pool size (SIZE) 579

12 GPRS control (GPC) radio network object parameters 58112.1 NCCR number of zero results (NNZR) 581

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

12.2 NCCR other PCU cell offset (NOPO) 58212.3 NCCR rxlev idle mode window size (NRIW) 58312.4 NCCR rxlev transfer mode window size (NRTW) 58412.5 QC EGPRS DL RLC ack throughput threshold (QEDRT) 58512.6 QC EGPRS UL RLC ack throughput threshold (QEURT) 58512.7 QC GPRS DL RLC ack throughput (QGDRT) 58612.8 QC GPRS UL RLC ack throughput (QGURT) 587

13 Handover control (HOC) radio network object parameters 58913.1 800 reporting offset (R8) 58913.2 800 reporting threshold (RT8) 59013.3 900 reporting offset (R9) 59113.4 900 reporting threshold (RT9) 59213.5 1800 reporting offset (R18) 59313.6 1800 reporting threshold (RT18) 59413.7 1900 reporting offset (R19) 59513.8 1900 reporting threshold (RT19) 59613.9 adjacent cell averaging window size (AWS) 59713.10 adjacent WCDMA RAN cell averaging window size (UAWS) 59713.11 all adjacent cells averaged (AAC) 59813.12 all adjacent WCDMA RAN cells averaged (UAAC) 59913.13 all interfering cells averaged (AVER) 60013.14 AMH traffic control IUO (ATCI) 60113.15 AMH traffic control MCN (ATCM) 60213.16 AMH TRHO pbgt margin (ATPM) 60313.17 C/I estimation method 60413.18 count of successive rapid field drop thresholds (CNT) 60513.19 deep dropping EDGE monitoring window (ERMW) 60613.20 enable enhanced rapid field drop (ERFD) 60713.21 enable fast averaging call setup (EFA) 60813.22 enable fast averaging HO (EFH) 60913.23 enable fast averaging PC (EFP) 60913.24 enable inter FRT handover (EFHO) 61013.25 enable intracell handover interference DL (EIH) 61213.26 enable intracell handover interference UL (EIC) 61313.27 enable MS distance process (EMS) 61413.28 enable power budget handover (EPB) 61513.29 enable SDCCH handover (ESD) 61513.30 enable TCH assignment super IUO (ETA) 61613.31 enable umbrella handover (EUM) 61713.32 enhanced rapid field drop duration (ERD) 61813.33 FDD reporting offset (FR) 61913.34 FDD reporting threshold (FRT) 62013.35 GSM PLMN priorisation (GPP) 62113.36 handover period power budget (HPP) 62213.37 handover period umbrella (HPU) 62313.38 inter-system direct access enabled (IDE) 62413.39 interfering cell averaging window size (SIZE) 62513.40 interfering cell number of zero results (ZERO) 62613.41 intra HO threshold Rx qual AMR FR (IHRF) 62613.42 Intra HO threshold Rx qual AMR HR (IHRH) 62813.43 invalid BSIC reporting (IBR) 629


13/04/2007


13.44 level downlink weighting (LDW) 63013.45 level downlink window size (LDWS) 63113.46 level uplink weighting (LUW) 63213.47 level uplink window size (LUWS) 63313.48 lower C/I limit for band 1-6 (L1-L6) 63413.49 lower speed limit (LSL) 63513.50 minimum BSIC decode time (TIM) 63613.51 min int between HO req (MIH) 63613.52 min int between unsucc HO attempt (MIU) 63713.53 min interval between IUO HO req BQ (MIR) 63813.54 min interval between unsucc ISHO attempt (UMIU) 63913.55 min interval between unsucc IUO HO (MIO) 64013.56 min traffic load for speech call (LTSC) 64113.57 modified averaging window (ERAW) 64213.58 modified number of zero results (ERZ) 64213.59 MS distance averaging window size (MSWS) 64313.60 MS distance HO threshold ext cell max (MAX) 64413.61 MS distance ho threshold ext cell min (MIN) 64513.62 MS distance threshold param MS max range (MSR) 64613.63 MS distance threshold param Nx (MSN) 64713.64 MS distance threshold param Px (MSP) 64813.65 MS speed averaging (MSA) 64813.66 MS speed detection state (SDS) 64913.67 MS speed threshold Nx (STN) 65013.68 MS speed threshold Px (STP) 65113.69 non BCCH layer access threshold (LAR) 65213.70 non BCCH layer exit threshold (LER) 65313.71 non BCCH layer exit threshold nx (LEN) 65413.72 non BCCH layer exit threshold px (LEP) 65513.73 number of measured FDD cells (FDMR) 65613.74 number of WCDMA RAN zero results (UNOZ) 65713.75 number of zero results (NOZ) 65813.76 priority adjustment step for band 1-7 (P1-P7) 65813.77 quality downlink weighting (QDW) 66013.78 quality downlink window size (QDWS) 66113.79 quality uplink weighting (QUW) 66113.80 quality uplink window size (QUWS) 66213.81 reporting rate (REP) 66313.82 serving band reporting (SBR) 66413.83 super reuse bad C/I threshold (BCI) 66513.84 super reuse bad C/I threshold AMR HR (BCIH) 66613.85 super reuse bad C/I threshold AMR FR (BCIF) 66713.86 super reuse bad C/I threshold Nx (BNX) 66813.87 super reuse bad C/I threshold Px (BPX) 66913.88 super reuse bad threshold Nx (CBN) 67013.89 super reuse bad threshold Px (CBP) 67113.90 super reuse bad threshold Rx level (CBR) 67213.91 super reuse estimation method (METH) 67213.92 super reuse good C/I threshold (GCI) 67413.93 super reuse good C/I threshold AMR HR (GCIH) 67413.94 super reuse good C/I threshold AMR FR (GCIF) 67513.95 super reuse good C/I threshold Nx (GNX) 676

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

13.96 super reuse good C/I threshold Px (GPX) 67713.97 super reuse good threshold Nx (CGN) 67813.98 super reuse good threshold Px (CGP) 67913.99 super reuse good threshold Rx level (CGR) 68013.100 threshold deep dropping EDGE (ERT) 68113.101 threshold deep dropping EDGE Nx (ERN) 68213.102 threshold deep dropping EDGE Px (ERP) 68213.103 threshold dl Rx qual AMR HR (QDRH) 68313.104 threshold dl Rx qual for AMR FR (QDRF) 68513.105 threshold for multi-RAT MS (QSRC) 68613.106 threshold interference downlink Nx (IDN) 68713.107 threshold interference downlink Px (IDP) 68813.108 threshold interference downlink Rx level (IDR) 68813.109 threshold interference uplink Nx (IUN) 68913.110 threshold interference uplink Px (IUP) 69013.111 threshold interference uplink Rx level (IUR) 69113.112 threshold level downlink Nx (LDN) 69213.113 threshold level downlink Px (LDP) 69313.114 threshold level downlink Rx level (LDR) 69413.115 threshold level uplink for rapid field drop (RPD) 69413.116 threshold level uplink Nx (LUN) 69513.117 threshold level uplink Px (LUP) 69613.118 threshold level uplink Rx level (LUR) 69713.119 threshold qual downlink Nx (QDN) 69813.120 threshold qual downlink Px (QDP) 69913.121 threshold qual downlink Rx qual (QDR) 70013.122 threshold qual uplink Nx (QUN) 70113.123 threshold qual uplink Px (QUP) 70213.124 threshold qual uplink Rx qual (QUR) 70213.125 threshold ul Rx qual AMR FR (QURF) 70313.126 threshold ul Rx qual AMR HR (QURH) 70513.127 triggering ratio for WCDMA RAN cell penalty (TRW) 70613.128 upper speed limit (USL) 70713.129 WCDMA RAN cell penalty time (WCP) 708

14 Text input and output (IO_TEXT/TID) radio network objectparameters 709

14.1 text ID (TID) 70914.2 text string (TEXT) 710

15 Location area code to signalling point code (LAC to SPC) radionetwork object parameters 713

15.1 location area code (LAC) 71315.2 mapping entry index (MEI) 71415.3 signaling point code (SPC) 715

16 Location Services Element (LCSE) radio network objectparameters 717

16.1 altitude of ground level (AL) 71716.2 antenna bearing (ABE) 71816.3 antenna height (AHE) 71916.4 antenna horizontal half power beam width (AHB) 720


13/04/2007


16.5 BCCH frequency (FREQ) 72016.6 BTS colour code (BCC) 72116.7 cell identification (CI) 72216.8 city type (CIT) 72316.9 latitude degrees (LAD) 72416.10 latitude fractions (LAF) 72516.11 latitude minutes (LAM) 72616.12 latitude seconds (LAS) 72716.13 latitude sign (LADS) 72816.14 location area code (LAC) 72916.15 longitude degrees (LOD) 72916.16 longitude fractions (LOF) 73016.17 longitude minutes (LOM) 73116.18 longitude seconds (LOS) 73216.19 longitude sign (LODS) 73316.20 maximum radiated power (MRP) 73416.21 network colour code (NCC) 73516.22 predicted back serving radius (BSR) 73616.23 predicted front serving radius (FSR) 73716.24 Rx levels allowed for positioning (RXA) 738

17 Location Measurement Unit Area (LMUA) radio network objectparameters 741

17.1 base control function identification (BCF) 74117.2 frame number offset (FNO) 74217.3 LMU area identification (LMUA) 74317.4 LMU TSL fn offset (LTO) 74417.5 transmission equipment (TRE) 745

18 Mobile allocation frequency list (MA/MAL) radio network objectparameters 747

18.1 DFCA MA list state (MALS) 74718.2 frequency (FREQ) 74818.3 identification of mobile allocation frequency list 74918.4 type of mobile allocation frequency list 751

19 Network service entity (NSE) radio network object parameters 75319.1 local UDP port number (LPNBR) 75319.2 network service entity identifier (NSEI) 75419.3 NSE type 75519.4 packet service entity identifier (PSEI) 75619.5 PFC feature mode 757

20 Network service virtual connection (NS_VC) radio network objectparameters 759

20.1 administrative state 75920.2 bearer channel identifier (BCI) 76020.3 bearer channel name (BCN) 76120.4 committed information rate (CIR) 76220.5 data link connection identifier (DLCI) 76320.6 network service entity identifier (NSEI) 76320.7 network service virtual connection identifier (NSVCI) 764

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

20.8 network service virtual connection name (NAME) 76520.9 Network Service Virtual Link Identifier (NSVLI) 76620.10 network service virtual link name 76720.11 packet service entity identifier (PSEI) 76820.12 preconfigured SGSN IP endpoint (PRE) 76920.13 remote data weight (RDW) 77020.14 remote host name (RHOST) 77120.15 Remote IP Address Value 77220.16 remote signalling weight (RSW) 77320.17 Remote UDP Port Number (RPNBR) 774

21 Packet Control Unit (PCU) radio network object parameters 77721.1 BCSU ID (BCSU) 77721.2 packet service entity identifier (PSEI) 77821.3 PCU identifier (PCU ID) 77921.4 PCU Index (PCU) 78021.5 plug-in unit type 781

22 Power control (POC) radio network object parameters 78322.1 ALA enabled (AENA) 78322.2 binary representation ALPHA (ALPHA) 78422.3 binary representation TAU (GAMMA) 78522.4 bit error probability filter averaging period (BEP) 78622.5 BS TX pwr max (PMAX1) 78722.6 BS TX pwr max1x00 (PMAX2) 78822.7 BS TX pwr min (PMIN) 78922.8 BS TX pwr offset (POFF) 79022.9 idle mode signal strength filter period (IFP) 79122.10 min int between ALA (AMIN) 79222.11 pc averaging lev dl weighting (LDW) 79322.12 pc averaging lev dl window size (LDS) 79422.13 pc averaging lev ul weighting (LUW) 79522.14 pc averaging lev ul window size (LUS) 79622.15 pc averaging qual dl weighting (QDW) 79722.16 pc averaging qual dl window size (QDS) 79822.17 pc averaging qual ul weighting (QUW) 79922.18 pc averaging qual ul window size (QUS) 80022.19 pc lower threshold dl Rx qual AMR FR (LDRF) 80022.20 pc lower threshold dl Rx qual AMR HR (LDRH) 80222.21 pc lower threshold ul Rx qual AMR FR (LURF) 80322.22 pc lower threshold ul Rx qual AMR HR (LURH) 80422.23 pc lower thresholds lev dl Nx (LDN) 80522.24 pc lower thresholds lev dl Px (LDP) 80622.25 pc lower thresholds lev dl Rx level (LDR) 80722.26 pc lower thresholds lev ul Nx (LUN) 80822.27 pc lower thresholds lev ul Px (LUP) 80922.28 pc lower thresholds lev ul Rx level (LUR) 81022.29 pc lower thresholds qual dl Nx (LDN) 81022.30 pc lower thresholds qual dl Px (LDP) 81122.31 pc lower thresholds qual dl Rx qual (LDR) 81222.32 pc lower thresholds qual ul Nx (LUN) 81322.33 pc lower thresholds qual ul Px (LUP) 814


13/04/2007


22.34 pc lower thresholds qual ul Rx qual (LUR) 81522.35 pc lower thresholds qual144 Nx (LQN) 81622.36 pc lower thresholds qual144 Px (LQP) 81722.37 pc lower thresholds qual144 Rx level (LQR) 81822.38 pc upper threshold dl Rx qual AMR FR (UDRF) 81922.39 pc upper threshold dl Rx qual AMR HR (UDRH) 82122.40 pc upper threshold ul Rx qual AMR FR (UURF) 82222.41 pc upper threshold ul Rx qual AMR HR (UURH) 82322.42 pc upper thresholds lev dl Nx (UDN) 82422.43 pc upper thresholds lev dl Px (UDP) 82522.44 pc upper thresholds lev dl Rx level (UDR) 82622.45 pc upper thresholds lev ul Nx (UUN) 82722.46 pc upper thresholds lev ul Px (UUP) 82822.47 pc upper thresholds lev ul Rx level (UUR) 82922.48 pc upper thresholds qual dl Nx (UDN) 82922.49 pc upper thresholds qual dl Px (UDP) 83022.50 pc upper thresholds qual dl Rx qual (UDR) 83122.51 pc upper thresholds qual ul Nx (UUN) 83222.52 pc upper thresholds qual ul Px (UUP) 83322.53 pc upper thresholds qual ul Rx qual (UUR) 83422.54 power control interval (INT) 83522.55 power ctrl enabled (PENA) 83622.56 power decr limit band 0 (PD0) 83722.57 power decr limit band 1 (PD1) 83822.58 power decr limit band 2 (PD2) 83922.59 power decr qual factor (PDF) 84022.60 power incr step size (INC) 84122.61 power limit ALA (ALIM) 84122.62 power red step size (RED) 84222.63 transfer mode signal strength filter period (TFP) 843

23 Routing area (RA) radio network object parameters 84523.1 location area code (LAC) 84523.2 mobile country code (MCC) 84623.3 mobile network code (MNC) 84723.4 network service entity identifier (NSEI) 84823.5 packet service entity identifier (PSEI) 84923.6 routing area code (RAC) 850

24 Radio timeslot (RTSL) radio network object parameters 85124.1 Abis speech circuit/PCM (PCMTSL) 85124.2 Abis speech circuit/PCM (PCMTSL) 85224.3 Abis speech circuit/PCM (PCMTSL) 85324.4 Abis speech circuit/PCM (PCMTSL) 85424.5 Abis speech circuit/PCM (PCMTSL) 85524.6 Abis speech circuit/PCM (PCMTSL) 85624.7 Abis speech circuit/PCM (PCMTSL) 85724.8 Abis speech circuit/PCM (PCMTSL) 85824.9 Abis speech circuit/TSL (PCMTSL) 85924.10 Abis speech circuit/TSL (PCMTSL) 86024.11 Abis speech circuit/TSL (PCMTSL) 86224.12 Abis speech circuit/TSL (PCMTSL) 863

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

24.13 Abis speech circuit/TSL (PCMTSL) 86424.14 Abis speech circuit/TSL (PCMTSL) 86524.15 Abis speech circuit/TSL (PCMTSL) 86724.16 Abis speech circuit/TSL (PCMTSL) 86824.17 administrative state 86924.18 administrative state 87024.19 administrative state 87124.20 administrative state 87224.21 administrative state 87324.22 administrative state 87424.23 administrative state 87624.24 administrative state 87724.25 RTSL type 0 (CH0) 87824.26 RTSL type 1 (CH1) 88024.27 RTSL type 2 (CH2) 88224.28 RTSL type 3 (CH3) 88424.29 RTSL type 4 (CH4) 88624.30 RTSL type 5 (CH5) 88724.31 RTSL type 6 (CH6) 88924.32 RTSL type 7 (CH7) 891

25 Subscriber group (SG) radio network object parameters 89325.1 authorised networks identification (ANE) 89325.2 home mobile country code (HMCC) 89425.3 home mobile network code (HMNC) 89525.4 subscriber group identification (SG) 89625.5 subscriber group name (NAME) 89625.6 WCDMA RAN access (WA) 897

26 Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC) radio network objectparameters 899

26.1 high response time (RTH) 89926.2 LCS ignore limit (LIL) 90026.3 low response time (RTL) 90126.4 PBS halfrate limit (PHF) 90126.5 PBS stop limit (PSL) 902

27 Trunk reservation decision threshold table (TRK_TBL/TRKT) radionetwork object parameters 905

27.1 decision threshold values (T1-T16) 90527.2 random value upper limit 90627.3 table identification (TBL) 907

28 Transceiver (TRX) radio network object parameters 90928.1 administrative state 90928.2 autoconfigure (AC) 91028.3 background C/I estimation type 1-10 (BT1-BT10) 91128.4 background C/I estimation weight 1-10 (BW1-BW10) 91228.5 background cell identification of interfering cell 1-10 (BCI1-BCI10) 91328.6 background direct access level (BDAL) 91428.7 background frequency (BFREQ) 91528.8 background level adjustment 1-10 (BL1-BL10) 916


13/04/2007


28.9 background location area code of interfering cell 1-10 (BLAC1-BLAC10) 917

28.10 background mobile country code of interfering cell (BMCC1-BMCC10) 918

28.11 background mobile network code of interfering cell (BMNC1-BMNC10) 919

28.12 background optimum RX level uplink (BLEV) 92028.13 background training sequence code (BTSC) 92128.14 background TRX frequency type (BFRT) 92228.15 binary outputs (ON/OFF) 92328.16 bit rate (BR) 92428.17 C/I estimation weight 1-10 (W1-W10) 92528.18 C/I estimation type 1-10 (T1-T10) 92628.19 cell identification of interfering cell 1-10 (CI1-CI10) 92628.20 combi link (CL) 92728.21 D-channel O&M link set name (ONAME) 92828.22 D-channel O&M link set number (ONBR) 92928.23 D-channel telecom link set name (DNAME) 93028.24 D-channel telecom link set number (DNBR) 93128.25 DFCA indication (DFCA) 93228.26 direct access level (DAL) 93328.27 dynamic abis pool ID (DAP) 93428.28 E-TRX type (ETRX) 93528.29 frequency (FREQ) 93628.30 GPRS enabled TRX (GTRX) 93828.31 level adjustment 1-10 (L1-L10) 93928.32 location area code of interfering cell 1-10 (LAC1-LAC10) 94028.33 mobile country code of interfering cell (MCC1-MCC10) 94028.34 mobile network code of interfering cell (MNC1-MNC10) 94128.35 optimum RX level downlink (LEVD) 94228.36 optimum RX level uplink (LEV) 94328.37 preferred BCCH TRX (PREF) 94428.38 subslots for signalling (SIGN) 94528.39 training sequence code (TSC) 94628.40 transceiver identification (TRX) 94728.41 TRX frequency type (FRT) 94828.42 TRX half rate support (HRS) 94928.43 TRX identification with frequency (IFREQ) 950

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Contents

List of tables

Table 1. How to read parameter tables 31


13/04/2007


List of figures

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


List of figures


13/04/2007


Summary of changes

Changes between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latestdocument issue contains all changes made to previous issues.

Changes made between issues 25-3 and 25-2

Base Station Controller (BSC) radio network object parameters:

mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 2 UL TSL (BL02): range andstep, and default value have been updated.








RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 3 ULTSL (RL03): default valuehas been updated.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Summary of changes






Changes made between issues 25-2 and 25-1

Adjacent GSM cell (ADJC/ADCE) radio network object parameters:

DTM enabled (DTM): related parameters and parameter relationshipshave been updated.

GPRS MS TX pwr max CCH 1x00 (GTXP2): description has beenupdated.

MS pwr opt level (POPT): description and default value have beenupdated, and Special value field has been added.

MS TX pwr max gsm1x00 (PMAX2): description has been updated.

Base Control Function (BCF) radio network object parameters:

site type (TYPE): a note about EPSILON and Flexi EDGE optionality hasbeen added to the description.

Base Station Controller (BSC) radio network object parameters:

BIM confidence probability (BCP): default value has been updated.

BIM interference threshold (BIT): default value has been updated.

BIM update guard time (BUGT): default value has been updated.

BIM update period (BUP): default value has been updated.

C/I Target 14.4 (CIT): description has been updated.


13/04/2007


C/I target AMR FR (CIAF): default value has been updated.

DCS macrocell threshold (DMAC): description has been updated.

DCS microcell threshold (DMIC): description has been updated.

RNW plan database state: description, range, and formula have beenupdated.

soft blocking C/I 14.4 (SBCI): description has been updated.

Base Transceiver Station (BTS) radio network object parameters:

EGPRS enabled (EGENA): the modified field has been updated.

MS tx pwr min (PMIN): description has been updated.

SEG-specific BTS radio network object parameters:

AMR radio link timeout (ARLT): MML default and description have beenupdated.

BCCH allocation usage for active MS (ACT): description has beenupdated.

DTM enabled (DENA): related parameters and parameter relationshipshave been updated, and Modified field has been added.

gprs ms txpwr max cch 1x00 (GTXP2): description has been updated.

GPRS threshold to search WCDMA RAN cells (QSRP): description,related parameters, and parameter relationships have been updated.

location area code (LAC): the modified field has been updated.

max time limit directed retry (MADR): a note has been added stating thatthe value of the parameter MADR should be smaller than the value of thetimer T10.

mobile country code (MCC): the modified field has been updated.

mobile network code (MNC): the modified field has been updated.

MS txpwr max CCH1x00 (TXP2): description has been updated.

MS txpwr max GSM (PMAX1): description has been updated.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Summary of changes

MS txpwr max GSM1x00 (PMAX2): description has been updated.

PAGCH blocks (PAB): references have been updated.

radio link timeout (RLT): range, MML default, and description have beenupdated.

threshold to search WCDMA RAN cells (QSRI): description, range,formula for getting internal value, related parameters, and parameterrelationships have been updated.

Dynamic Abis Pool (DAP) radio network object parameters:

BCSU ID (BCSU): related parameters and parameter relationships havebeen updated.

PCU index (PCU): related parameters and parameter relationships havebeen updated.

Network service entity (NSE) radio network object parameters:

packet service entity identifier (PSEI): interfaces value has been added.

Network service virtual connection (NS_VC) radio network objectparameters:

administrative state: description and DB name have been updated.

Remote UDP Port Number (RPNBR): description has been updated.

Radio timeslot (RTSL) radio network object parameters:

RTSL type 0 (CH0): description, range, and formula have been updated.








13/04/2007



Changes made between issues 25-1 and 25

Minor editorial corrections.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Summary of changes


13/04/2007


1 Structure and conventions of BSS RadioNetwork Parameter Dictionary

The aim of the parameter dictionary is to assist commissioning engineersand other BSC users to find certain BSS parameters, their meanings andrelations to GSM specifications.

BSS radio network configuration parameters contain the configuration dataand control parameters of the radio network in the Base Station System(BSS). BSS radio network configuration parameters contain

. configuration data and control parameters

. transmission related parameters.

PAFILE and PRFILE parameters are excluded.

The parameters have been listed in alphabetical order by their MML FullName.

Note that parameters that are in other databases or files are not listedhere.

BSC radio network parameter information is also directly available andaccessible via NOLS Documentation Center's Reference InformationService. Information in the Reference Information Service is updated morefrequently than the BSC NED browser environment.

How to read parameter tables:

The value '-' in the parameter table fields means that the information is notavailable, unless indicated otherwise in the following table.

Table 1. How to read parameter tables

Parameter name The user interface name for the parameter.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Structure and conventions of BSS Radio Network ParameterDictionary

Table 1. How to read parameter tables (cont.)

Abbreviated name The parameter name used in XML and CSV plan files.

Managed object The object for which the parameter is defined.

Parameter group The functional group to which the parameter belongs.

The value '-' means that the information is not relevant in BSC.

Multiplicity The multiplicity of the parameter.

Description Describes the purpose of the parameter and sometimes includesextra information on the parameter.

Range and step The user interface value range for the parameter.

Formula for getting internal value The formula for calculating the system internal value which is usedin radio network plan files.

Default value The system default value specified by Nokia.

Default value notes Additional information (if any) on the default value.

Required on Creation When the value is Mandatory, the parameter is required oncreation.

Related functions The radio-network-related functions (in addition to the mainfunction) of the parameter.

The value '-' means that the information is not relevant in BSC.

Modification Requires object locking = The managed object must be locked bythe user before modification is possible.

Not modifiable = The parameter value can be modified only byrecreating the managed object.

Online = The parameter value can be changed without anydisturbance to ongoing calls.

Modified Describes when the parameter can be modified.

Related parameters Other parameters that affect the parameter.

Parameter relationships Describes the dependencies between the parameter and therelated parameters.

Related options Lists the option(s) related to the parameter.

Related features Lists the feature(s) related to the parameter.

Interfaces The interfaces on which the parameter is transferred. From thenetwork management point of view, the parameters can be dividedinto BSC/MSC/SGSN/RNC/AXC parameters, and planning andmanagement system (NetAct) parameters. The BSC/MSC/SGSN/RNC/AXC parameters are needed in the network whereas theplanning and the management system parameters are auxiliaryparameters that are not implemented in the network, but are usedin the network management and planning processes.

References References (if any) to 3GPP specifications

MML Commands Lists the MML command(s) related to the parameter.


13/04/2007


Table 1. How to read parameter tables (cont.)

MML Abbreviated Name The abbreviated name for the parameter in BSC MML.

MML Full Name The user interface name for the parameter in BSC MML.

Segment Level Parameter When the value is True, the parameter is a BTS segment levelparameter in Multi BCF control.

DB Name The database name for the parameter.

File based provisioning supported When the value is True, the parameter supports File Based PlanProvisioning. Always True or False.

Related topics:

. Changes in Parameters between Releases S11.5 and S12

. PAFILE Timer and Parameter List

. PRFILE and FIFILE Parameter List

. MML Command Descriptions (Path in NED: Reference/Commands/MML Commands)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Structure and conventions of BSS Radio Network ParameterDictionary


13/04/2007


2 Autoconfiguration Pool (ACP) radionetwork object parameters

2.1 Circuit (CRCT)

Parameter name Circuit

Abbreviated name circuit

Managed object ACP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Abis interface ET-PCM numberand the first time slot of the pool. You can also use the &&-structure to set the last time slot of the pool or use the SIZEparameter to give the pool size directly.

Parameter dictionary:

Q3 name: pcmCircuit-ID, firstTSL, lastTSL

Range:

CRCT PCM: 0..3391

CRCT TSLs: in ETSI 1 ..31, in ANSI 1..24

NOTE:

2048..3391 is reserved for OC-3/T1 administration area.

NOTE:

No NetAct interface.

Range and step 0..3391, step 1

Formula for getting internal value internal_value = gui_value

Default value -

Default value notes -

Required on Creation mandatory

Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Autoconfiguration Pool (ACP) radio network object parameters

Modification unmodifiable

Related parameters -

Parameter relationships -

Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ESC, ESD, ESO

MML Abbreviated Name CRCT

MML Full Name Circuit

DB Name

File based provisioning supported False

2.2 pool id

Parameter name ACP ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object ACP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the Pool id of the ACP object.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Not modifiable



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. RAC <-> RAC


13/04/2007


References -

MML Commands ESD, ESO

MML Abbreviated Name

MML Full Name pool id

DB Name

File based provisioning supported

2.3 pool size (SIZE)

Parameter name Pool Size

Abbreviated name poolSize

Managed object ACP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Pool size. The minimum poolsize is 3.

NOTE:

No NetAct interface.



Default value -


Required on Creation optional

Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. Planner <-> RAC. RAC <-> BSC

References -

MML Commands ESC

MML Abbreviated Name SIZE

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Autoconfiguration Pool (ACP) radio network object parameters

MML Full Name pool size

DB Name



13/04/2007


3 Adjacent GSM cell (ADJC/ADCE) radionetwork object parameters

3.1 adjacent cell identification (CI)

Parameter name CI

Abbreviated name adjacentCellIdCI

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the CI of the adjacent cell (targetcell). The parameter is a part of the Cell Id parameter whichconsists of Mobile Country Code, Mobile Network Code, LocationArea Code and the Cell Id of the target cell.

NOTE:

MML Modification: Online

Range and step 0...65535, step 1


Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Adjacent GSM cell (ADJC/ADCE) radio network object parameters

Interfaces . Planner <-> RAC. RAC <-> Optimizer. RAC <-> BSC

References . GSM reference: I-ETS 300 022-1 (GSM 04.08), I-ETS 300 022-1(GSM 04.08)

MML Commands EAC, EAD, EAO, EAM

MML Abbreviated Name CI

MML Full Name adjacent cell identification

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_cell_id.ci

File based provisioning supported true

3.2 adjacent cell index (INDEX)

Parameter name Adjacent Cell Index

Abbreviated name adjcIndex

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the adjacent cell index for theadjacent GSM cell.

MML NOTE: The smallest free index value for serving cell issearched and used.



Default value -1

Default value notes The smallest free index value for serving cell is searched andused.


Special value Set by NetAct system (-1)

Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


13/04/2007


Interfaces . RAC -> BSC. Planner <-> RAC. Optimizer <-> RAC

References -

MML Commands EAC, EAD, EAM, EAX, EAO, EAP

MML Abbreviated Name INDEX

MML Full Name adjacent cell index

DB Name adjacent_cell.adjc_index


3.3 adjacent cell layer (ACL)

Parameter name Adjacent Cell Layer

Abbreviated name adjCellLayer

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the adjacent cell layer in relation tothe active cell. A call can be handed over to the cells that arevisible to the serving cell by adjacency definition. This means thecells of upper layer, serving layer and lower layer. The adjacentcell layer definition can be used, for example, in umbrella andpower budget handovers in defining the target cells according totheir layer.

NOTE:

MML range:

N ... ADJACENT CELL LAYER IS NOT IN USE

SAME ... IN THE SAME LAYER WITH THE SERVING CELL

UPPER ... IN A HIGHER LAYER THAN THE SERVING CELL

LOWER ... IN A LOWER LAYER THAN THE SERVING CELL

Range and step Not Used (0), Same Layer (1), Upper Layer (2), Lower Layer (3)

Formula for getting internal value gui ==> internal

Not Used ==> 0

Same Layer ==> 1

Upper Layer ==> 2

Lower Layer ==> 3

Default value Not Used (0)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value notes Not used


Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Fast Moving MS Handling In Macro Cell (15) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. Planner <-> RAC. RAC <-> Optimizer. RAC <-> BSC

References -

MML Commands EAC, EAM, EAO

MML Abbreviated Name ACL

MML Full Name adjacent cell layer

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_cell_layer


3.4 Adjacent GPRS enabled (AGENA)

Parameter name GPRS Enabled

Abbreviated name gprsEnabled

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the GPRS capability isenabled or disabled in the adjacent cell.

In the adjacent cell creation if this parameter is not given and theSEG and the adjacent cell are in the same BSS, the value of thisparameter is copied from the SEG.

NOTE:


Range and step GPRS is disabled in the adjacent cell (N) (0), GPRS is enabled inthe adjacent cell (Y) (1)


13/04/2007



GPRS is disabled in the adjacent cell (N) ==> 0

GPRS is enabled in the adjacent cell (Y) ==> 1

Default value GPRS is disabled in the adjacent cell (N) (0)



Related functions -




Related options . BSC GPRS Param Enabled (GPRS O&M in BSC) (39) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces . RAC <-> BSC

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AGENA

MML Full Name Adjacent GPRS enabled

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_gprs_enabled


3.5 AMR target cell of direct access to desired layer(DADLA)

Parameter name AMR Target Cell Of Direct Access To Desired Layer

Abbreviated name amrDadlbTargetCell

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the direct access todesired layer/band handover is applied to the adjacent cell in caseof AMR call establishment and whether AMR target cells areprioritised in handover. In handover this parameter indicateswhether AMR is enabled in the target cell. These AMR-enabledcells are then prioritised over other cells for AMR capable MS.

Range and step 0 (DADLA is not applied (N)), 1 (DADLA is applied (Y))

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




DADLA is not applied (N) ==> 0

DADLA is applied (Y) ==> 1

Default value DADLA is not applied (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Direct Access To Desired Layer/Band (35) (optional) AND ( AMRFR (50) (optional) OR AMR HR (72) (optional) )

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DADLA

MML Full Name AMR target cell of direct access to desired layer

DB Name adjacent_cell.amr_dadlb_target_cell


3.6 background BCCH frequency (BFREQ)

Parameter name Background BCCH Frequency

Abbreviated name bg_bcchFrequency

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the BCCH frequency of anadjacent cell used as background data. In background dataactivation, background data is swapped with active data.

NOTE:

Range:

GSM 800: 128...251

GSM 900: 1..124 and 975..1023, 0

GSM 1800: 512..885

GSM 1900: 512..810

DUAL 800/1800 <option>:128...251 or 512...885

DUAL 800/1900 <option>: 128..251 or 512...810

DUAL 900/1800<option>: 1..124, 512..885 and 975..1023, 0

ND (Not defined (65535))

NOTE:

MML modification: Online



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EAM, EAO

MML Abbreviated Name BFREQ

MML Full Name background BCCH frequency

DB Name

File based provisioning supported false

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



3.7 background network colour code (BNCC)

Parameter name Background BSIC NCC

Abbreviated name bg_bsIdentityCodeNcc

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the network colour code numberused as background data. In background data activationbackground data is swapped with active data.

NOTE:

MML range: 0..7 and ND (Not defined (255))

MML default: -




Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name BNCC

MML Full Name background network colour code

DB Name adjacent_cell.bg_adj_bsic.ncc



13/04/2007


3.8 Background BTS colour code (BBCC)

Parameter name Background BSIC BCC

Abbreviated name bg_bsIdentityCodeBcc

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the BTS colour code used asbackground data. In background data activation, background datais swapped with active data.

NOTE:

MML Range: 0...7 and ND (Not defined (255))

MML default: -




Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name BBCC

MML Full Name Background BTS colour code

DB Name adjacent_cell.bg_adj_bsic.bcc


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



3.9 BCCH frequency (FREQ)

Parameter name BCCH Frequency

Abbreviated name bcchFrequency

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the BCCH frequency of anadjacent cell.

NOTE:

The frequency must be equal to the BCCH frequency of anadjacent BTS.

NOTE:

Range:

GSM 800: 128...251

GSM 900: 1..124 and 975..1023, 0

GSM 1800: 512..885

GSM 1900: 512..810

DUAL 900/1800 <option>: 1...124, 512...885 or 975...1023, 0

DUAL 800/1800 <option>:128...251 or 512...885

DUAL 800/1900 <option>: 128...251 or 512...810

NOTE:




Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -



13/04/2007


References . GSM reference: I-ETS 300 022-1 (GSM 04.08)

MML Commands EAC, EAM, EAO, EAP

MML Abbreviated Name FREQ

MML Full Name BCCH frequency

DB Name adjacent_cell.bcch_frequency


3.10 BTS colour code (BCC)

Parameter name BSIC BCC

Abbreviated name adjCellBsicBcc

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the BTS colour code number.

NOTE:

The BSIC parameter, which is used to identify the BTS, iscomposed of the NCC and BCC parameters. BSIC must be equalto the BSIC parameter of adjacent BTS.

NOTE:




Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





MML Abbreviated Name BCC

MML Full Name BTS colour code

DB Name adjacent_cell.bs_identity_code.bcc


3.11 C/I estimation weight (W1-W5)

Parameter name Reference Cell C/I Estimation Weight

Abbreviated name ciEstWeight

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting coefficient of thereference cell. The value 0 detaches the corresponding referencecell from the adjacent cell.

NOTE:

Range: Value 0 is the default in MML.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification online



Related options . C/I Based Handover Candidate Evaluation (18) (optional)

Related features -


References -


13/04/2007


MML Commands EAX, EAO

MML Abbreviated Name W1-W5

MML Full Name C/I estimation weight

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_ci_est(1-5).ci_est_weight


3.12 cell identification of reference cell (CI1-CI5)

Parameter name Reference Cell CI

Abbreviated name adjIdCi

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the reference cell.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name CI1-CI5

MML Full Name cell identification of reference cell

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_ci_est(1-5).adj_id.ci

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




3.13 cell type (CTY)

Parameter name IDR Cell Type

Abbreviated name cellType

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the adjacent cell type.

NOTE:

The cell type parameter of the adjacent cell must be the same.

NOTE:


Range and step GSM (0), MCN (1)


GSM ==> 0

MCN ==> 1

Default value GSM (0)



Related functions -




Related options . Intelligent Directed Retry (IDR) (20) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name CTY

MML Full Name cell type


13/04/2007


DB Name adjacent_cell.cell_type


3.14 chained adj cell (CHAIN)

Parameter name Chained Adj Cell

Abbreviated name chainedAdjacentCell

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the adjacent cell as a chained cell,to which the rapid field drop handover criteria are applied.

Range and step adjacent cell is not chained (N) (0), adjacent cell is chained (Y) (1)


adjacent cell is not chained (N) ==> 0

adjacent cell is chained (Y) ==> 1

Default value adjacent cell is not chained (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Chained Cells In Rapid Field Drop (9) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name CHAIN

MML Full Name chained adj cell

DB Name adjacent_cell.chained_adjacent_cell


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



3.15 directed retry threshold (DRT)

Parameter name Directed Retry Threshold

Abbreviated name drThreshold

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold value of the signalstrength in the adjacent cell for the Directed Retry procedure. If thesignal strength level in the cell is lower than this threshold value,adjacent cell is not accepted as a candidate in directed retry.

Range and step -110...-47 dBm, step 1 dBm

Formula for getting internal value internal_value = (gui_value + 110)

Default value -100 dBm



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Directed Retry (IDR) (20) (optional) OR Directed Retry(1) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name DRT

MML Full Name directed retry threshold

DB Name adjacent_cell.dr_threshold



13/04/2007


3.16 DTM enabled (DTM)

Parameter name DTM Enabled

Abbreviated name dtmEnabled

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Indicates if adjacent cell supports DTM or not.

MML NOTE:

Parameter can be given at Adjacent Cell creation and modificationwhen the neighbour cell is external, that is, under another BSC. IfAdjacent Cell is created with BTS reference, the value is copiedfrom the referenced BTS (Master-BTS). In case of BSC internaladjacent cell the parameter value depends on the "DTM Enabled"value of the reference segment.

NOTE:

When not using the Nokia DTM feature, the parameter can begiven for an external adjacency.

NOTE:

MML Modification: online

Range and step DTM disabled (N) (0), DTM enabled (Y) (1)


DTM disabled (N) ==> 0

DTM enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value DTM disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -


Related parameters gprsEnabled of BTS

Parameter relationships If an adjacent cell is created with a BTS reference, the value iscopied from the referenced BTS (Master-BTS).

Related options . Dual Transfer Mode and Statistics (DTM) (91) (optional)

Related features . BSS20088: Dual Transfer Mode DX O&M and Statistics


References -


MML Abbreviated Name DTM

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name DTM enabled

DB Name adjacent_cell.dtm_enabled_adjc


3.17 DTM power budget margin (DPM)

Parameter name DTM Power Budget Margin

Abbreviated name dtmPowerBudgetMargin

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a power budget handover thresholdfor moving:

a) DTM capable mobiles to a DTM capable neighbour cell whenthe serving cell is not supporting DTM,

b) DTM call attempts to a DTM capable neighbour cell when thereare no free resources for a DTM allocation in the serving DTMcapable cell,

c) DTM calls from a DTM capable cell to a non-DTM capable cell.

Range and step -24...63 dB, step 1 dB


Default value 6 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DPM

MML Full Name DTM power budget margin


13/04/2007


DB Name adjacent_cell.dtm_pbgt_margin


3.18 enable HO margin lev qual (MRGS)

Parameter name Enable HO Margin Lev Qual

Abbreviated name enableHoMarginLevQual

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the handover margins forsignal level and quality will be taken into account in the handoverdecision algorithm.

Range and step not used (N) (0), used (Y) (1)


not used (N) ==> 0

used (Y) ==> 1

Default value used (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name MRGS

MML Full Name enable HO margin lev qual

DB Name adjacent_cell.enable_ho_margin_lev_qual

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




3.19 fast moving threshold (FMT)

Parameter name Fast Moving Threshold

Abbreviated name fastMovingThreshold

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the limit which is compared withthe identification counter (fast moving MS) in the adjacent cell. Ifthe limit is exceeded, the call is handed over from the macrocell tothe best microcell.

Range and step 0...255 SACCH fr, step 1 SACCH fr


Default value 0 SACCH fr

Default value notes Not in use


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name FMT

MML Full Name fast moving threshold

DB Name adjacent_cell.fast_mv_ms_thres



13/04/2007


3.20 GPRS cell barred (GBAR)

Parameter name GPRS Cell Barred

Abbreviated name gprsCellBarred

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you combine the cell barred (BAR) and cellbar qualify (QUA) parameters and indicate the status for cellreselection.

Range and step Status for cell reselection is set to normal (0), Status for cellreselection is set to barred (1)


Status for cell reselection is set to normal ==> 0

Status for cell reselection is set to barred ==> 1

Default value Status for cell reselection is set to normal (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References . GSM reference: 04.60


MML Abbreviated Name GBAR

MML Full Name GPRS cell barred

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_cell_bar_acc_2


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



3.21 GPRS MS TX pwr max CCH (GTXP1)

Parameter name GPRS MS Tx Pwr Max CCH

Abbreviated name gprsMsTxpwrMaxCCH

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum transmission poweran MS may use when accessing a packet control channel in theadjacent cell. This is used when BCCH is in GSM 900 or GSM800 frequency band.

NOTE:


Range and step 5...39 dBm, step 2 dBm

Formula for getting internal value internal_value = (gui_value - 43) / -2

Default value 33 dBm



Related functions -





Related features -


References . 3GPP Reference: TS 04.60, 05.08

MML Commands EAC, EAM, EAO, EQG, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name GTXP1

MML Full Name GPRS MS TX pwr max CCH

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_gprs_ms_txpwr_max_cch



13/04/2007


3.22 GPRS MS TX pwr max CCH 1x00 (GTXP2)

Parameter name GPRS MS Tx Pwr Max CCH 1x00

Abbreviated name gprsMsTxPwrMaxCCH1x00

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum transmission poweran MS may use when accessing a packet control channel in theadjacent cell. This is used when BCCH is in GSM 1900 or GSM1800 frequency band.

NOTE:

MML value range:

GSM 1800: 0..36 dBm (step size 2)

GSM 1900: 0..32 dBm (step size 2) and 33 dBm

NOTE:

NetAct internal value range:

GSM 1800:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

34 dBm: 30

36 dBm: 29

GSM 1900:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

33 dBm: 30

NOTE:







Related functions -




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -


References . 3GPP Reference: TS 04.60, 05.08



MML Full Name GPRS MS TX pwr max CCH 1x00

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_gprs_ms_txp_max_1x


3.23 GPRS penalty time (GPET)

Parameter name GPRS Penalty Time

Abbreviated name gprsPenaltyTime

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the duration for which the GPRSTemporary Offset (GTEO) applies.

Range and step 10...320 s, step 10 s

Formula for getting internal value internal_value = (gui_value - 10) / 10

Default value 10 s



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name GPET


13/04/2007


MML Full Name GPRS penalty time

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_gprs_penalty_time


3.24 GPRS reselect offset (GREO)

Parameter name GPRS Reselect Offset

Abbreviated name gprsReselectOffset

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the offset of the C32 reselectioncriterion for adjacent cell.

NOTE:

Value range:

-52..-12 dB (step size 4)

-10..10 dB (step size 2)

12..48 dB (step size 4)


-52..-12 dB: (UI value + 52)/4

-10..10 dB: (UI value + 32)/2

12..48 dB: (UI value + 76)/4



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name GREO

MML Full Name GPRS reselect offset

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_gprs_resel_offset


3.25 GPRS rxlev Access min (GRXP)

Parameter name GPRS Rxlev Access Min

Abbreviated name gprsRxlevAccessMin

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum power level an MShas to receive before it is allowed to access the adjacent cell.






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name GRXP

MML Full Name GPRS rxlev Access min

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_gprs_rxlev_acc_min



13/04/2007


3.26 GPRS temporary offset (GTEO)

Parameter name GPRS Temporary Offset

Abbreviated name gprsTemporaryOffset

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the negative offset of the C32reselection criterion for the duration of the GPRS penalty time(GPET) after the MS has placed the cell on the list of thestrongest carriers. It is used by the mobile station as part of itscalculation of C32 for the cell reselection process. The parametercan be changed in 10 dB steps. Value 70 dB means infinity.

Range and step 0...70 dB, step 10 dB

Formula for getting internal value internal_value = gui_value / 10

Default value 0 dB



Special value Infinity (70 dB) (7)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: 04.60


MML Abbreviated Name GTEO

MML Full Name GPRS temporary offset

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_gprs_temp_offset


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



3.27 HCS signal level threshold (HCS)

Parameter name HCS Threshold

Abbreviated name hcsThreshold

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the signal strength threshold forapplying HCS in GPRS reselection. If this parameter is not givenin the adjacent cell creation and the SEG and the adjacent cell arein the same BSS, the value of this parameter is copied from theSEG.

NOTE:

MML range: -110,-108,...,-48 (dB) and N

NOTE:


Range and step -110...-48 dB, step 2 dB

Formula for getting internal value internal_value = (gui_value + 110) / 2

Default value 255 dB



Special value Not used (255)

Related functions -





Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HCS

MML Full Name HCS signal level threshold

DB Name adjacent_cell. adj_pbcch_hcs_thr



13/04/2007


3.28 HO level umbrella (AUCL)

Parameter name HO Level Umbrella

Abbreviated name hoLevelUmbrella

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum signal level of anadjacent cell, when a handover is allowed to an adjacent umbrellacell.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name AUCL

MML Full Name HO level umbrella

DB Name adjacent_cell.ho_level_umbrella


3.29 HO load factor (OF)

Parameter name HO Load Factor

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name hoLoadFactor

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how much the priority of the targetBTS will be decreased if the BTS is overloaded. The parameter isused only for the BTSs under one BSC because the BSC cannotget information about the loading of other BTSs.

The HO load factor cannot be greater than the HO priority level.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters hoPriorityLevel of ADCE

Parameter relationships The HO load factor cannot be greater than the HO priority level.

Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name OF

MML Full Name HO load factor

DB Name adjacent_cell.ho_load_factor


3.30 HO margin lev (LMRG)

Parameter name HO Margin Lev

Abbreviated name hoMarginLev

Managed object ADCE


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a threshold for a handover causedby signal level.



Default value 3 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name LMRG

MML Full Name HO margin lev

DB Name adjacent_cell.ho_margin_lev


3.31 HO margin pbgt (PMRG)

Parameter name HO Margin PBGT

Abbreviated name hoMarginPbgt

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a threshold in the power budgetprocess. The handover margin prevents repeated handoverbetween adjacent cells.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value 6 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name PMRG

MML Full Name HO margin pbgt

DB Name adjacent_cell.ho_margin_pbgt


3.32 HO margin qual (QMRG)

Parameter name HO Margin Qual

Abbreviated name hoMarginQual

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a threshold for a handover causedby signal quality.



Default value 0 dB



13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name QMRG

MML Full Name HO margin qual

DB Name adjacent_cell.ho_margin_qual


3.33 HO priority level (PRI)

Parameter name HO Priority Level

Abbreviated name hoPriorityLevel

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the priority level for an adjacentcell. The priority level is used for target cell evaluation by thehandover control process. By using priority levels for the handoveralgorithm, it is possible to take into account the location of theadjacent cell.



Default value 3



Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name PRI

MML Full Name HO priority level

DB Name adjacent_cell.ho_priority_level


3.34 HO target area (HOTA)

Parameter name HO Target Area

Abbreviated name hoTargetArea

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define whether the adjacent cell is anormal or an extended cell. The meanings of the HOTA valuesare:

0 ... Normal cell or Nokia 2nd generation extended cell

1 ... Nokia UltraSite or Nokia Talk-family extended cell, BSC triesto allocate a new channel from a normal transceiver (N-TRX)

2 ... Nokia UltraSite or Nokia Talk-family extended cell, BSC triesto allocate a new channel from an extended transceiver (E-TRX)

3 ... Nokia UltraSite or Nokia Talk-family extended cell, BSC triesto allocate a new channel from a transceiver that is of the sametype as the transceiver where the call exists

MML NOTE:

The allowed values depend on the generations of the source andtarget BTS as presented in the following table.

MML NOTE:

You can check the values of the HO target area parameter withthe EAT command.

Range and step Normal or Nokia 2nd generation extended cell (0), E Cell NormalTRX Alloc (1), E Cell Extended TRX Alloc (2), E Cell Same TypeAs TRX Alloc (3)


Normal or Nokia 2nd generation extended cell ==> 0

E Cell Normal TRX Alloc ==> 1

E Cell Extended TRX Alloc ==> 2

E Cell Same Type As TRX Alloc ==> 3

Default value Normal or Nokia 2nd generation extended cell (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Extended Cell For US (88) (optional) OR Extended Cell Radius(10) (optional)

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EAC, EAM, EAO, EAT

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name HOTA

MML Full Name HO target area

DB Name adjacent_cell.ho_target_area


BTS GENERATION SOURCE BTS GEN. ADJACENT CELL HOTA

Nokia 2nd Generation, Nokia Talk-Family, Nokia PrimeSite, NokiaMetroSite, Nokia InSite, or NokiaUltraSite

Nokia 2nd Generation, NokiaPrimeSite, Nokia MetroSite, orNokia InSite

0

Nokia 2nd Generation, NokiaPrimeSite, Nokia MetroSite, orNokia InSite

Nokia Talk-Family or NokiaUltraSite

0, 1, 2



0, 1, 2, 3

In case of an inter-BSS adjacent cell only values 0 and 2 are allowed.

3.35 level adjustment (L1-L5)

Parameter name Reference Cell Level Adjustment

Abbreviated name levelAdj

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the difference in signal levelsbetween the actual co-frequency cell of the handover candidateand the reference cell which simulates the co-frequency cell.

Range and step -63..63 dB, step 1 dB


Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification online




13/04/2007



Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name L1-L5

MML Full Name level adjustment

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_ci_est(1-5).level_adjustment


3.36 location area code (LAC)

Parameter name LAC

Abbreviated name adjacentCellIdLac

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the LAC of the adjacent cell (targetcell). The identification consists of the Mobile Country CodeNumber, Mobile Network Code Number, Cell Identification and theLocation Area Code.

NOTE:




Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related features -


References -

MML Commands EAC, EAD, EAO, EAM

MML Abbreviated Name LAC

MML Full Name location area code

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_cell_id.lac


3.37 location area code of reference cell (LAC1-LAC5)

Parameter name Reference Cell LAC

Abbreviated name adjIdLac

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the location area number of thereference cell.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -



13/04/2007


References -


MML Abbreviated Name LAC1-LAC5

MML Full Name location area code of reference cell

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_ci_est(1-5).adj_id.lac


3.38 mobile country code (MCC)

Parameter name MCC

Abbreviated name adjacentCellIdMCC

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the MCC of the adjacent cell(target cell). The identification consists of the Mobile Country CodeNumber, Mobile Network Code Number, Cell Identification and theLocation Area Code.

NOTE:

MML Range: 0…999


Range and step 3 characters


Default value -

Default value notes MCC value of serving cell


Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -



MML Commands EAC, EAD, EAM, EAX, EAO, EAT, EAP

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name MCC

MML Full Name mobile country code

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_cell_id.mcc


3.39 mobile country code of reference cell (MCC1-MCC5)

Parameter name Reference Cell MCC

Abbreviated name adjCiMCC

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define the Mobile Country Code of thereference cell.

NOTE:

MML range: 0..999

MML default: MCC value of serving cell



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MCC1-MCC5

MML Full Name mobile country code of reference cell


13/04/2007


DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_ci_est(1-5).adj_id.mcc


3.40 mobile network code (MNC)

Parameter name MNC

Abbreviated name adjacentCellIdMNC

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the MNC of the adjacent cell(target cell). The identification consists of the Mobile Country CodeNumber, Mobile Network Code Number, Cell Identification and theLocation Area Code.

NOTE:

MML range: 0..999


MNC length must be always three digits if MCC is 310, 311, 312,313, 314, 315 or 316.

Range and step 2...3 characters


Default value -

Default value notes MNC value of serving cell


Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -



MML Commands EAC, EAD, EAM, EAX, EAO, EAT, EAP

MML Abbreviated Name MNC

MML Full Name mobile network code

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_cell_id.mnc


3.41 mobile network code of reference cell (MNC1-MNC5)

Parameter name Reference Cell MNC

Abbreviated name adjCiMNC

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define the Mobile Network Code of thereference cell.

NOTE:

MML range: 0...999

MML default: MNC value of serving cell




Default value -



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MNC1-MNC5

MML Full Name mobile network code of reference cell

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_ci_est(1-5).adj_id.mnc


13/04/2007



3.42 MS pwr opt level (POPT)

Parameter name MS Pwr Opt Level

Abbreviated name msPwrOptLevel

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the optimum uplink RF signal levelafter a handover on a channel in the adjacent cell. If optimisationis enabled, the parameter indicates also the desirable uplink signallevel after the handover. The optimisation procedure works only forintra-BSC handovers. The BSC presumes that the uplink signallevel and the downlink signal level are in balance within thecoverage area of the adjacent cell. If the downlink signal is, forexample, 5 dB stronger than the uplink signal, set the value forthis parameter 5dB higher than the desirable uplink signal level.

MML NOTE:

Range: -110..-47 (dBm), N (no optimisation (255))

Default: N



Default value 255




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Optimization Of The MS Power Level In Handovers (13)(optional)

Related features -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



References -


MML Abbreviated Name POPT

MML Full Name MS pwr opt level

DB Name adjacent_cell.ms_pwr_opt_level


3.43 MS TX pwr max gsm (PMAX1)

Parameter name MS Tx Pwr Max GSM

Abbreviated name msTxPwrMaxGSM

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum transmission powerof the MS for each adjacent cell. This parameter replaces oldms_txpwr_max_cell parameter.

NOTE:







Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name PMAX1

MML Full Name MS TX pwr max gsm


13/04/2007


DB Name adjacent_cell.ms_txpwr_max_cell.ms_txpwr_max_gsm


3.44 MS TX pwr max gsm1x00 (PMAX2)

Parameter name MS Tx Pwr Max GSM1x00

Abbreviated name msTxPwrMaxGSM1x00

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum transmission powerof the MS for each adjacent cell.

NOTE:

MML value range:



NOTE:


GSM 1800:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

34 dBm: 30

36 dBm: 29

GSM 1900:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

33 dBm: 30

NOTE:




Default value 30



Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Related options -

Related features -





MML Full Name MS TX pwr max gsm1x00

DB Name adjacent_cell.ms_txpwr_max_cell.ms_txpwr_max_gsm1x00


3.45 NCCR EGPRS PBGT margin (EPM)

Parameter name NCCR EGPRS PBGT Margin

Abbreviated name nccrEgprsPbgtMargin

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold which is used forEGPRS MSs as a power budget margin in the NCCR powerbudget process.

Note: This parameter does not require EGPRS option.



Default value 6 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . NC Cell Re-selection (85) (optional)


13/04/2007


Related features . BSS11112: Network Controlled Cell Re-selection. BSS20394: Network Controlled Cell Re-selection

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EPM

MML Full Name NCCR EGPRS PBGT margin

DB Name adjacent_cell.egprs_pbgt_margin


3.46 NCCR EGPRS quality margin (EQM)

Parameter name NCCR EGPRS Quality Margin

Abbreviated name nccrEgprsQualityMargin

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the margin for EGPRS MS bywhich the signal level of the neighbor cell must exceed the signallevel of the serving cell before the cell reselection is possible.

Note: this parameter does not require EGPRS option



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name EQM

MML Full Name NCCR EGPRS quality margin

DB Name adjacent_cell.egprs_qual_margin


3.47 NCCR GPRS PBGT margin (GPM)

Parameter name NCCR GPRS PBGT Margin

Abbreviated name nccrGprsPbgtMargin

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold which is used forGPRS MSs as a power budget margin in the NCCR power budgetprocess.



Default value 6 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GPM

MML Full Name NCCR GPRS PBGT margin

DB Name adjacent_cell.gprs_pbgt_margin



13/04/2007


3.48 NCCR GPRS quality margin (GQM)

Parameter name NCCR GPRS Quality Margin

Abbreviated name nccrGprsQualityMargin

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the margin for GPRS MS by whichthe signal level of the neighbor cell must exceed the signal level ofthe serving cell before the cell reselection is possible.



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GQM

MML Full Name NCCR GPRS quality margin

DB Name adjacent_cell.gprs_qual_margin


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



3.49 network colour code (NCC)

Parameter name BSIC NCC

Abbreviated name adjCellBsicNcc

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the network colour code number.

NOTE:

The BSIC parameter, which is used to identify the BTS, iscomposed of the NCC and BCC parameters. BSIC must be equalto the BSIC parameter of adjacent BTS.

NOTE:




Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name NCC

MML Full Name network colour code

DB Name adjacent_cell.bs_identity_code.ncc



13/04/2007


3.50 priority class (PRC)

Parameter name Priority Class

Abbreviated name hcsPriorityClass

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the HCS (hierarchical cellstructures) priority for the cells. 0 is the lowest and 7 is the highestpriority. In the adjacent cell creation, if this parameter is not givenand the SEG and the adjacent cell are in the same BSS, the valueof this parameter is copied from the SEG.

NOTE:




Default value 0



Related functions -





Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name PRC

MML Full Name priority class

DB Name adjacent_cell.adj_pbcch_priority_class


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



3.51 reporting priority (REP)

Parameter name Reporting Priority

Abbreviated name reportingPriority

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the reporting priority of the adjacentGSM cell.

Range and step Reporting Priority Is Set To Normal (0), Reporting Priority Is Set ToHigh (1)


Reporting Priority Is Set To Normal ==> 0

Reporting Priority Is Set To High ==> 1

Default value Reporting Priority Is Set To Normal (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Support For Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) (67)(optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: 44.018. 3GPP Reference: 45.008


MML Abbreviated Name REP

MML Full Name reporting priority

DB Name adjacent_cell.rep_priority



13/04/2007


3.52 routing area code (RAC)

Parameter name RAC

Abbreviated name rac

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the routing area code in theadjacent cell.

NOTE:

MML description: In the adjacent cell creation, if this parameter isnot given and the SEG and the adjacent cell are in the same BSS,the value of this parameter is copied from the SEG.

NOTE:




Default value 255



Related functions -





Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name RAC

MML Full Name routing area code

DB Name adjacent_cell.rac_of_adjc


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



3.53 RX lev min cell (SL)

Parameter name RX Lev Min Cell

Abbreviated name rxLevMinCell

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum signal level of anadjacent cell, when a handover is allowed to one of them.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name SL

MML Full Name RX lev min cell

DB Name adjacent_cell.rxlev_min_cell


3.54 synchronised (SYNC)

Parameter name Synchronised


13/04/2007


Abbreviated name synchronized

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the adjacent cell issynchronised with the cell in use.

When defining adjacencies between the sectors ofNokiaPrimeSite, the value of parameter synchronised must be N(not synchronised). This is because the sectors of Nokia PrimeSiteare not synchronised with each other in a fault case, when thesystem has set the sectors to minimum configuration.

Range and step not synchronized (N) (0), synchronized (Y) (1)


not synchronized (N) ==> 0

synchronized (Y) ==> 1

Default value not synchronized (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name SYNC

MML Full Name synchronised

DB Name adjacent_cell.synchronized


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



3.55 target cell of direct access to desired layer (DADL)

Parameter name Target Cell Of Direct Access To Desired Layer

Abbreviated name dadlbTargetCell

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the direct access todesired layer/band handover is applied to the adjacent cell.

Range and step DADL is not applied (N) (0), DADL is applied (Y) (1)


DADL is not applied (N) ==> 0

DADL is applied (Y) ==> 1

Default value DADL is not applied (N) (0)

Default value notes


Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Direct Access To Desired Layer/Band (35) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name DADL

MML Full Name target cell of direct access to desired layer

DB Name adjacent_cell.dadlb_target_cell



13/04/2007


3.56 TRHO target level (TRHO)

Parameter name TRHO Target Level

Abbreviated name trhoTargetLevel

Managed object ADCE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum signal level when atraffic reason handover is allowed to an adjacent cell.

NOTE:

MML range: -109...-47 dBm and N (not in use)



Default value 0 dBm




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name TRHO

MML Full Name TRHO target level

DB Name adjacent_cell.min_trho_level


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


4 Adjacent WCDMA RAN cell (UADJC/ADJW) radio network object parameters

4.1 adjacent cell index (INDEX)

Parameter name ADJW ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the adjacent cell index for theadjacent WCDMA RAN cell. The index value is unambiguousunder a serving GSM cell.



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options . Inter System HO (ISHO Support In BSC) (56) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EAE, EAH, EAI, EAG

MML Abbreviated Name INDEX

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Adjacent WCDMA RAN cell (UADJC/ADJW) radio network objectparameters

MML Full Name adjacent cell index

DB Name utran_adj_cell.uadjc_index


4.2 cell identification (CI)

Parameter name Cell Identification

Abbreviated name AdjwCId

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the cell number for the adjacentWCDMA RAN cell.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References . 3GPP Reference: 08.08. 3GPP Reference: 23.003. 3GPP Reference: 25.413

MML Commands EAE, EAH, EAI


MML Full Name cell identification

DB Name utran_adj_cell.cell_id



13/04/2007


4.3 direct access Ec/Io threshold (DET)

Parameter name Direct Access Ec/Io Threshold

Abbreviated name intSystemDaEcioThr

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum CPICH Ec/Io level ofan adjacent WCDMA RAN cell in decibels, when a direct accessto the adjacent WCDMA RAN cell is allowed. If this parameter hasthe value 0.5 dB, the BSC is not allowed to initiate a direct accessfrom the serving GSM cell to the WCDMA RAN cell because aCPICH Ec/Io level measured by mobiles can be maximum 0 dB.

Range and step -24...0.5 dB, step 0.5 dB

Formula for getting internal value internal_value = (gui_value + 24) * 2

Default value -11.5 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name DET

MML Full Name direct access Ec/Io threshold

DB Name utran_adj_cell.int_system_da_ecio_thr


4.4 downlink transmission diversity (DIV)

Parameter name Downlink Transmission Diversity

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name txDiversityInd

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the downlink transmissiondiversity capability of the logical node that is controlling theadjacent WCDMA RAN cell is used or not.

Range and step not used (N) (0), used (Y) (1)


not used (N) ==> 0

used (Y) ==> 1

Default value not used (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces . RAC <-> BSC. RACApp <-> RAC



MML Abbreviated Name DIV

MML Full Name downlink transmission diversity

DB Name utran_adj_cell.tx_diversity


4.5 ISNCCR FDD quality threshold (FQT)

Parameter name ISNCCR FDD Quality Threshold

Abbreviated name isnccrFddQualityThr

Managed object ADJW


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum signal quality level ofan adjacent WCDMA RAN cell for an inter-system network-controlled cell re-selection (ISNCCR).

Note: The value 0.5 dB of this parameter means that the BSC isnever allowed to initiate an ISNCCR attempt from the serving celltowards the WCDMA RAN cell because a CPICH Ec/Io levelmeasured by mobiles can be maximum 0 dB.

Effects only in the GSM neighbours.



Default value -15 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Inter System HO (ISHO Support In BSC) (56) (optional) AND NCCell Re-selection (85) (optional) AND ISNCCR Usage (86)(optional)


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FQT

MML Full Name ISNCCR FDD quality threshold

DB Name utran_adj_cell.fdd_qual_thr



Parameter name LAC

Abbreviated name lac

Managed object ADJW

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the location area that the adjacentWCDMA RAN cell belongs to.



Default value -



Special value Not defined (65535)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References . 3GPP Reference: 04.18. 3GPP Reference: 8.08. 3GPP Reference: 24.008. 3GPP Reference: 23.003




DB Name utran_adj_cell.lac


4.7 minimum CPICH Ec/Io level (MET)

Parameter name Minimum CPICH Ec/Io Level

Abbreviated name minEcnoThreshold

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the minimum CPICH Ec/Io level ofan adjacent WCDMA RAN cell for an inter-system handoverattempt. The threshold level must be exceeded before the BSC isallowed to trigger a handover attempt towards the adjacentWCDMA RAN cell.

NOTE:

The value 0.5 dB of this parameter means that the BSC is neverallowed to initiate a handover attempt from the serving GSM celltowards the WCDMA RAN cell because a CPICH Ec/Io levelmeasured by mobiles can be maximum 0 dB.






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name MET

MML Full Name minimum CPICH Ec/Io level

DB Name utran_adj_cell.min_ecno_thresh



Parameter name MCC

Abbreviated name mcc

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the mobile country code numberfor the adjacent WCDMA RAN cell.

NOTE:

MML range: 0...999

MML default: MCC value of the serving GSM cell



Default value -

Default value notes Default value is the MCC value of serving cell.


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -






DB Name utran_adj_cell.global_rnc_id.plmn_id(0…3)



Parameter name MNC

Abbreviated name mnc

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the mobile network code numberfor the adjacent WCDMA RAN cell.

NOTE:

MML range: 0..99

0..999

MML default: MNC value of the serving GSM cell




Default value -

Default value notes Default value is the MNC value of the serving GSM cell


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -






DB Name utran_adj_cell.global_rnc_id.plmn_id(0…3)


4.10 radio network controller identifier (RNC)

Parameter name RNC ID

Abbreviated name rncId

Managed object ADJW

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the radio network controller thatcontrols the adjacent WCDMA RAN cell on the WCDMA RANnetwork.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name RNC

MML Full Name radio network controller identifier

DB Name utran_adj_cell.global_rnc_id.rnc_id


4.11 reporting priority (REP)

Parameter name Reporting Priority

Abbreviated name fddReportingPriority

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the reporting priority of the adjacentWCDMA RAN cell.


13/04/2007


Range and step Reporting Priority Is Set To Normal (0), Reporting Priority Is Set ToHigh (1)


Reporting Priority Is Set To Normal ==> 0

Reporting Priority Is Set To High ==> 1

Default value Reporting Priority Is Set To Normal (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -




MML Full Name reporting priority

DB Name utran_adj_cell.fdd_rep_priority


4.12 scrambling code (SCC)

Parameter name Scrambling Code

Abbreviated name scramblingCode

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the downlink scrambling code ofthe primary common pilot channel of the adjacent WCDMA RANcell.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name SCC

MML Full Name scrambling code

DB Name utran_adj_cell.scr_code


4.13 service area code (SAC)

Parameter name Service Area Code

Abbreviated name sac

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the service area the adjacentWCDMA RAN cell belongs to.



Default value -



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name SAC

MML Full Name service area code

DB Name utran_adj_cell.sac


4.14 WCDMA downlink carrier frequency (FREQ)

Parameter name WCDMA Downlink Carrier Frequency

Abbreviated name uarfcn

Managed object ADJW

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the downlink carrier frequency ofthe adjacent WCDMA RAN cell. The frequency must be given asthe UTRAN Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number(UARFCN).



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -


References . 3GPP Reference: 04.18. 3GPP Reference: 04.60. 3GPP Reference: 25.101. 3GPP Reference: 24.008. 3GPP Reference: 25.331



MML Full Name WCDMA downlink carrier frequency

DB Name utran_adj_cell.uarfcn



13/04/2007


5 Authorised network (ANE) radio networkobject parameters

5.1 authorised networks identification (ANE)

Parameter name ANE ID

Abbreviated name aneId

Managed object ANE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a unique identifier number forAuthorised Networks.



Default value -



Special value All networks are permitted (0)

Related functions -




Related options . IBHO (IMSI Based Handover) in BSC (80) (optional)

Related features . BSS12158: IMSI Based Handover

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E4C, E4D, E4M, E4O, E4E, E4H, E4I, E4S

MML Abbreviated Name ANE

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Authorised network (ANE) radio network object parameters

MML Full Name authorised networks identification

DB Name *)Index of record in file for object


5.2 authorised networks name (NAME)

Parameter name Authorised Networks Name

Abbreviated name aneName

Managed object ANE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a unique name for a group ofAuthorised Networks.

Note: This is defined as like "BTS name". Input of both numericand alphabetic characters is possible.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E4C, E4D, E4M, E4O, E4S

MML Abbreviated Name NAME

MML Full Name authorised networks name

DB Name ane.ane_name



13/04/2007


5.3 network mobile country code (MCC1...6)

Parameter name Network MCC

Abbreviated name networkMCC

Managed object ANE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Mobile Country Code of anAuthorised Network.


Formula for getting internal value

Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters Network MNC of ANE, Network Technology of ANE




Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E4C, E4M, E4O

MML Abbreviated Name MCC1...6

MML Full Name network mobile country code

DB Name ane.net_list.net_mcc


5.4 network mobile network code (MNC1...6)

Parameter name Network MNC

Abbreviated name networkMNC

Managed object ANE

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Mobile Network Code of anAuthorised Network.

NOTE:

If a single-digit MNC is given, the preceding digits will have value0xF which means "not defined".

If a 2-digit MNC is given, the preceding digit will have value 0xFwhich means "not defined".

A 3-digit MNC is stored as it has been given.

MNC length must always be three digits if the MCC is 310, 311,312, 313, 314, 315, or 316.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters Network MCC of ANE, Network Technology of ANE




Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MNC1...6

MML Full Name network mobile network code

DB Name ane.net_list.net_mnc


5.5 network technology (TECH1...6)

Parameter name Network Technology

Abbreviated name networkTechnology

Managed object ANE


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the technology which is used withinthe authorised network in the Authorised Networks group.

MML NOTE:

IBHO licence (parameter values 1 and 2 requireISHO_SUPPORT_IN_BSC (FIFILE option) addition to IBHOlicence)

Range and step GSM (0), WCDMA RAN (1), Both GSM and WCDMA RAN (2)


Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters Network MCC of ANE, Network MNC of ANE




Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TECH1...6

MML Full Name network technology

DB Name ane.net_list.technology


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


6 BCCH allocation frequency list (BA/BAL)radio network object parameters

6.1 frequency

Parameter name Frequency

Abbreviated name frequency

Managed object BAL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 32

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


BCCH allocation frequency list (BA/BAL) radio network objectparameters

Description MML description:

With this parameter you define the frequency to be added to theBCCH frequency list or to be removed from it. The maximumnumber of frequencies in one BCCH frequency list is 32.

NetAct description:

With this parameter you define the frequencies belonging to theBCCH frequency list.

Range:

GSM 800: 128..251

GSM 900: 1..124 and 975..1023, 0

GSM 1800: 512..885

GSM 1900: 512..810

MULTI: 1...124, 128...251 <option>, 512...810 <option>,512...885,975...1023, 0

NOTE:

MULTI consists of three frequency bands, dual band for GSM 900/GSM 1800, dual band for GSM 800/GSM 1900 and dual band forGSM 800/GSM 1800. The value range of dual band GSM 900/GSM 1800 is 1...124, 512...885, 975...1023, 0. The value range ofdual band GSM 800/GSM 1900 is 128...251, 512...810. The valuerange of dual band GSM 800/ GSM 1800 is 128...251, 512...885.The frequency range depends on the active dual band feature.The maximum number of frequencies in one BCCH frequency listis 32. If the Common BCCH feature is used, the maximum is 31. Ifthe option ISHO Support In BSC is on, the maximum is 31. If theCommon BCCH feature and also ISHO Support In BSC option isused, the maximum is 30.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Double BCCH Allocation List (0) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References . I-ETS 300 034-1 (GSM 05.08)

MML Commands EBC, EBM, EBO

MML Abbreviated Name -


13/04/2007


MML Full Name frequency

DB Name ba.freq_list.list(x)


6.2 identification of BCCH frequency list

Parameter name BAL ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object BAL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the BCCH frequency list.



Default value -



Related functions -





Related features . BSS20118: High Capacity BSC3i O&M

Interfaces -

References

MML Commands EBC, EBD, EBM, EBO


MML Full Name identification of BCCH frequency list

DB Name *) Index of record in file for object


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


BCCH allocation frequency list (BA/BAL) radio network objectparameters

6.3 type of BCCH frequency list

Parameter name Type Of BCCH Frequency List

Abbreviated name frequencyBandInUse

Managed object BAL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the type of the BCCH frequencylist. The value depends on the frequency band used in the BTS.The band is either GSM 800, GSM 900, GSM 1800, GSM 1900, orMULTI.

Range and step 0 (GSM 900), 1 (GSM 1800), 2 (GSM 1900), 3 (Multi Band), 5(GSM 800)


GSM 900 ==> 0

GSM 1800 ==> 1

GSM 1900 ==> 2

Multi Band ==> 3

GSM 800 ==> 5

Default value -



Related functions -





Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EBC, EBO


MML Full Name type of BCCH frequency list

DB Name ba.freq_band



13/04/2007


7 Base Control Function (BCF) radionetwork object parameters

7.1 Add BCF to chain / Remove BCF from chain (ADD /REM)

Parameter name Slave BCF List

Abbreviated name slaveBcfList

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 8

Description With this parameter you define slave BCF(s) to the chain underthe master clock BCF.

NOTE: The parameter is only available for Nokia Talk-family, NokiaMetroSite, Nokia UltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE:

ADD (MML Full Name: Add BCF to chain): The slave BCF can bedefined when creating or modifying the master clock BCF. Ifsynchronisation of the chain is enabled, the added BCF must belocked, otherwise modification is online. Modification can also bedone in slave BCF creation.

REM (MML Full Name: remove BCF from chain): The slave BCFcan be removed when modifying the master clock BCF. Ifsynchronisation of the chain is enabled, the removed BCF must belocked, otherwise modification is online.



Default value 0

Default value notes Not defined


Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Base Control Function (BCF) radio network object parameters

Modification Online

Modified When modifying a master clock BCF, the modification can bemade online if synchronisation of the chain is disabled. Requireslocking of the slave BCF(s) if synchronisation of the master clockBCF is enabled (SENA=Y). When modifying an independent modeBCF, the modification requires BCF locking.



Related options -


Interfaces -

References

MML Commands EFC, EFM, EFO, EFL / EFM, EFO, EFL

MML Abbreviated Name ADD / REM

MML Full Name Add BCF to chain / Remove BCF from chain

DB Name bcf.synch_data.slave_bcf_list.id_list(0…7)


7.2 administrative state

Parameter name Administrative State

Abbreviated name adminState

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you lock or unlock the object. If the BCF is inoperational use, the administrative state must be "unlocked". If thestate is "locked", the BCF cannot transfer traffic.

MML NOTE:

MML Range:

L (locked)

U (unlocked)

MML default:L

Range and step Unlocked (1), Locked (3)


13/04/2007



Unlocked ==> 1

Locked ==> 3

Default value Locked (3)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EFO, EFS, EEI


MML Full Name administrative state

DB Name bcf.adm_state


7.3 autoconfigure (AC)

Parameter name Autoconfigure

Abbreviated name autoConfig

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the BCF is created to beautoconfigured.

NOTE: The parameter is only available for Nokia MetroSite, NokiaInSite, Nokia UltraSite or Nokia Flexi EDGE.

Range and step BCF is not created (N) (0), BCF is created to be autoconfigured(Y) (1)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




BCF is not created (N) ==> 0

BCF is created to be autoconfigured (Y) ==> 1

Default value BCF is not created (N) (0)

Default value notes No


Related functions -




Related options . Abis Auto Configuration (32) (optional)

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EFC

MML Abbreviated Name AC

MML Full Name autoconfigure

DB Name


7.4 BCCH TRX shutdown timer (BTIM)

Parameter name BCCH TRX Shutdown Timer

Abbreviated name bcchTrxBatbuTimer

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the time period after which BCCHTRXs are powered down when the BTS battery backup procedureis executing and no TRXs are left alive. The time begins after theTRX shutdown timer (NTIM) has expired.

NOTE: The parameter cannot be defined for Nokia PrimeSite orNokia InSite.


13/04/2007


Range and step 0...600 min, step 1 min

Formula for getting internal value internal_value = gui_value * 6000

Default value 0 min



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Remote Degration Of BTS Service Under TRX Shutdown (2)(optional) OR BTS Metro Site Batbu Pr (73) (optional) OR BTSUltra Site Batbu Pr (74) (optional)

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EFC, EFM, EFO

MML Abbreviated Name BTIM

MML Full Name BCCH TRX shutdown timer

DB Name bcf.bcch_trx_batbu_tim


7.5 BCF identification (BCF)

Parameter name BCF ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the BCF with a decimal number.

Range Note:

The value range depends on the BSC hardware configuration andthe corresponding options.


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -



References

MML Commands EFC, EFD, EFO, EFM, EFR, EFS, EFT, EFX, EEI

MML Abbreviated Name BCF

MML Full Name BCF identification



7.6 bit rate (BR)

Parameter name Bit Rate

Abbreviated name bitRate

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the bit rate of the D_channel O&Msignalling link of the BCF.

NOTE: The parameter is only available for Nokia MetroSite, NokiaUltraSite and Nokia InSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE: No NetAct interface.

Range and step 8 kbps (8), 16 kbps (16), 32 kbps (32), 64 kbps (64)


13/04/2007



8 kbps ==> 8

16 kbps ==> 16

32 kbps ==> 32

64 kbps ==> 64

Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EFC

MML Abbreviated Name BR

MML Full Name bit rate

DB Name


7.7 BSC-BSC interface failure (BSCBSC)

Parameter name BSC-BSC interface failure

Abbreviated name bscBscInterfaceFailure

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you output the synchronisation data andDFCA TRXs of the DFCA BTSs which have the defined BSC-BSCinterface status. The data of a BTS is output, if the DFCA mode ofthe BTS is STANDBY or DFCA hopping and the BTS has theBSC-BSC interface status defined by this parameter.

NOTE: MML RANGE:

OK = Output DFCA BTSs which do not suffer from a BSC-BSCinterface failure.

NOK = Output DFCA BTSs which suffer from a BSC-BSCinterfacefailure.

Range and step NOK (0), OK (1)


NOK ==> 0

OK ==> 1

Default value -



Related functions -




Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional)

Related features . BSS11052: Dynamic Frequency and Channel Allocation

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EFL

MML Abbreviated Name BSCBSC

MML Full Name BSC-BSC interface failure

DB Name


7.8 BTS battery backup procedure (BBU)

Parameter name BTS Battery Backup Procedure

Abbreviated name batteryBackupProcedure

Managed object BCF


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define what type of BTS battery backupprocedure is used. The procedure is executed when the mainspower goes down at the BTS site and there is a battery backupunit.

MML NOTE:

MML RANGE:

ALL (transmission equipment and all TRXs are left alive)

BCCH (transmission equipment and only the BCCH TRX are leftalive)

NONE (only transmission equipment is left alive)

MML DEFAULT: ALL


Range and step All Alive (0), Transmission and BCCH Alive (1), Transmission Alive(2)


All Alive ==> 0

Transmission and BCCH Alive ==> 1

Transmission Alive ==> 2

Default value All Alive (0)

Default value notes ALL


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name BBU

MML Full Name BTS battery backup procedure

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name bcf.bbu_proc


7.9 clock source (CS)

Parameter name Clock Source

Abbreviated name clockSource

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the clock source for the masterclock BCF or the independent mode BCF. If the defined clocksource is LMU, LMU-Abis, or BCF, the BCF is a master clock BCF.

When the synch of the BCF is disabled (SENA=N), modification ofthe parameter can be done online.

When the synch of the BCF is enabled (SENA=Y) and value of theSynch Status is not ABIS SYNCH, the value of the parameter canbe changed from LMU to LMU-Abis or vice versa online.

NOTE: The parameter is only available for Nokia Talk-family, NokiaMetroSite, Nokia UltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE:

MML range:

BCF (master clock BCF)

LMU (location management unit)

PCM (independent mode)

NONE (remove clock source)

LAB (LMU-ABIS)

MML default: NOT USED

LMU ABIS (4) value is only available for Nokia UltraSite and NokiaFlexi EDGE.

Range and step NONE (remove clock source) (0), LMU (location management unit)(1), BCF (master clock BCF) (2), PCM (independent mode) (3),LMU Abis (4)


13/04/2007



NONE (remove clock source) ==> 0

LMU (location management unit) ==> 1

BCF (master clock BCF) ==> 2

PCM (independent mode) ==> 3

LMU Abis ==> 4

Default value NONE (remove clock source) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified When modifying a master clock BCF, the modification can bemade online if synchronisation of the chain is disabled. Whenmodifying an independent mode BCF, the modification requiresBCF locking.



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EFC, EFM, EFO, EFL

MML Abbreviated Name CS

MML Full Name clock source

DB Name bcf.synch_data.clock_source


7.10 D-channel link set name (DNAME)

Parameter name LAPD Link Name

Abbreviated name lapdLinkName

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you identify the D-channel link set name of theBTS site O&M link.

NOTE: The parameter cannot be defined for Nokia PrimeSite.Modifying the parameter causes a temporary break in O&Msignalling.

NOTE:

Range:

String of up to 5 characters ('A'..'Z','0'..'9'). The first character mustbe a letter.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EFC, EFO, EFM, EEI

MML Abbreviated Name DNAME

MML Full Name D-channel link set name

DB Name *) Not own parameter in BSC database


7.11 D-channel link set number (DNBR)

Parameter name LAPD Link Number

Abbreviated name lapdLinkNumber

Managed object BCF


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the D-channel link set number ofthe BTS site O&M link.

NOTE: The parameter cannot be defined for Nokia PrimeSite.Modifying the parameter causes a temporary break in O&Msignalling.

MML NOTE:

Modification: Online



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces . BSC -> RAC

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DNBR

MML Full Name D-channel link set number

DB Name


7.12 external input number (INBR)

Parameter name External Input Number

Abbreviated name inputId

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the external input number of theBCF.

NOTE: The parameter is only available for Nokia MetroSite, NokiaUltraSite, and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE:

MML RANGE:

1 ... 10 (Nokia MetroSite),

1 ... 24 (Nokia UltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE)



Default value



Related functions -

Modification online



Related options -

Related features

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EFX, EFO

MML Abbreviated Name INBR

MML Full Name external input number

DB Name *) Index of table bcf.ext_inputs


7.13 external outputs ON / external outputs OFF (ON/OFF)

Parameter name External Outputs

Abbreviated name bcfOutputInUse

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 6


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the external outputs that are set toON or OFF state. The outputs are identified by a number.

NOTE:

The parameter cannot be defined for Nokia PrimeSite or NokiaInSite.

In the case of Nokia MetroSite, the number of external outputs is4.

In the case of Nokia 2nd Generation, Nokia Talk-family, NokiaUltrasite and Nokia Flexi EDGE, the number of external outputs is6.

NOTE: MML RANGE: 6 outputs of type ON/OFF. Default value: alloutputs OFF.

Range and step false (0), true (1)

Formula for getting internal value . false => 0. true => 1

Default value false (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EFO, EFT

MML Abbreviated Name ON/OFF

MML Full Name external outputs ON / external outputs OFF

DB Name bcf.bcf_outputs(0…6)


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



7.14 external synchronization source (ESS)

Parameter name External Synchronization Source

Abbreviated name syncSource

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the synchronisation source of themaster clock TRX for a synchronised Nokia PrimeSite BTS site. Ifthe site is not synchronised but stand-alone, the parameter definesa synchronisation source for all the TRXs in the site.

NOTE: See also the Master Clock TRX parameter.

Range and step BTS Internal (0), PCM External (2), Other External (3)


BTS Internal ==> 0

PCM External ==> 2

Other External ==> 3

Default value PCM External (2)



Related functions -

Modification Requires object locking

Modified When the BCF is locked.

Related parameters masterClock of BCF


Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EFO, EFM

MML Abbreviated Name ESS

MML Full Name external synchronization source

DB Name



13/04/2007


7.15 FACCH LAPDm T200 (T200F)

Parameter name FACCH LAPDm T200

Abbreviated name T200F

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter determines a LAPDm T200 for supervision of theFACCH message transfer from BTS to mobile.

NOTE: MMI is the only user interface supporting this parameter.The parameter is modifiable only for Nokia Talk-family, NokiaUltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE BTSs.

NOTE: MML modification: Online

Range and step 200...1260 ms, step 20 ms


Default value 0 ms

Default value notes 0 ms (BCF PREDEFINED VALUES)


Related functions -


Modified The parameter is modifiable if the BTS site type is Nokia Talk-family or Nokia UltraSite.



Related options -

Related features . BSS20924: BSC Support for LAPDm T200 Setting

Interfaces -

References . Nokia reference: Abis O&M i/f specification


MML Abbreviated Name T200F

MML Full Name FACCH LAPDm T200

DB Name bcf.facch_lapdm_t200


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



7.16 identification of test equipment (TEST)

Parameter name Identification Of Test Equipment

Abbreviated name testEquipment

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the test equipment connected tothe BCF.

NOTE: The parameter is available for Nokia 2nd generation basestations and Nokia Talk-family of base stations. Parameter valueRFTE is only allowed for Nokia 2nd generation base stations.

Range and step No Test Equipment (0), RFTE (1), STM (2)


No Test Equipment ==> 0

RFTE ==> 1

STM ==> 2

Default value No Test Equipment (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name TEST

MML Full Name identification of test equipment

DB Name bcf.test_equipment



13/04/2007


7.17 master clock BCF identification (MCBCF)

Parameter name Master Clock BCF Identification

Abbreviated name masterClockBcf

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you add the slave BCF to a chain under amaster clock BCF in slave BCF creation.

NOTE:

The parameter is only available for Nokia Talk-family, NokiaMetroSite, Nokia UltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE. See alsoparameter Slave BCF List.



Default value 0




Related functions -


Modified Adding the slave BCF to a chain under the master clock BCF canbe done in slave BCF creation with this parameter. The slave BCFcan be defined when creating or modifying the master clock BCF(see parameter 'add BCF to chain' (ADD)).

Related parameters slaveBcfList of BCF


Related options -


Interfaces -

References

MML Commands EFC, EFO, EFL

MML Abbreviated Name MCBCF

MML Full Name master clock BCF identification

DB Name bcf.synch_data.master_clock_bcf


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



7.18 master clock TRX (MCT)

Parameter name Master Clock TRX

Abbreviated name masterClock

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the master clock TRX for the NokiaPrimeSite. The value 0 means that the site is not synchronised (astandalone site).

NOTE: If there is more than one TRX in the site, the site must besynchronised (MCT<>0). See also the external synchronizationsource parameter.



Default value 0



Related functions -


Modified When the BCF is locked.



Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EFM, EFO

MML Abbreviated Name MCT

MML Full Name master clock TRX

DB Name



13/04/2007


7.19 polarity (POL)

Parameter name Polarity

Abbreviated name polarity

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the actual polarity of the externalinput connection.

NOTE: The parameter is only available for Nokia MetroSite, NokiaUltraSite, and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

Range and step 0 (Closed), 1 (Open)


Default value Open (1)



Related functions -

Modification online



Related options -

Related features

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name POL

MML Full Name polarity

DB Name bcf.ext_inputs(x).polarity


7.20 route (ROU)

Parameter name Route

Abbreviated name reportingRoute

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you activate the routing of the input alarm andchoose where the alarm will be sent.

NOTE:

The parameter is only available for Nokia MetroSite,NokiaUltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE:

MML RANGE:

NOT [not activated (not reported)],

ACT [activated (reported to the BSC as a normal external alarm)],

TMS [activated (reported as a transmission alarm to theTransmission Management System)],

MAINS [activated (reported to the BSC as a MainsBreakdownalarm)]

Range and step NOT (0), ACT (1), TMS (2), MAINS (3)


Default value NOT (0)



Related functions -

Modification online



Related options -

Related features

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ROU

MML Full Name route

DB Name bcf.ext_inputs(x).route



13/04/2007


7.21 RX difference limit (RXDL)

Parameter name RX Difference Limit

Abbreviated name rxDifferenceLimit

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the value limit for activating the RXalarm.

NOTE:

The parameter is not available for Nokia InSite.

For site types Nokia 2nd generation, Nokia MetroSite, NokiaUltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE the value 64 dB indicates that noRX alarms are set.



Default value 10 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name RXDL

MML Full Name RX difference limit

DB Name bcf.rx_diff_limit


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



7.22 SDCCH LAPDm T200 (T200S)

Parameter name SDCCH LAPDm T200

Abbreviated name T200S

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter determines a LAPDm T200 for supervision of theSDCCH message transfer from BTS to mobile.

NOTE: MMI is the only user interface supporting this parameter.The parameter is modifiable only for Nokia Talk-family, NokiaUltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE BTSs.

NOTE: MML modification: Online



Default value 0 ms

Default value notes 0 ms (BCF PREDEFINED VALUE)


Related functions -


Modified The parameter is modifiable if the BTS site type is Nokia Talk-family or Nokia UltraSite.



Related options -

Related features . BSS20924: BSC Support for LAPDm T200 Setting

Interfaces -

References . Nokia reference: Abis O&M i/f specification


MML Abbreviated Name T200S

MML Full Name SDCCH LAPDm T200

DB Name bcf.sdcch_lapdm_t200



13/04/2007


7.23 severity (SEV)

Parameter name Severity

Abbreviated name severity

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the severity of the input alarm.

NOTE:

The parameter is only available for Nokia MetroSite, NokiaUltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE:

MML Range:

AL3 (The highest alarm level.)

AL2 (The medium alarm level.)

AL1 (The lowest alarm level.)

MML default: AL1

Range and step Intermediate (0), Critical (1), Major (2), Minor (3), Warning (4),Clear (5)


Default value



Related functions -

Modification online



Related options -

Related features

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SEV

MML Full Name severity

DB Name bcf.ext_inputs(x).severity


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



7.24 site type (TYPE)

Parameter name Site Type

Abbreviated name bcfType

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the type of the BTS site.

NOTE:

Modification of the BTS site type is possible only between theNokia 2nd generation and Nokia Talk-family site types and fromthe Nokia 2nd generation or Nokia Talk-family site types to NokiaUltraSite site and Nokia Talk-family or Nokia UltraSite site types toNokia Flexi EDGE type. The modification from the Nokia UltraSiteor Nokia Flexi EDGE back to the Nokia 2nd generation or NokiaTalk-family site types is not possible.

MML NOTE:

B (Nokia 2nd Generation),

D (Nokia Talk-family),

F (Nokia PrimeSite),

C (Nokia MetroSite),

I (Nokia InSite),

P (Nokia UltraSite),

E (Nokia Flexi EDGE <option>)

NOTE:

Nokia Flexi EDGE is available only when the EPSILON licencestate is ON or CONFIG.

Range and step 0 (Nokia 2nd Generation), 1 (Nokia Talk-family), 2 (NokiaPrimeSite), 3 (Nokia MetroSite), 4 (Nokia InSite), 5 (NokiaUltraSite), 6 (Nokia Flexi EDGE)


13/04/2007



Nokia 2nd Generation ==> 0

Nokia Talk-family ==> 1

Nokia PrimeSite ==> 2

Nokia MetroSite ==> 3

Nokia InSite ==> 4

Nokia UltraSite ==> 5

Nokia Flexi EDGE ==> 6

Default value Nokia 2nd Generation (0)



Related functions -


Modified When the BCF is locked. The OMU link of the BCF cannot be inworking state when the BTS site type is modified to NokiaUltraSite.



Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EFC, EFM, EFO, EEI

MML Abbreviated Name TYPE

MML Full Name site type

DB Name bcf.bts_site_type


7.25 synch enabled (SENA)

Parameter name Synch Enabled

Abbreviated name synchEnabled

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you enable the synchronization of the chain ofthe independent mode BCFs. It is possible to enable thesynchronization of the chain when creating or modifying themaster clock BCF. Modification of the parameter requires lockingof all of the BCFs of the chain. When modifying an independentmode BCF, the modification requires locking of the BCF.

NOTE:

The parameter is only available for Nokia Talk-family, NokiaMetroSite, Nokia UltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE.






Related functions -


Modified Modification of the parameter requires locking of all of the BCFs ofthe chain.



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EFC, EFM, EFO, EFL

MML Abbreviated Name SENA

MML Full Name synch enabled

DB Name bcf.synch_data.synch_enabled


7.26 Synchronization Mode (SM)

Parameter name Synch Status


13/04/2007


Abbreviated name synchStatus

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter indicates the synchronisation mode of the BCF.

NOTE:

The parameter is only available for Nokia Talk-family, NokiaMetroSite, Nokia UltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

Range and step UNSYNCH (0), BCFSYNCH (1), LMUSYNCH (2), INDEPENDENT(3), ABISSYNCH (4)


UNSYNCH ==> 0

BCFSYNCH ==> 1

LMUSYNCH ==> 2

INDEPENDENT ==> 3

ABISSYNCH ==> 4

Default value UNSYNCH (0)



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces . RAC -> BSC

References -

MML Commands EFO, EFL

MML Abbreviated Name SM

MML Full Name Synchronization Mode

DB Name


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



7.27 text ID (TID)

Parameter name Text ID

Abbreviated name inputTextId

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the text ID number of a text string.

NOTE:

The parameter is relevant only for Nokia MetroSite, NokiaUltraSiteand Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NetAct Note:

Refers to IO Text instance (TID ID).



Default value



Special value removes the text ID (0)

Related functions -

Modification online



Related options -

Related features

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EFE, EFP, EFX, EFO

MML Abbreviated Name TID

MML Full Name text ID

DB Name bcf.ext_inputs(x).text_id



13/04/2007


7.28 text ID of the output 1...6 (OUT1-OUT6)

Parameter name Text ID Of The Output 1...6

Abbreviated name textId

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the text ID for the external output.

NOTE: The parameter is only available for Nokia MetroSite, NokiaUltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE. In the case of Nokia MetroSite,the number of external outputs is 4. In the case of Nokia Ultrasiteand Nokia Flexi EDGE, the number of external outputs is 6.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0: Removes the text from external output.



Default value



Special value removes the text ID (0)

Related functions -

Modification online



Related options -

Related features

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EFM, EFO

MML Abbreviated Name OUT1-OUT6

MML Full Name text ID of the output 1...6

DB Name bcf.output_texts(0...5)


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



7.29 TRX shutdown timer (NTIM)

Parameter name TRX Shutdown Timer

Abbreviated name normTrxBatbuTimer

Managed object BCF

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the time period after which TRXsare powered down when BTS battery backup procedure isexecuting and no TRXs or only BCCH-TRXs are left alive.




Default value 0 min



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name NTIM

MML Full Name TRX shutdown timer

DB Name bcf.n_trx_batbu_tim



13/04/2007


8 Base Station Controller (BSC) radionetwork object parameters

8.1 alarm limit for full rate TCH availability (ALFRT)

Parameter name Alarm Limit For Full Rate TCH Availability

Abbreviated name frTchALim

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the alarm limit for available full ratetraffic channels (%). The parameter is used by radio networkrecovery.



Default value 30



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EEQ, EEO

MML Abbreviated Name ALFRT

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Base Station Controller (BSC) radio network object parameters

MML Full Name alarm limit for full rate TCH availability

DB Name bsc.f_r_tch_a_lim


8.2 alarm limit for half rate TCH availibility (ALHRT)

Parameter name Alarm Limit For Half Rate TCH Availibility

Abbreviated name hrTchALim

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the alarm limit for available halfrate traffic channels (%). The parameter is used by radio networkrecovery.

Range and step 1...100 %, step 1 %


Default value 30 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ALHRT

MML Full Name alarm limit for half rate TCH availibility

DB Name bsc.h_r_tch_a_lim



13/04/2007


8.3 alarm limit for SDCCH availability (ALSDC)

Parameter name Alarm Limit For SDCCH Availability

Abbreviated name sdcchAlLimit

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the alarm limit for availableSDCCHs. The limit is the ratio of working SDCCHs to workingTCHs in percent. The parameter is used by radio networkrecovery.



Default value 30 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ALSDC

MML Full Name alarm limit for SDCCH availability

DB Name bsc.sdcch_al_limit


8.4 Alarm Threshold For Number Of Channel SeizureRequests (CSR)

Parameter name Alarm Threshold For Number Of Channel Seizure Requests

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name alrmSeizReq

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter supervises SDCCH and TCH congestion. With thisparameter you define an alarm threshold for the number ofchannel seizures requests. Only when the number of channelseizure requests equals or exceeds this threshold during themeasurement period, the values for alarm threshold for TCHcongestion and alarm threshold for SDCCH congestion are takeninto account.



Default value 100



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EEN, EEO

MML Abbreviated Name CSR

MML Full Name Alarm Threshold For Number Of Channel Seizure Requests

DB Name bsc.alrm_seiz_req


8.5 Alarm Threshold For Number Of Channel Seizures(CS)

Parameter name Alarm Threshold For Number Of Channel Seizures

Abbreviated name alrmNoOfSei

Managed object BSC


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter supervises lost calls and too short a mean holdingtime in the traffic channels. With this parameter you define analarm threshold for the number of channel seizures. Only when thenumber of channel seizures equals or exceeds this thresholdduring the measurement period, the alarm threshold values forminimum mean holding time for TCHs and alarm threshold forTCH failure rate are taken into account.



Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CS

MML Full Name Alarm Threshold For Number Of Channel Seizures

DB Name bsc.alrm_no_of_sei


8.6 Alarm Threshold For SDCCH Congestion (CNGS)

Parameter name Alarm Threshold For SDCCH Congestion

Abbreviated name alrmSdcch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define an alarm threshold for SDCCHcongestion. This parameter supervises the traffic level of signallingchannels in a BTS. If the percentage of SDCCH seizure requestsrefused due to congestion equals or exceeds the threshold andthere have been enough call attempts during the measurementperiod (the number of seizure requests is greater than or equalsthe operator-defined threshold value), the alarm system prints outan alarm.



Default value 20 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CNGS

MML Full Name Alarm Threshold For SDCCH Congestion

DB Name bsc.alrm_sdcch


8.7 Alarm Threshold For SDCCH Failure Rate (SCHFR)

Parameter name Alarm Threshold For SDCCH Failure Rate

Abbreviated name alrmSchFail

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define an alarm threshold for the SDCCHfailure rate. If the number of SDCCH failures equals or exceedsthe threshold, the alarm system prints out an alarm.


13/04/2007




Default value 80 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SCHFR

MML Full Name Alarm Threshold For SDCCH Failure Rate

DB Name bsc.alrm_sch_fail


8.8 Alarm Threshold For TCH Congestion (CNGT)

Parameter name Alarm Threshold For TCH Congestion

Abbreviated name alrmTch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define an alarm threshold for trafficchannel congestion. The parameter supervises the traffic level oftraffic channels in a BTS. If the percentage of TCH seizurerequests refused due to congestion equals or exceeds thethreshold and there have been enough call attempts during themeasurement period (the number of seizure requests is greaterthan or equals the operator-defined threshold value), the alarmsystem prints out an alarm.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 20 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CNGT

MML Full Name Alarm Threshold For TCH Congestion

DB Name bsc.alrm_tch


8.9 Alarm Threshold For TCH Failure Rate (TCHFR)

Parameter name Alarm Threshold For TCH Failure Rate

Abbreviated name alrmChFail

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define an alarm threshold for trafficchannel failure rate. Whenever a channel is released with arelease cause other than a normal one, the counter of channelfailures for the released channel is incremented. If the percentageof channel failures equals or exceeds the threshold and there havebeen enough calls during the measurement period (the number ofseizures is greater than or equals the operator-defined thresholdvalue), the alarm system prints out an alarm.



Default value 20 %



13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TCHFR

MML Full Name Alarm Threshold For TCH Failure Rate

DB Name bsc.alrm_ch_fail


8.10 alarm threshold for the share of high TCHinterference (HIFSHR)

Parameter name Alarm Threshold For The Share Of High TCH Interference

Abbreviated name maxOnHiIf

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum time in percent that aTCH may be on high interference levels during a measurementperiod (%).



Default value 50 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HIFSHR

MML Full Name alarm threshold for the share of high TCH interference

DB Name bsc.max_on_hi_if


8.11 AMH lower load threshold (ALT)

Parameter name AMH Lower Load Threshold

Abbreviated name amhLowerLoadThreshold

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the lower threshold for the load ofthe base station. The parameter is used to trigger advancedmultilayer handling functionality with IUO and/or Dual Band/microcell features.



Default value 20 %



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amhLowerLoadThreshold of BTS

Parameter relationships If a cell level parameter has some other value than N, it replacesthe corresponding BSC-level parameter.

Related options . Advanced Multilayer Handling (AMH) (33) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007


MML Commands EEM, EEO

MML Abbreviated Name ALT

MML Full Name AMH lower load threshold

DB Name bsc.amh_lower_load_thresh


8.12 AMH Max Load Of Target Cell (AML)

Parameter name AMH Max Load Of Target Cell

Abbreviated name amhMaxLoadOfTgtCell

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this advanced multilayer handling parameter you define themaximum traffic load in adjacent cell allowed for a target cell oftraffic reason handover (TRHO).



Default value 70 %



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amhMaxLoadOfTgtCell of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AML

MML Full Name AMH Max Load Of Target Cell

DB Name bsc.amh_max_load_of_tgtc


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.13 AMH upper load threshold (AUT)

Parameter name AMH Upper Load Threshold

Abbreviated name amhUpperLoadThreshold

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the upper threshold for the load ofthe base station. The parameter is used to trigger BSC-controlledtraffic reason handovers.



Default value 80 %



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amhUpperLoadThreshold of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AUT

MML Full Name AMH upper load threshold

DB Name bsc.amh_upper_load_thresh



13/04/2007


8.14 AMR Configuration In Handovers (ACH)

Parameter name AMR Configuration In Handovers

Abbreviated name amrConfInHandovers

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the preference between thecurrently used multirate configuration and the one defined for thetarget BTS during internal and external handovers.

MML Range:

1 = the currently used multirate configuration is preferred in furtherchannel allocations

2 = the multirate configuration of target BTS is preferred in furtherchannel allocations

Range and step Currently used multirate (1), Multirate configuration of target BTS(2)


Currently used multirate ==> 1

Multirate configuration of target BTS ==> 2

Default value Currently used multirate (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . AMR FR (50) (optional) OR AMR HR (72) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. BSC <-> RAC

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ACH

MML Full Name AMR Configuration In Handovers

DB Name bsc.amr_conf_in_handovers


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.15 AMR set grades enabled (ASG)

Parameter name AMR Set Grades Enabled

Abbreviated name amrSetGradesEnabl

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether codec mode setdowngrades during internal HOs and upgrades after internal HOsare applied or not.

Range and step 0 (downgrades and upgrades are not applied (N)), 1 (downgradesand upgrades are applied (Y))

Formula for getting internal value . downgrades and upgrades are not applied (N) => 0. downgrades and upgrades are applied (Y) => 1

Default value downgrades and upgrades are not applied (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . AMR HR (72) (optional) OR AMR FR (50) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name ASG

MML Full Name AMR set grades enabled

DB Name bsc.amr_set_grades_enabl



13/04/2007


8.16 Background traffic class scheduling weight forARP 1 (BGSW1)

Parameter name Background Traffic Class Scheduling Weight For ARP 1

Abbreviated name schedulingWeight_backgroundARP1

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the scheduling weight forproportion of residual bandwidth allocation and retention priorityvalue 1 for background traffic class.



Default value 20



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features . BSS11111: Enhanced Quality of Service

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EEV, EEO

MML Abbreviated Name BGSW1

MML Full Name Background traffic class scheduling weight for ARP 1

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.sch_weight.background(0)




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007





Default value 5



Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -






8.19 BCSU load threshold (BCSUL)

Parameter name BCSU Load Threshold

Abbreviated name bcsuLoadThr

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold for the proportion ofrejected measurement results in all measurement results. Anoverload in the BCSU unit causes the rejections. If this thresholdis exceeded, the BCSU unit is regarded as overloaded, and theBSC generates the relevant alarm.

MML Range and Step: 0..10000 = 0..100% (step size is 0.01%).


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value 150



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BCSUL

MML Full Name BCSU load threshold

DB Name bsc.bcsu_load_thr


8.20 BIM confidence probability (BCP)

Parameter name BIM Confidence Probability

Abbreviated name bimConfidenceProb

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the level of confidence for theestimation used to build a background interference matrix. It givesthe share of users experiencing a C/I equal to or greater than theC/I contained in the matrix.



Default value 80 %



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EEH, EEO

MML Abbreviated Name BCP

MML Full Name BIM confidence probability

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.bim_parameters.bim_conf_probability


8.21 BIM interference threshold (BIT)

Parameter name BIM Interference Threshold

Abbreviated name bimInterfThreshold

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define an upper limit for C/I values whichare considered as relevant for the interference estimations. C/Ivalues above the Interference threshold can be discarded duringthe BIM update procedure.



Default value 35



Related functions -

Modification Online




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BIT

MML Full Name BIM interference threshold

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.bim_parameters.bim_interf_thresh


8.22 BIM update guard time (BUGT)

Parameter name BIM Update Guard Time

Abbreviated name bimUpdateGuardTime

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of BIM update periodsthat the DFCA algorithm allows without removing a neighbour cellfrom the BIM table of a DFCA cell. The neighbour cell is notremoved even if it is not included in the BIM updates made duringthat time. Value range for guard time is 0…62 BIM update periods.Value 63 indicates that a neighbour is not included in any new BIMupdate.

Range and step 0...63 period, step 1 period


Default value 62 period



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -


13/04/2007


References -


MML Abbreviated Name BUGT

MML Full Name BIM update guard time

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.bim_parameters.bim_upd_guard_time


8.23 BIM update period (BUP)

Parameter name BIM Update Period

Abbreviated name bimUpdatePeriod

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the period between successivebackground interference matrix updates. Therefore, it is the lengthof the data collecting period for a single BIM update.

NOTE:

MML range:

10 min to 60 min (10 min step size);

2h to 6h (60 min step size);

12h and 24h;

0 turns off the BIM update procedure

Range and step turns off the BIM update procedure (0), 10 min (10), 20 min (20),30 mn (30), 40 min (40), 50 min (50), 1 h (60), 2 h (120), 3 h(180), 4 h (240), 5 h (300), 6 h (360), 12 h (720), 24 h (1440)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




turns off the BIM update procedure ==> 0

10 min ==> 10

20 min ==> 20

30 mn ==> 30

40 min ==> 40

50 min ==> 50

1 h ==> 60

2 h ==> 120

3 h ==> 180

4 h ==> 240

5 h ==> 300

6 h ==> 360

12 h ==> 720

24 h ==> 1440

Default value 2 h (120)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BUP

MML Full Name bim update period

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.bim_parameters.bim_upd_period



13/04/2007


8.24 BIM update scaling factor (BUSF)

Parameter name BIM Update Scaling Factor

Abbreviated name bimUpdateScalingFactor

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting factor for the C/Ivalue defined during the latest BIM update period when this iscombined with the long term C/I statistics.

Range and step 0...1, step 0.1


Default value 0.5



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BUSF

MML Full Name BIM update scaling factor

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.bim_parameters.bim_upd_scaling_factor


8.25 BTS site battery backup forced HO timer (TIM)

Parameter name BTS Site Battery Backup Forced HO Timer

Abbreviated name batteryBackupTimer

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter defines the maximum time period during whichhandover is attempted in TRX.



Default value 30 s



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TIM

MML Full Name BTS site battery backup forced HO timer

DB Name bsc.bbu_timer


8.26 C/I Target 14.4 (CIT)

Parameter name C/I Target 14.4

Abbreviated name dfca144Connection_ciTarget

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the target C/I value for circuitswitched data connections of 14.4 kbit/s.

Note: The parameter value must be equal to or greater than softblocking C/I 14.4.

NOTE:

MML modification: Parameter is modifiable if options DynamicFrequency And Channel Allocation (70) AND (HSCSD_PRM ORPRM_144) are ON. Options (HSCSD_PRM and PRM_144) arehidden in MML and available if the operator has purchased thefeature.



Default value 16 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfca144Connection_softBlockingCi of BSC


Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND ( Data 144 Usage (69) (optional) OR High SpeedCircuit Switched Data (HSCSD - TCSM2) (25) (optional) )

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CIT

MML Full Name C/I Target 14.4

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.d144_c_i_params.c_i_target


8.27 C/I target AMR FR (CIAF)

Parameter name C/I Target AMR FR

Abbreviated name dfcaAmrFrConnection_ciTarget

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the target C/I value for full rateAMR speech connections.

Note: The parameter value must be equal to or greater than softblocking C/I AMR FR.



Default value 12 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfcaAmrFrConnection_softBlockingCi of BSC


Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND AMR FR (50) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CIAF

MML Full Name C/I target AMR FR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.amr_fr_c_i_params.c_i_target


8.28 C/I target AMR HR (CIAH)

Parameter name C/I Target AMR HR

Abbreviated name dfcaAmrHrConnection_ciTarget

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the target C/I value for half rateAMR speech connections.

Note: The parameter value must be equal to or greater than softblocking C/I AMR HR.


13/04/2007




Default value 12 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfcaAmrHrConnection_softBlockingCi of BSC


Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND AMR HR (72) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CIAH

MML Full Name C/I target AMR HR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.amr_hr_c_i_params.c_i_target


8.29 C/I Target FR (CIF)

Parameter name C/I Target FR

Abbreviated name dfcaFrConnection_ciTarget

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the target C/I value for full rate andEFR speech connections, and for circuit switched dataconnections up to 9.6 kbit/s.

Note: The parameter value must be equal to or greater than softblocking C/I FR.



Default value 14 dB

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfcaFrConnection_softBlockingCi of BSC



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CIF

MML Full Name C/I Target FR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.fr_c_i_params.c_i_target


8.30 C/I target HR (CIH)

Parameter name C/I Target HR

Abbreviated name dfcaHrConnection_ciTarget

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the target C/I value for half ratespeech connections.

Note: The parameter value must be equal to or greater than softblocking C/I HR.



Default value 14 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online


13/04/2007


Related parameters dfcaHrConnection_softBlockingCi of BSC


Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND Half Rate (17) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CIH

MML Full Name C/I target HR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.hr_c_i_params.c_i_target


8.31 C/I target UL offset (CIUL)

Parameter name C/I Target UL Offset

Abbreviated name ciTargetUlOffset

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define an offset that is added to the C/Itargets and soft blocking C/I limits of all connection types whenuplink interference checks are performed.



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CIUL

MML Full Name C/I target UL offset

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.c_i_ul_offset


8.32 CS load balancing value

Parameter name CS Load Balancing Value

Abbreviated name csLoadBalancingValue

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter determines the load balancing technique to beused in the BSC when Multipoint A is in use.

Range and step Not used (OFF) (0), Done with actual NRI values (1), Done withnumber of available circuits (2)


Not used (OFF) ==> 0

Done with actual NRI values ==> 1

Done with number of available circuits ==> 2

Default value Not used (OFF) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Multipoint A Interface for BSC (94) (optional)

Related features . BSS20092: Multipoint A Interface for BSC

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E7I, E7M


13/04/2007



MML Full Name CS load balancing value

DB Name


8.33 CS NRI length

Parameter name CS NRI Length

Abbreviated name csNriLength

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter determines the length of the used NRI. The givenvalue indicates how many bits starting from bit 23 in TMSI areused for NRI. If the value is zero, Multipoint A is not in use.

NOTE: Restrictions:

CS NRI List must be defined before the CS NRI Length parameteris changed to other than 0 (default value).

BSC makes the following checks:

CS NRI List must include valid NRI value or values per SignallingPoint Code until CS NRI Length can be changed to other than 0(default value). When CS NRI Length is changed from 0 (defaultvalue), none of the NRI values (NRI List 1, NRI List 2, NRI List 3,NRI List 4, NRI List 5, NRI List 6, NRI List 7, NRI List 8, NRI List9, NRI List 10) must not exceed the decimal value range whichCS NRI Length is indicates.

For example:

If CS NRI Length has value 3, it means that 3 bits in TMSI areused for NRI and with 3 bits (‘111’) it is possible to have maximumvalue 7 in decimal. Therefore, none of the NRI values (NRI List 1,NRI List 2, NRI List 3, NRI List 4, NRI List 5, NRI List 6, NRI List7, NRI List 8, NRI List 9, NRI List 10) must not exceed value 7.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related parameters csNriList of BSC




Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E7I, E7M


MML Full Name CS NRI length

DB Name


8.34 CS NRI list

Parameter name CS NRI List

Abbreviated name csNriList

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 10


13/04/2007


Description This parameter maps Network Resource Identifier(s) (NRI) toMSC's SPC and Global Core Network Idenfication (CN-ID) toMSC's SPC. A maximum of 10 NRIs can be mapped to one MSC.Each NRI identifies uniquely the address of MSC and its specificSPC.

There is maximum 10 MSC’s information in this parameter list andeach MSC’s information consists of Default Signalling Point Code,CN-Id, MCC, MNC, NRI List 1, NRI List 2, NRI List 3, NRI List 4,NRI List 5, NRI List 6, NRI List 7, NRI List 8, NRI List 9, NRI List10, Signalling Point Code.

NOTE: Restrictions/Instructions:

Only one Default Signalling Point Code parameter can have valueTRUE at a same time in CS NRI List (others must be set asFALSE).

BSC makes the following checks:

- There must always be one Default Signalling Point Code -fieldhaving value TRUE in CS NRI List.

- There must not be two same Signalling Point Code values in CSNR List

- There must not be two same Global CN-Id values (consists ofCN-ID+ MCC + MNC values) in CS NRI List

- There must be real MSC's SPC created on A Interface until itcan be added to the CS NRI LIST and downloaded to the BSC.This is instructed in Multipoint A FAI (Feature ActivationInstructions) customer document.

Child parameters . cnId. defaultSignallingPointCode. mcc. mnc. nriList1. nriList10. nriList2. nriList3. nriList4. nriList5. nriList6. nriList7. nriList8. nriList9. signallingPointCode

Formula for getting internal value -

Default value -



Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Modification Online

Related parameters csNriLength of BSC

Parameter relationships CS NRI List must be defined before CS NRI Length parameter ischanged to other than 0.



Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E7I, E7A, E7M, E7D


MML Full Name CS NRI list

DB Name


8.34.1 CN identity (CN_ID)

Parameter name CN-ID

Abbreviated name cnId

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define Core Network-ID



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007


MML Commands E7I, E7M, E7A

MML Abbreviated Name CN_ID

MML Full Name CN identity

DB Name


8.34.2 default SPC (DEF_SPC)

Parameter name Default Signalling Point Code

Abbreviated name defaultSignallingPointCode

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define if Signalling Point Code is set asdefault.

NOTE:

Only one Default Signalling Point Code -field can have valueTRUE at the same time in Cs NRI List (others shall be set asFALSE).






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -


Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E7M

MML Abbreviated Name DEF_SPC

MML Full Name default SPC

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name


8.34.3 mobile country code (MCC)

Parameter name MCC

Abbreviated name mcc

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define Mobile Country Code (MCC).

NOTE:

MML range: 0..999



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -




DB Name



13/04/2007


8.34.4 mobile network code (MNC)

Parameter name MNC

Abbreviated name mnc

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define Mobile Network Code (MNC).

NOTE:

MML range: 0..999




Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -




DB Name


8.34.5 NRI (NRI List)

Parameter name NRI List 1

Abbreviated name nriList1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define NRI List 1.

MML NOTE: Required on creation: optional



Default value 65535




Related functions -

Modification Online


Parameter relationships When CS NRI Length is changed from 0 (default value), none ofthe NRI values (NRI List 1, NRI List 2, NRI List 3, NRI List 4, NRIList 5, NRI List 6, NRI List 7, NRI List 8, NRI List 9, NRI List 10)must not exceed the decimal value range which CS NRI Lengthindicates.

Related options -


Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: 23.236, Rel 5

MML Commands E7I, E7M, E7D

MML Abbreviated Name NRI list

MML Full Name NRI

DB Name C_BSC





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007






Default value 65535




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -


Interfaces -




MML Full Name NRI

DB Name





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value 65535




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -


Interfaces -




MML Full Name NRI

DB Name





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1





Default value 65535



13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -


Interfaces -




MML Full Name NRI

DB Name





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1





Default value 65535




Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Modification Online



Related options -


Interfaces -




MML Full Name NRI

DB Name





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1





Default value 65535




Related functions -

Modification Online



13/04/2007



Related options -


Interfaces -




MML Full Name NRI

DB Name





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1





Default value 65535




Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related options -


Interfaces -




MML Full Name NRI

DB Name





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1





Default value 65535




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -


Interfaces -


13/04/2007





MML Full Name NRI

DB Name





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1





Default value 65535




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -


Interfaces -




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name NRI

DB Name





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1





Default value 65535




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -


Interfaces -




MML Full Name NRI

DB Name



13/04/2007


8.34.15 signalling point code (SPC)

Parameter name Signalling Point Code

Abbreviated name signallingPointCode

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define Signalling Point Code.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E7I, E7A, E7D

MML Abbreviated Name SPC

MML Full Name signalling point code



8.35 CS TCH allocation calculation (CTC)

Parameter name CS TCH Allocation Calculation

Abbreviated name gprsTerritoryCalc

Managed object BSC

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how the GPRS territory is seenwhen calculating FR resources. (The RTSLs to be used when thelimit for FR resources is defined for the TCH rate selectionbetween full rate and half rate).

Note:

MML Range:

0 = Only CSW used RTSLs are used to calculate resources.

1 = CSW and PSW used RTSLs are used. PSW used RTSLs areseen as occupied resource when calculating PSW RTSLs.

2 = CSW used and PSW used RTSLs are used. PSW usedRTSLs are seen as idle resource when calculating resources.

Range and step Only CSW used RTSLs are used (0), CSW and PSW used RTSLsare used. (1), CSW used and PSW used RTSLs are used. (2)


Only CSW used RTSLs are used. ==> 0

CSW and PSW used RTSLs are used. ==> 1

CSW used and PSW used RTSLs are used. ==> 2

Default value Only CSW used RTSLs are used (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . BSC GPRS Param Enabled (GPRS O&M in BSC) (39) (optional)AND ( Half Rate (17) (optional) OR AMR HR (72) (optional) )

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CTC

MML Full Name CS TCH allocation calculation

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.cs_tch_alloc_calc



13/04/2007


8.36 CS TCH allocation RTSL0 (CTR)

Parameter name CS TCH Allocation RTSL0

Abbreviated name rtsl0PrefInTCHAlloc

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the priority order between GPRSand RTSL-0 allocation. With the parameter the RTSL-0 can bedefined to be allocating before allocating a TCH from GPRSterritory (the order of preference in TCH allocation between theRTSL-0 hopping group and the GPRS territory of the BB-hoppingBTSs).

Note:

MML range:

Y = The RTSL-0 hopping group is allocated first. If no freeresources are available then the GPRS territory is searched.

N = The GPRS territory is allocated first. If no free resources areavailable then the RTSL-0 hopping group is searched.

Default: N

Range and step The GPRS territory is allocated first (0), The RTSL-0 hoppinggroup is allocated first (1)


The GPRS territory is allocated first ==> 0

The RTSL-0 hopping group is allocated first ==> 1

Default value The GPRS territory is allocated first (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CTR

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name CS TCH allocation RTSL0

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.cs_tch_alloc_rtsl0


8.37 DCS macrocell threshold (DMAC)

Parameter name DCS Macrocell Threshold

Abbreviated name dcsMacrocellThreshold

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the macrocell size by means of themaximum transmission power of the MS in a GSM 1800 or GSM1900 cell. If you set the parameter value at 0 dBm, the division ofcells into macrocells and microcells is not in use.

NOTE:

MML value range:

GSM 1800: 0…36(dBm), with 2 dBm step

GSM 1900: 0…32(dBm), with 2 dBm step, and 33 (dBm)

NOTE:


GSM 1800:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

34 dBm: 30

36 dBm: 29

GSM 1900:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

33 dBm: 30



Default value 26



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DMAC

MML Full Name DCS macrocell threshold

DB Name bsc.dcs_macrocell_th


8.38 DCS microcell threshold (DMIC)

Parameter name DCS Microcell Threshold

Abbreviated name dcsMicrocellThreshold

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the microcell size by means of themaximum transmission power of the MS in a GSM 1800 or GSM1900 cell. If you set the parameter value at 33 dBm (GSM 1800)or 36 dBm (GSM 1900), the division of cells into macrocells andmicrocells is not in use.

NOTE:

MML value range:

GSM 1800: 0…36(dBm), with 2 dBm step

GSM 1900: 0…32(dBm), with 2 dBm step, and 33 (dBm)

NOTE:


GSM 1800:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

34 dBm: 30

36 dBm: 29

GSM 1900:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

33 dBm: 30



Default value 24



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DMIC

MML Full Name DCS microcell threshold

DB Name bsc.dcs_microcell_th



13/04/2007


8.39 delay of HO and PC for emergency calls (DEC)

Parameter name Delay Of HO And PC For Emergency Calls

Abbreviated name delayHoPcEmergencyCalls

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you can temporarily disable mobile powercontrol and handovers in TCH for emergency calls. This enhancesU-TDOA positioning accuracy.



Default value 5 s



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features . BSS20211: Disabling PC and HO for E911/UTDOA

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DEC

MML Full Name delay of HO and PC for emergency calls

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.emerg_call_delay


8.40 DFCA channel allocation method (DCAM)

Parameter name DFCA Channel Allocation Method

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name dfcaChannelAllocMethod

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define if DCFA assignments are madeprimarily to channels with the connection specific C/I target level orto channels with the highest positive C/I difference from the targetlevel.

Note:

MML range:

0 (primary target of a DFCA assignment is a MA, MAIO and tslcombination with the highest C/I difference from the target level)

1 (primary target of a DFCA assignment is a MA, MAIO and tslcombination on the connection specific target C/I level)

Range and step TCH With Highest C/I Level (0), TCH With C/I On Target Level (1)


TCH With Highest C/I Level ==> 0

TCH With C/I On Target Level ==> 1

Default value TCH With Highest C/I Level (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DCAM

MML Full Name DFCA channel allocation method

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.dfca_alloc_method



13/04/2007


8.41 disable external DR (DEXDR)

Parameter name Disable External DR

Abbreviated name disableExtDr

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you disable or enable the external directedretry handovers.

Range and step 0 (enable external directed retry handovers (N)), 1 (disableexternal directed retry handovers (Y))


enable external directed retry handovers (N) ==> 0

disable external directed retry handovers (Y) ==> 1

Default value enable external directed retry handovers (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DEXDR

MML Full Name disable external DR

DB Name bsc.disable_ext_dr


8.42 disable internal HO (DINHO)

Parameter name Disable Internal HO

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name disableIntHo

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether all handovers arecontrolled by the MSC or not.

Range and step 0 (all handovers are not controlled by the MSC (N)), 1 (allhandovers are controlled by the MSC (Y))


all handovers are not controlled by the MSC (N) ==> 0

all handovers are controlled by the MSC (Y) ==> 1

Default value all handovers are not controlled by the MSC (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DINHO

MML Full Name disable internal HO

DB Name bsc.disable_int_ho


8.43 DL high priority SSS (DHP)

Parameter name DL High Priority SSS

Abbreviated name schedStepSizeDlHighPrior

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the scheduling step side (SSS) forhigh priority level in the downlink direction.



Default value 3



Related functions -

Modification Online




-

Related features

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DHP

MML Full Name DL high priority SSS

DB Name bsc.dl_ul_priority_sss_tbl.dl_high_priority_sss


8.44 DL low priority SSS (DLP)

Parameter name DL Low Priority SSS

Abbreviated name schedStepSizeDlLowPrior

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the scheduling step side (SSS) forlow priority level in the downlink direction.



Default value 12


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DLP

MML Full Name DL low priority SSS

DB Name bsc.dl_ul_priority_sss_tbl.dl_low_priority_sss


8.45 DL normal priority SSS (DNP)

Parameter name DL Normal Priority SSS

Abbreviated name schedStepSizeDlNormPrior

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the scheduling step side (SSS) fornormal priority level in the downlink direction.



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online





13/04/2007


Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DNP

MML Full Name DL normal priority SSS

DB Name bsc.dl_ul_priority_sss_tbl.dl_norm_priority_sss


8.46 DTM fragmentation penalty (DFP)

Parameter name DTM Fragmentation Penalty

Abbreviated name dtmFragmentationPenalty

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description This parameter defines the value of the fragmentation penalty thatis used in the DTM channel allocation algorithm if there is a needto search for a configuration giving the highest capacity for theDTM MS. This is the case if the DTM MS is considered to be anRT user and if there are some RT and/or DTM allocationsexisting for other mobiles in the territory.

That is, this parameter is used to balance the trade-off betweensearching for a DTM allocation that gives the optimal DTM-PSresources and searching for a DTM allocation that avoidsfragmentation of PS resources in the PS territory.

The capacity of a DTM allocation is estimated in terms of radiotimeslots and the fragmentation penalty is subtracted from theestimated capacity value, if the DTM allocation would increase thefragmentation of the PS resources. That is the case when theDTM-CS timeslot and its neighbouring timeslots on both sides areoriginally in PS use.

In an example where a DTM-PS allocation consists of twotimeslots and the DTM MS gets a 50 % share on the first timeslotand a 100 % share on the second timeslot and the fragmentationpenalty has a value of 0.5. The capacity of that DTM allocation is1.5 (=0.5 + 1.0) timeslots if the DTM allocation does not increasethe fragmentation and it is 1.0 (=0.5 + 1.0 – 0.5) if the DTMallocation increases the fragmentation.

The DTM fragmentation penalty value of 0 means that a DTMallocation that increases the fragmentation of PS resources is asgood a choice as a DTM allocation that does not increase thefragmentation of PS resources.

The DTM fragmentation penalty value of 1 means that a DTMallocation that does not increase the fragmentation of PSresources is selected instead of a DTM allocation that increasesthe fragmentation of PS resources unless the latter one providesone timeslot more capacity than the former one in which case thelatter one is selected.

Range and step 0...1, step 0.1


Default value 0.3



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007


MML Commands EEJ, EEO

MML Abbreviated Name DFP

MML Full Name DTM fragmentation penalty

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.dtm_fragment_penalty


8.47 DTM pfc packet flow timer (DPPFT)

Parameter name DTM PFC Packet Flow Timer

Abbreviated name dtmPfcPacketFlowTimer

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Defines the maximum time accepted for a Packet Flow Timer(PFT) during a DTM allocation. The PFC life-time determines howlong the CS connection of a DTM MS is kept in the PS territoryafter the data traffic has ceased for the MS.



Default value 4 s



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DPPFT

MML Full Name DTM pfc packet flow timer

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.dtm_packet_flow_timer


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.48 EGPRS inactivity criteria (EGIC)

Parameter name EGPRS Inactivity Criteria

Abbreviated name inactCriteria

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the criteria used to the EGPRSInactivity.

Range and step Alarm disabled (0), No normal UL TBF releases (1), No normal DLTBF releases (2), No normal UL and DL TBF releases (3)


Alarm disabled ==> 0

No normal UL TBF releases ==> 1

No normal DL TBF releases ==> 2

No normal UL and DL TBF releases ==> 3

Default value Alarm disabled (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features . BSS20071: PCU Performance Optimization. BSS20062: (E)GPRS Inactivity Alarm / DX-part

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EGIC

MML Full Name EGPRS inactivity criteria

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.egprs_inact_criteria



13/04/2007


8.49 enable answer to paging call on FACCH (EPF)

Parameter name Enable Answer To Paging Call On FACCH

Abbreviated name pagingAnsOnFacch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you enable or disable an answer to the pagingcall setup on FACCH. FACCH call setup is only possible whenSDCCH congestion occurs.

Range and step 0 (disable answer to paging call setup on FACCH (N)), 1 (enableanswer to paging call setup on FACCH (Y))


disable answer to paging call setup on FACCH (N) ==> 0

enable answer to paging call setup on FACCH (Y) ==> 1

Default value disable answer to paging call setup on FACCH (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . FACCH Call Setup Due To SDCCH Congestion (4) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EPF

MML Full Name enable answer to paging call on FACCH

DB Name bsc.paging_ans_on_facch


8.50 enable call re-establishment on FACCH (ERF)

Parameter name Enable Call Re-Establishment On FACCH

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name reestablishOnFacch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you enable or disable the call re-establishmentsetup on FACCH. FACCH call setup is only possible whenSDCCCH congestion occurs.

Note!

Call re-establishment setup on FACCH is only possible in thosecells in which call re-establishment is allowed (the EQF command,parameter RE.) You can set the FACCH call setup feature ON orOFF in PRFILE.

Range and step 0 (disable call re-establishment setup on FACCH (N)), 1 (enablecall re-establishment setup on FACCH (Y))


disable call re-establishment setup on FACCH (N) ==> 0

enable call re-establishment setup on FACCH (Y) ==> 1

Default value disable call re-establishment setup on FACCH (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ERF

MML Full Name enable call re-establishment on FACCH

DB Name bsc.reestablish_on_facch



13/04/2007


8.51 enable emergency call on FACCH (EEF)

Parameter name Enable Emergency Call On FACCH

Abbreviated name emerCallOnFacch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you enable or disable the emergency callsetup on FACCH.

Note:

Emergency call setup on FACCH is only possible in those cells inwhich emergency calls are not restricted (the EQF command,parameter EC). FACCH call setup is only possible when SDCCHcongestion occurs.

Range and step 0 (disable emergency call setup on FACCH (N)), 1 (enableemergency call setup on FACCH (Y))


disable emergency call setup on FACCH (N) ==> 0

enable emergency call setup on FACCH (Y) ==> 1

Default value disable emergency call setup on FACCH (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EEF

MML Full Name enable emergency call on FACCH

DB Name bsc.emerg_call_on_facch


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.52 enable ordinary calls on FACCH (EOF)

Parameter name Enable Ordinary Calls On FACCH

Abbreviated name ordinaryCallOnFacch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you enable or disable the ordinary call setupon FACCH. FACCH call setup is only possible when SDCCHcongestion occurs.

Range and step disable ordinary calls setup on FACCH (N) (0), enable ordinarycalls setup on FACCH (Y) (1)


disable ordinary calls setup on FACCH (N) ==> 0

enable ordinary calls setup on FACCH (Y) ==> 1

Default value disable ordinary calls setup on FACCH (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EOF

MML Full Name enable ordinary calls on FACCH

DB Name bsc.ordinary_call_on_facch


8.53 ending moment for supervision of BTS (EMBNT)

Parameter name BTS Supervision Stopping Time Hour


13/04/2007


Abbreviated name nokBtsOffHour

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Attribute indicates the hour on which the control of BTSs with notransaction ends.

MML NOTE:

In MML only one parameter:

ending moment for supervision of BTS

Range: 00-00 .. 23-59

Default: 18-00



Default value 18



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EMBNT

MML Full Name ending moment for supervision of BTS

DB Name bsc.nok_bts_off


8.54 ending moment for supervision of BTS (EMBNT)

Parameter name BTS Supervision Stopping Time Minute

Abbreviated name nokBtsOffMinute

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Attribute indicates the minute on which the control of BTSs with notransaction ends.

MML NOTE:

In MML only one parameter: ending moment for supervision ofBTS

Range: 00-00 .. 23-59

Default: 18-00



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EMBNT

MML Full Name ending moment for supervision of BTS

DB Name bsc.nok_bts_off


8.55 events per hour for EGPRS inactivity alarm (IEPH)

Parameter name Events Per Hour For EGPRS Inactivity Alarm

Abbreviated name inactEventsPerHour

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -


13/04/2007


Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of TBF allocationattempts required per hour for EGPRS Inactivity Alarm.



Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IEPH

MML Full Name events per hour for EGPRS inactivity alarm

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.inact_events_per_hour


8.56 Expected BSC-BSC interface delay (EBID)

Parameter name Expected BSC-BSC Interface Delay

Abbreviated name expectedBscBscInterfaceDelay

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter is used in the Radio Resource Manager for thechannel assignment control to prevent simultaneous channelallocations in neighbouring BSCs.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 50 ms



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EBID

MML Full Name Expected BSC-BSC interface delay

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.inter_bsc_delay


8.57 FEP in PC HO use (FPHO)

Parameter name FEP In PC HO Use

Abbreviated name fepInPcHoUse

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you can indicate whether the Frame ErrorProbability based Power Control (PC) and Handover (HO)decision-making is used in the Power control and Handoveralgorithm.

Range and step PC and HO decision-making is not used (N) (0), PC and HOdecision-making is used (Y) (1)


PC and HO decision-making is not used (N) ==> 0

PC and HO decision-making is used (Y) ==> 1

Default value PC and HO decision-making is not used (N) (0)



13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . FER Measurement (44) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name FPHO

MML Full Name FEP in PC HO use

DB Name bsc.fep_in_pc_ho_use


8.58 free TSL for CS downgrade (CSD)

Parameter name Free TSL For CS Downgrade

Abbreviated name freeTSLsCsDowngrade

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter gives a target probability of TCH availability forcircuit switched services in a BTS with GPRS territory. Based onthe given probability and the size of a BTS (number of TRXs) theBSC defines a margin of idle TCHs that it tries to maintain free forthe incoming circuit switched TCH requests in the BTS. If thenumber of idle TCHs in the circuit switched territory of a BTSdecreases below the defined margin, a GPRS territory downgradeis started. In the margin definition the BSC uses a table that isshown in "GPRS territory downgrade" of "GPRS in BSC".



Default value 95 %



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name CSD

MML Full Name free TSL for CS downgrade

DB Name bsc.free_tsls_for_cs_dwngr


8.59 Free TSLs For CS Upgrade (CSU)

Parameter name Free TSLs For CS Upgrade

Abbreviated name freeTSLsCsUpgrade

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a period following a GPRS upgradeduring which the probability for a GPRS downgrade in a BTSshould be no more than 5%. Based on the given time and the sizeof a BTS (number of TRXs) the BSC defines a margin of idle TSLsthat is required as a condition for starting a GPRS territoryupgrade in the BTS. A GPRS upgrade may be done if the numberof free TSLs in a BTS is at least equal to the defined margin stillafter the upgrade. In the margin definition the BSC uses a tablethat is shown in "GPRS territory upgrade" of "GPRS in BSC".



Default value 4 s



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name CSU

MML Full Name Free TSLs For CS Upgrade

DB Name bsc.free_tsls_for_cs_upgr


8.60 GPRS territory update guard time (GTUGT)

Parameter name GPRS Territory Update Guard Time

Abbreviated name terrUpdGuardTGprs

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you set the time which must elapse betweentwo subsequent territory updates.



Default value 5 s



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GTUGT

MML Full Name GPRS territory update guard time

DB Name bsc.gprs_terr_upd_grd_time


8.61 GSM Macrocell Threshold (GMAC)

Parameter name GSM Macrocell Threshold

Abbreviated name gsmMacrocellThreshold

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the macrocell size by means of themaximum transmission power of the MS in a GSM cell. If you setthe parameter value at 5 dBm, the division of cells into macrocellsand microcells is not in use.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GMAC

MML Full Name GSM Macrocell Threshold


13/04/2007


DB Name bsc.gsm_macrocell_th


8.62 GSM Microcell Threshold (GMIC)

Parameter name GSM Microcell Threshold

Abbreviated name gsmMicrocellThreshold

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the microcell size by means of themaximum transmission power of the MS in a GSM cell. If you setthe parameter value at 43 dBm, the division of cells intomacrocells and microcells is not in use.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GMIC

MML Full Name GSM Microcell Threshold

DB Name bsc.gsm_microcell_th


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.63 HO preference order interference DL (HDL)

Parameter name HO Preference Order Interference DL

Abbreviated name hoPrefOrderInterfDl

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the order of preference betweenintra-cell and inter-cell handovers when the cause of the handoveris downlink interference.

Range and step 0 (Inter-cell handover has greater priority (INTER)), 1 (Intra-cellhandover has greater priority (INTRA))


Inter-cell handover has greater priority (INTER) ==> 0

Intra-cell handover has greater priority (INTRA) ==> 1

Default value Inter-cell handover has greater priority (INTER) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HDL

MML Full Name HO preference order interference DL

DB Name bsc.prior_ho_intf_dl


8.64 HO preference order interference UL (HUL)

Parameter name HO Preference Order Interference UL


13/04/2007


Abbreviated name hoPrefOrderInterfUl

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the order of preference betweenintra-cell and inter-cell handovers when the cause of the handoveris uplink interference.

Range and step 0 (Inter-cell handover has greater priority (INTER)), 1 (Intra-cellhandover has greater priority (INTRA))


Inter-cell handover has greater priority (INTER) ==> 0

Intra-cell handover has greater priority (INTRA) ==> 1

Default value Inter-cell handover has greater priority (INTER) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HUL

MML Full Name HO preference order interference UL

DB Name bsc.prior_ho_intf_ul


8.65 IMSI based handover gsm cells anonymous ms(IBGA)

Parameter name IMSI Based Handover GSM Cells Anonymous MS

Abbreviated name ibhoGsmCellsAnoMs

Managed object BSC

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define in the case of intra-GSM handoverwhether one of the existing Authorised Networks is used for targetcell selection or if all neighbour GSM cells are permitted. Thisparameter is used in a serving GSM cell when a mobile subscriberis anonymous and IMSI based GSM-GSM handovers are enabledin the serving GSM cell.

MML NOTE:

Range: 1..10, step 1

Default: ALL



Default value 0



Special value ALL (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters aneId of ANE




Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IBGA

MML Full Name IMSI based handover gsm cells anonymous ms

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.gsm_cells_ano_ms


8.66 IMSI based handover WCDMA cells anonymous ms(IBWA)

Parameter name IMSI Based Handover WCDMA Cells Anonymous MS

Abbreviated name ibhoWcdmaCellsAnoMs


13/04/2007


Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define in the case of WCDMA handoverwhether one of the existing Authorised Networks is used for targetcell selection or all neighbour WCDMA cells are permitted. Thisparameter is used in a serving GSM cell when a mobile subscriberis anonymous and IMSI based GSM-WCDMA handovers areenabled in the serving GSM cell.

MML NOTE:

Range: 1..10, step 1

Default: ALL



Default value 0



Special value ALL (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters aneId of ANE


Related options . Inter System HO (ISHO Support In BSC) (56) (optional) ANDIBHO (IMSI Based Handover) in BSC (80) (optional)


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IBWA

MML Full Name IMSI based handover WCDMA cells anonymous ms

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.wcdma_cells_ano_ms


8.67 initial AMR channel rate (IAC)

Parameter name Initial AMR Channel Rate

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name initAmrChannelRate

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the initial channel rate in call setup,internal inter cell handover (HO) and external HO for an AdaptiveMulti Rate (AMR) call.

MML Range:

1 = any rate, there is not any extra requirements by the parameterand the chosen channel rate is defined by taking into account thecurrently used information for channel allocation

2 = AMR FR is allocated despite of the values of the currentlyused information for channel allocation

Range and step Any rate (1), AMR FR (2)


Any rate ==> 1

AMR FR ==> 2

Default value Any rate (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . AMR FR (50) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name IAC

MML Full Name initial AMR channel rate

DB Name bsc.init_amr_channel_rate



13/04/2007


8.68 internal handover to external (IHTA)

Parameter name Internal Handover To External

Abbreviated name internalHoToExternal

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Parameter defines whether it is allowed to change internalhandover, where speech codec or channel rate is changed, toMSC controlled in order to avoid downlink muting.

NOTE: If MSC does not support unidirectional connection orconference bridge connection downlink muting cannot be avoidedby changing handover to external; it is advisable to leave theparameter to default value.

Range and step Not allowed (0), Allowed for AMR (1), Allowed for other internalhandovers than AMR (2), Allowed for all internal handovers (3)


Not allowed ==> 0

Allowed for AMR ==> 1

Allowed for other internal handovers than AMR ==> 2

Allowed for all internal handovers ==> 3

Default value Not allowed (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features . BSS20117: TCSM3i Support in BSC

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IHTA

MML Full Name internal handover to external

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.int_to_ext_params.int_to_ext_allwd


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.69 intra segment SDCCH HO guard (ISS)

Parameter name Intra Segment SDCCH HO Guard

Abbreviated name intraSegSdcchHoGuard

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the guard time for attempting anSDCCH handover from the BCCH BTS resource layer to anotherresource layer in a segment.



Default value 255 s



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Common BCCH EGSM900 (47) (optional) OR Common BCCHGSM1800 (48) (optional) OR Multi BCF Control (42) (optional)OR Common BCCH GSM800 (57) (optional) OR CommonBCCH GSM1900 (58) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name ISS

MML Full Name intra segment SDCCH HO guard

DB Name bsc.intra_seg_sdcch_ho_guard



13/04/2007


8.70 ISHO preferred for non-DTM MS (IPND)

Parameter name ISHO Preferred For Non-DTM MS

Abbreviated name ishoPreferredForNonDtmMs

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter the operator can determine whether an inter-system handover is to be triggered for a DTM incapable butWCDMA capable MS as soon as an appropriate WCDMA targetcell is available.

An inter-system handover can be triggered for a CS connection ifthe ISHO procedures are enabled in the BSC and if the "ISHOPreferred For Non-DTM MS" parameter has the value "Triggered".

NOTE:

MML Range:

Y = An inter-system handover is to be triggered for a DTMincapable but WCDMA capable MS,

N = An inter-system handover is not to be triggered for a DTMincapable but WCDMA capable MS

Default: N

Range and step Not triggered (0), Triggered (1)


Not triggered ==> 0

Triggered ==> 1

Default value Not triggered (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IPND

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name ISHO preferred for non-DTM MS

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.isho_prefer_non_dtm_ms


8.71 LAPD load threshold (LAPDL)

Parameter name LAPD Load Threshold

Abbreviated name lapdLoadThr

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold for the proportion ofrejected measurement results in all measurement results. Anoverload in the telecom Abis LAPD Link causes the rejections. Ifthis threshold is exceeded, the LAPD Link is regarded asoverloaded, and the BSC generates the relevant alarm.

MML Range and Step: 0..10000 = 0..100% (step size is 0.01%).



Default value 150



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LAPDL

MML Full Name LAPD load threshold

DB Name bsc.lapd_load_thr



13/04/2007


8.72 load rate for channel search (CLR)

Parameter name Load Rate For Channel Search

Abbreviated name loadRateChSearch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the general load limit for trafficchannels in a cell under the BSC. If the TCH load in a cell isbelow the limit, the traffic channels for speech and single slot datacalls are allocated using rotation between TRXs in a cell andbetween TSLs of a TRX. If the load limit has been reached orexceeded, the TCH allocation is performed trying to save largerspaces of idle FR resources for the possible multislot HSCSD callsby preferring small gaps of free resources and ends of a TRX forsingle slot calls.

Note:

If the BTS-specific parameter cell load for channel search hasbeen set (the value is not 0) in a BTS, this will override the effectof the BSC level parameter in that BTS.



Default value 100 %



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters cellLoadForChannelSearch of BTS


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CLR

MML Full Name load rate for channel search

DB Name bsc.load_rate_ch_search


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.73 lower limit for FR TCH resources (HRL)

Parameter name Lower Limit For FR TCH Resources

Abbreviated name btsLoadDepTchRateLower

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter controls the TCH channel rate determination on theBSC level according to the cell load in traffic channel allocation.With this parameter you define the lower limit for the percentage offree full rate resources. Full rate TCHs are allocated until thenumber of free full rate resources is reduced below the value ofthe parameter. The half rate resources are then allocated.



Default value 40 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . AMR HR (72) (optional) OR Half Rate (17) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HRL

MML Full Name lower limit for FR TCH resources

DB Name bsc.bts_load_dep_tch_rate.lower_limit



13/04/2007


8.74 maximum mean holding time for SDCCHs(MAXHTS)

Parameter name Maximum Mean Holding Time For SDCCHs

Abbreviated name maxHldSdcch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum mean holding timefor signalling channels. If the mean holding time during ameasurement period is greater than or equals the maximum meanholding time, the alarm system prints out an alarm.



Default value 30 min



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MAXHTS

MML Full Name maximum mean holding time for SDCCHs

DB Name bsc.max_hld_sdcch


8.75 maximum mean holding time for TCHs (MAXHTT)

Parameter name Maximum Mean Holding Time For TCHs

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name maxHldTch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum mean holding timefor traffic channels. If the mean holding time during ameasurementperiod is greater than or equals the maximum meanholding time,the alarm system prints out an alarm.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MAXHTT

MML Full Name maximum mean holding time for TCHs

DB Name bsc.max_hld_tch


8.76 maximum number of DL TBF (MNDL)

Parameter name Maximum Number Of DL TBF

Abbreviated name pcuMaxNoDLtbfInCH

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the maximum number of TBFs thata radio time slot can have in average, in a GPRS territory, in thedownlink direction.



Default value 9



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MNDL

MML Full Name maximum number of DL TBF

DB Name bsc.pcu_max_dl_tbf_in_ch


8.77 maximum number of UL TBF (MNUL)

Parameter name Maximum Number Of UL TBF

Abbreviated name pcuMaxNoULtbfInCH

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum number of TBFs thata radio time slot can have in average, in a GPRS territory, in theuplink direction.



Default value 7

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MNUL

MML Full Name maximum number of UL TBF

DB Name bsc.pcu_max_ul_tbf_in_ch


8.78 maximum TCH transaction rate (MTTR)

Parameter name Maximum TCH Transaction Rate

Abbreviated name maxTchTransactionRate

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter defines the maximum incoming (from MSC toBSC) TCH transaction rate (transactions per second) that isacceptable for changing internal handover to external. In thiscontext TCH transaction means MSC controlled TCH handover orTCH assignment.



Default value 50



Special value changing internal handover to external is denied (0)

Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online

Related parameters tchTransactionCount of BSC


Related options -


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MTTR

MML Full Name maximum TCH transaction rate

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.int_to_ext_params.max_transact_rate


8.79 mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 2 ULTSL (BL02)

Parameter name Mean BEP Limit MS Multislot Pwr Prof 0 With 2 UL TSL

Abbreviated name meanBepLimitUL_Prof0_2tsl

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter indicates the mean Bit Error Probability (BEP) limitfor MS multislot power profile 0 when allocating 2 uplink TSLs.The measured mean BEP value is compared to the value of thisparameter when defining how many uplink TSLs can be allocated.If the mean BEP limit is set low, power reduction is not taken intoaccount so strictly in channel allocation.

Range and step 0..31 dB, step 1 dB


Default value 21 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features . BSS20089: Extended Dynamic Allocation. BSS20084: High Multislot Classes

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BL02

MML Full Name mean BEP limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 2 UL TSL

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.bep_limit_ul_tbl.prof0_2tsl





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




Default value 26 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





13/04/2007



Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




Default value 30 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




Default value 20 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007










Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




Default value 25 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




Default value 30 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -






13/04/2007






Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




Default value 24 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -






DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




Default value 29 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -







13/04/2007


8.87 measurement period for high TCH interferencesupervision (PRDHIF)

Parameter name Meas Period For High TCH Interference Supervision

Abbreviated name prdHighIf

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the measurement period for thehigh TCH interference supervision.






Special value De-activated (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PRDHIF

MML Full Name measurement period for high TCH interference supervision

DB Name bsc.prd_high_if


8.88 measurement period for SDCCH mean holding timesupervision (PRDMHS)

Parameter name Meas Period For SDCCH Mean Holding Time Supervision

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name measPrdSdcch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter supervises too long mean holding times inSDCCHs. With this parameter you define the length of themeasurement period. The alarms are printed out only at the end ofthe measurement period.






Special value deactivated (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PRDMHS

MML Full Name measurement period for SDCCH mean holding time supervision

DB Name bsc.meas_pr_sdcch


8.89 measurement period for supervision of BTS withno transactions (PRDBNT)

Parameter name Meas Period For Supervision Of BTS With No Transact

Abbreviated name prdNokBts

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -


13/04/2007


Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the measurement period for thesupervision of BTSs with no transactions.






Special value De-activated (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PRDBNT

MML Full Name measurement period for supervision of BTS with no transactions

DB Name bsc.prd_nok_bts


8.90 measurement period for supervision of channelfailure rate (PRDCFR)

Parameter name Meas Period For Supervision Of Channel Failure Rate

Abbreviated name measPrdFail

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter supervises channel failures both in traffic channelsand in SDCCHs. With this parameter you define the length of themeasurement period. The alarms are printed out only at the end ofthe measurement period.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007









Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PRDCFR

MML Full Name measurement period for supervision of channel failure rate

DB Name bsc.meas_prd_fail


8.91 measurement period for supervision of congestionin BTS (PRDCNG)

Parameter name Measurement Period For Supervision Of Congestion In BTS

Abbreviated name measPrdCh

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter supervises SDCCH and TCH congestion in a BTS.With this parameter you define the length of the measurementperiod. The alarms are printed out only at the end of themeasurement period.





13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PRDCNG

MML Full Name measurement period for supervision of congestion in BTS

DB Name bsc.meas_prd_ch


8.92 measurement period for TCH mean holding timesupervision (PRDMHT)

Parameter name Meas Period For TCH Mean Holding Time Supervision

Abbreviated name measTchMhold

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter supervises too short and too long mean holdingtimes in traffic channels. With this parameter you define the lengthof the measurement period. The alarms are printed out only at theend of the measurement period.







DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PRDMHT

MML Full Name measurement period for TCH mean holding time supervision

DB Name bsc.meas_tch_mhold


8.93 minimum mean holding time for TCHs (MINHTT)

Parameter name Minimum Mean Holding Time For TCHs

Abbreviated name minHldTch

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum mean holding time fortraffic channels. If the mean holding time is below the minimummean holding time and there have been enough calls during themeasurement period (the number of seizures is greater than orequals the operator-defined threshold value), the alarm systemprints out an alarm.



Default value 10 s



Related functions -

Modification Online




13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MINHTT

MML Full Name minimum mean holding time for TCHs

DB Name bsc.min_hld_tch


8.94 MS distance behaviour (DISB)

Parameter name MS Distance Behaviour

Abbreviated name msDistanceBehaviour

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the executions allowed after theTiming Advance has exceeded the threshold.

NOTE:

Range:

0..60, 255

0 (release immediately)

1 (1 s to try handover, release if handover does not succeed)

.

.

.

60 (60 s to try handover, release if handover does not succeed)

255 (no release, only handover attempts)



Default value 255 (no release, only handover attempts)



Special value no release, only handover attempts

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DISB

MML Full Name MS distance behaviour

DB Name bsc.ms_dist_behaviour


8.95 NACC enabled (NACC)

Parameter name NACC Enabled

Abbreviated name naccUsage

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the usage of NACC procedures.When enabled the MS (when in packet transfer mode) mayreceive neighbour cell system information messages in serving cellbefore the cell reselection is executed. When enabled also thePacket SI Status support is activated.

Range and step 0 (NACC is disabled (N)), 1(NACC is enabled (Y))

Formula for getting internal value NACC is disabled (N) => 0

NACC is enabled (Y) => 1

Default value NACC is disabled (N) (0)

Default value notes 0


Related functions -

Modification Online



13/04/2007



Related options . NACC (Network Assisted Cell Change) (81) (optional)

Related features . BSS11112: Network Controlled Cell Re-selection

Interfaces -

References . Nokia reference: BSS11112


MML Abbreviated Name NACC

MML Full Name NACC enabled

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.nacc_state


8.96 NCCR control mode (NCM)

Parameter name NCCR Control Mode

Abbreviated name nccrControlMode

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you enable or disable the NCCR in the BSC.If NCCR is enabled then the MS in RR Packet transfer mode andRR Packet idle mode sends neighbor cell measurements to thenetwork and the network commands the MS to perform cellreselection. MS is in NC2 mode. If NCCR is disabled then the MSwill make an autonomous cell reselection. MS is in NC0 mode.

Range and step NCCR is disabled for all mobile stations (0), NCCR is enabled forrelease 97 onwards MS (1), NCCR is enabled for release 99onwards MS (2), NCCR is enabled for release 4 onwards MS (3),NCCR is enabled for all mobile stations (4)


NCCR is disabled for all mobile stations. ==> 0

NCCR is enabled for release 97 onwards MS ==> 1



NCCR is enabled for all mobile stations. ==> 4

Default value NCCR is disabled for all mobile stations. (0)



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: TS 44.018. 3GPP Reference: TS 44.060. 3GPP Reference: TS 45.008 (NETWORK_CONTROL_ORDER)


MML Abbreviated Name NCM

MML Full Name NCCR control mode

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.nccr_ctrl_mode


8.97 NCCR idle mode reporting period (NIRP)

Parameter name NCCR Idle Mode Reporting Period

Abbreviated name nccrIdleModeRepPeriod

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Network Control (NC)measurement reporting period for the MSs in RR Packet Idlemode.

Range and step 0.48 s (0), 0.96 s (1), 1.92 s (2), 3.84 s (3), 7.68 s (4), 15.36 s (5),30.72 s (6), 61.44 s (7)


13/04/2007



0.48 s ==> 0

0.96 s ==> 1

1.92 s ==> 2

3.84 s ==> 3

7.68 s ==> 4

15.36 s ==> 5

30.72 s ==> 6

61.44 s ==> 7

Default value 15.36 s (5)



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: TS 44.018. 3GPP Reference: TS 44.060. 3GPP Reference: TS 45.008 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_I)


MML Abbreviated Name NIRP

MML Full Name NCCR idle mode reporting period

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.nc_rep_period_i


8.98 NCCR neighbor cell penalty (NNCP)

Parameter name NCCR Neighbor Cell Penalty

Abbreviated name nccrNeighborCellPenalty

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the penalty time for a neighbor cellafter a NCCR to that cell has failed.



Default value 6 s



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name NNCP

MML Full Name NCCR neighbor cell penalty

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.nc_neighbor_penalty


8.99 NCCR return to old cell time (NOCT)

Parameter name NCCR Return To Old Cell Time

Abbreviated name nccrReturnOldCellTime

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the start value for a timer thattogether with another timer (NCCR target cell penalty time)counteracts the “Ping-Pong” effect.



Default value 10 s


13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name NOCT

MML Full Name NCCR return to old cell time

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.nc_ret_old_c_time


8.100 NCCR target cell penalty time (NTPT)

Parameter name NCCR Target Cell Penalty Time

Abbreviated name nccrTargetCellPenalty

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the time during which NCCR is notallowed for a mobile station that has been ordered to selectanother cell and has returned from that cell to the original cell.

Together with another timer (NCCR Return To Old Cell Time)counteracts the “Ping-Pong” effect.



Default value 10 s



Related functions -

Modification Online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007







Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name NTPT

MML Full Name NCCR target cell penalty time

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.nc_target_c_penalty


8.101 NCCR transfer mode reporting period (NTRP)

Parameter name NCCR Transfer Mode Reporting Period

Abbreviated name nccrTraModeRepPeriod

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Network Control (NC)measurement reporting period for the MSs in RR Packet Transfermode.

Range and step 0.48 s (0), 0.96 s (1), 1.92 s (2), 3.84 s (3), 7.68 s (4), 15.36 s (5),30.72 s (6), 61.44 s (7)


0.48 s ==> 0

0.96 s ==> 1

1.92 s ==> 2

3.84 s ==> 3

7.68 s ==> 4

15.36 s ==> 5

30.72 s ==> 6

61.44 s ==> 7

Default value 0.48 s (0)



13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: TS 44.018. 3GPP Reference: TS 44.060. 3GPP Reference: TS 45.008 (NC_REPORTING_PERIOD_T)


MML Abbreviated Name NTRP

MML Full Name NCCR transfer mode reporting period

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.nc_rep_period_p


8.102 number of ignored transcoder failures (ITCF)

Parameter name Number Of Ignored Transcoder Failures

Abbreviated name callReleaseLimit

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how many successive remotetranscoder failures the BSC may receive before it releases thecall.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ITCF

MML Full Name number of ignored transcoder failures

DB Name bsc.nbr_ignored_tc_fail


8.103 number of preferred cells (NPC)

Parameter name Number Of Preferred Cells

Abbreviated name noOfPrefCells

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum number of preferredcell identifiers that the BSC sends to the MSC in theHANDOVER_ REQUIRED message.



Default value 3



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -




13/04/2007


MML Abbreviated Name NPC

MML Full Name number of preferred cells

DB Name bsc.gen_handover_req_message.no_of_pref_cells


8.104 penalty trigger measurement period (PTMP)

Parameter name Penalty Trigger Measurement Period

Abbreviated name triggerMeasPeriod

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the length of the period duringwhich the latest Inter-System Handover counters are used, if theWCDMA RAN Service Area and neighbour WCDMA RAN cellpenalty triggering are used. According to the value of thisparameter, the BSC calculates how many successful incomingInter-System Handovers have occurred per each Service Area andhow many unsuccessful outgoing inter-system handover attemptshave occurred per each neighbour WCDMA RAN cell during thelatest measurement period.

MML value range:

2 … 254 (seconds) by 2 second steps OR N

special value N = WCDMA RAN service area and neighbourWCDMA RAN cell penalty triggering is disabled

Range and step 2...254 seconds, step 2 seconds


Default value 128 seconds



Special value Disabled (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PTMP

MML Full Name penalty trigger measurement period

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.trigger_meas_period


8.105 PFC ack BLER limit for transfer delay 1 (ABL1)

Parameter name PFC Ack BLER Limit For Transfer Delay 1

Abbreviated name pfcAckBlerLimit_notAvailable

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum block error rate forPFCs for which the transfer delay is not available.



Default value 90 %



Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ABL1

MML Full Name PFC ack BLER limit for transfer delay 1


13/04/2007


DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.pfc_bler_limits.pfc_ack_bler_mode.not_available


8.106 PFC unack BLER limit for SDU error ratio 1 (UBL1)

Parameter name PFC Unack BLER Limit For SDU Error Ratio 1

Abbreviated name pfcUnackBlerLimit_notAvailable

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum block error rate forPFCs for which the SDU Error Ratio is not available.

Range and step 0...250 per mil, step 1 per mil


Default value 20 per mil



Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UBL1

MML Full Name PFC unack BLER limit for SDU error ratio 1

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.pfc_bler_limits.pfc_unack_bler_mode.not_available


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.107 pre-emption usage in handover (PRE)

Parameter name Pre-Emption Usage In Handover

Abbreviated name preemptionUsageInHO

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define if the pre-emption feature is appliedor not in handovers.

Range and step 0 (the pre-emption is not applied in handover (N)), 1 (the pre-emption is applied in handover (Y))

Formula for getting internal value pre-emption is not applied in handover (N) => 0

pre-emption is applied in handover (Y) => 1

Default value pre-emption is applied in handover (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Preempt Usage In BSC (68) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PRE

MML Full Name pre-emption usage in handover

DB Name bsc.pre_empt


8.108 priority level (PR)

Parameter name Priority Level

Abbreviated name pieToSubscriber


13/04/2007


Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the priority level to which a certainsubscriber type is to be attached.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters pieToSubscriberType of BSC

Parameter relationships If Priority Level(s) given, also decision Subscriber type must begiven.

Related options . Improved Trunk Reservation (19) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EET

MML Abbreviated Name PR

MML Full Name priority level

DB Name


8.109 public served count (PSC)

Parameter name Public Served Count

Abbreviated name publicServCount

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define how many public users must beserved before a WPS user can be served. This parameter isapplied in traffic channel allocation when the WPS users alreadyhave WPS priority capacity in use and more than WPS preferencecapacity of the rest of the cell's resources are in use. Value 0indicates that all the idle resources of a cell can be allocated tosuccessive WPS calls without any restrictions.



Default value 3



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Wireless Priority Service (WPS) In Use In BSC (71) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PSC

MML Full Name public served count

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.public_serv_count


8.110 QC drop action trigger threshold (QCATD)

Parameter name QC Drop Action Trigger Threshold

Abbreviated name qcActionTriggerThr_drop

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the Quality Control drop actiontrigger threshold.

NOTE:

Range: 0 ... 1000 block periods

Value 0 means that action is disabled.

One block period equals the time of 20 ms.



Default value 400



Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QCATD

MML Full Name QC drop action trigger threshold

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.qc_trigger_thr.drop


8.111 QC NCCR action trigger threshold (QCATN)

Parameter name QC NCCR Action Trigger Threshold

Abbreviated name qcActionTriggerThr_nccr

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Quality Control NCCR actiontrigger threshold.


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value 100



Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QCATN

MML Full Name QC NCCR action trigger threshold

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.qc_trigger_thr.nccr


8.112 QC QoS renegotiation action trigger threshold(QCATQ)

Parameter name QC QoS Renegotiation Action Trigger Threshold

Abbreviated name qcActionTriggerThr_qosRenego

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Quality Control QoSrenegotiation action trigger threshold.



Default value 200



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QCATQ

MML Full Name QC QoS renegotiation action trigger threshold

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.qc_trigger_thr.qos_renego


8.113 QC reallocation action trigger threshold (QCATR)

Parameter name QC Reallocation Action Trigger Threshold

Abbreviated name qcActionTriggerThr_realloca

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Quality Control reallocationaction trigger threshold.



Default value 25



Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



References -


MML Abbreviated Name QCATR

MML Full Name QC reallocation action trigger threshold

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.qc_trigger_thr.realloca


8.114 RNW configuration Identification (RNW ID)

Parameter name RNW Configuration Identification

Abbreviated name rnwConfId

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description RNW Configuration Identification identifies the active configuration.It is copied from Plan Configuration Identification in activationphase.



Default value -




Related functions -




Related options -

Related features . BSS20012: File Based RNW Plan Provisioning, phase 1


References -

MML Commands EEA

MML Abbreviated Name RNW ID

MML Full Name RNW configuration Identification


13/04/2007


DB Name


8.115 RNW fallback configuration identification (FB ID)

Parameter name RNW Fallback Configuration Identification

Abbreviated name rnwFallbackConfId

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description RNW Fallback Configuration Identification identifies the fallbackconfiguration. It is copied from RNW Plan ConfigurationIdentification in activation phase.

When fallback activation is started, RNW Fallback ConfigurationIdentification is used to check that operator gives rightidentification of fallback.



Default value -




Related functions -




Related options -



References -

MML Commands EEA

MML Abbreviated Name FB ID

MML Full Name RNW fallback configuration identification

DB Name


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.116 RNW plan configuration identification (PLAN ID)

Parameter name RNW Plan Configuration Identification

Abbreviated name rnwPlanConfId

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify RNW Plan Configuration. RNWConfiguration Identification for plan database is defined when planis downloaded.

When plan validation, activation or interruption is started byoperator, RNW Plan Configuration Identifigation is used to checkthat operator gives right identification of plan.



Default value -




Related functions -




Related options -



References -

MML Commands EEA

MML Abbreviated Name PLAN ID

MML Full Name RNW plan configuration identification

DB Name



13/04/2007


8.117 RNW plan database state

Parameter name RNW Plan Database State

Abbreviated name rnwPlanDatabaseState

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Parameter defines the state of the RNW plan database. Stateinformation is available only for the RNW plan database.

States for the RNW plan database are:

CLEAR (RNW plan does not exists)

DOWNLOADING (download is ongoing)

DOWNLOAD_INIT (initialization of RNW Plan database isongoing)

DOWNLOADED (RNW plan is downloaded; database is initializedand changes of the plan are made to database)

VALIDATING (validation of the plan database is ongoing)

VALIDATING_NO_INT (validation of the plan database is ongoing,BSC Radio Network configuration changes are denied)

VALIDATED (validation is done; RNW plan database is ready tobe activated)

ACTIVATING (activation of the plan database is ongoing)

ACTIVATED (RNW plan is activated)

INTERRUPTED (activation is interrupted by operator)

FALLBACK_ACT (fallback activation ongoing)

ACT_INIT (fallback copy is dumped to disk)

FALLBACK_INIT (fallback copy is loaded to memory)

INTERRUPTED_BY_SYSTEM (activation interrupted by system;only fallback activation allowed in that state)

Range and step CLEAR (0), DOWNLOADING (1), DOWNLOAD_INIT (2),DOWNLOADED (3), VALIDATING (4), VALIDATING_NO_INT (5),VALIDATED (6), ACTIVATING (7), ACTIVATED (8),INTERRUPTED (9), FALLBACK_ACT (10), ACT_INIT (11),FALLBACK_INIT (12), INTERRUPTED_BY_SYSTEM (13)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




CLEAR ==> 0

DOWNLOADING ==> 1

DOWNLOAD_INIT ==> 2

DOWNLOADED ==> 3

VALIDATING ==> 4

VALIDATING_NO_INT ==> 5

VALIDATED ==> 6

ACTIVATING ==> 7

ACTIVATED ==> 8

INTERRUPTED ==> 9

FALLBACK_ACT ==> 10

ACT_INIT ==> 11

FALLBACK_INIT ==> 12

INTERRUPTED_BY_SYSTEM ==> 13

Default value CLEAR (0)



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features . BSS20012: File Based RNW Plan Provisioning, phase 1 OR. BSS20699: File Based RNW Plan Provisioning, phase 2


References -

MML Commands EEK, EEE


MML Full Name RNW plan database state

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.db_info.db_state



13/04/2007


8.118 RX antenna supervision period (RXANT)

Parameter name RX Antenna Supervision Period

Abbreviated name rxAntSupPer

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the time, in minutes, that the BTSuses for the internal RX antenna supervision.






Special value internal supervision is not performed (65535)

Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name RXANT

MML Full Name RX antenna supervision period

DB Name bsc.rx_ant_sup_per


8.119 RX level balance (RXBAL)

Parameter name RX Level Balance

Abbreviated name rxLevBalance

Managed object BSC

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the balance between the downlinksignal level and the uplink signal level within the BSC coveragearea. Value 5 dB means that the downlink signal is 5 dB strongerthan the uplink signal.



Default value 5 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name RXBAL

MML Full Name RX level balance

DB Name bsc.rx_lev_balance


8.120 RX level based TCH access (RXTA)

Parameter name RX Level Based TCH Access

Abbreviated name rxLevelBasedTchAccess

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description This parameter is used to determine whether TCH access isbased on downlink RX level.

NOTE!

MML range:

0 = RX level based TCH access is not used

1 = RX level based TCH access is used in call setup

2 = RX level based TCH access is used in call setup and inhandovers

Range and step Not Used (0), Used In Call Setup (1), Used In Call Setup And InHandovers (2)


Not Used ==> 0

Used In Call Setup ==> 1

Used In Call Setup And In Handovers ==> 2




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features . BSS20002: Cingular 38 RxLev Min Access

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name RXTA

MML Full Name RX level based TCH access

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.rx_lev_based_tch_acc


8.121 RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 2 ULTSL (RL02)

Parameter name RX Quality Limit MS Multislot Pwr Prof 0 With 2 UL TSL

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name rxqualLimitUL_Prof0_2tsl

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter indicates the RX quality limit for MS multislotpower profile 0 when allocating 2 uplink TSLs. The measured RXquality value is compared to the value of this parameter whendefining how many uplink TSLs can be allocated. If the RX qualitylimit is set high, power reduction is not taken into account sostrictly in channel allocation.



Default value 5 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name RL02

MML Full Name RX quality limit MS multislot pwr prof 0 with 2 UL TSL

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.rxqual_limit_ul_tbl.prof0_2tsl





Managed object BSC


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




Default value 3 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Default value 1 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007





Default value 5 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Default value 3 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007





Default value 1 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Default value 3 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007





Default value 2 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -






8.129 SAIC DL C/I offset (SCIO)

Parameter name SAIC DL C/I Offset

Abbreviated name saicDlCIOffset

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter defines how much lower downlink C/I values canbe used for SAIC calls than for non-SAIC calls in DFCA TCHallocation.


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value 2 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfca144Connection_ciTarget of BSC,dfca144Connection_softBlockingCi of BSC,dfcaAmrFrConnection_ciTarget of BSC,dfcaAmrFrConnection_softBlockingCi of BSC,dfcaAmrHrConnection_ciTarget of BSC,dfcaAmrHrConnection_softBlockingCi of BSC,dfcaFrConnection_ciTarget of BSC,dfcaFrConnection_softBlockingCi of BSC,dfcaHrConnection_ciTarget of BSC,dfcaHrConnection_softBlockingCi of BSC


Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND Single Antenna Interference Cancellation (SAIC)(92) (optional)

Related features . BSS20082: Single Antenna Interference Cancellation

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SCIO

MML Full Name SAIC DL C/I offset

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.saic_dl_c_i_offset


8.130 service area penalty time (SAPT)

Parameter name Service Area Penalty Time

Abbreviated name wcdmaRanSaiPenalty

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the duration of the handoverpenalty timer which has been triggered for a Service Area. Whilethe Service Area penalty timer is on, the BSC is not allowed toinitiate an Inter-System Handover attempt towards WCDMA RANcells that belong to the Service Area.

Range and step 0...255 sec, step 1 sec


Default value 127 sec



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SAPT

MML Full Name service area penalty time

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.utran_sai_penalty


8.131 slow AMR LA enabled (SAL)

Parameter name Slow AMR LA Enabled

Abbreviated name slowAmrLaEnabled

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the AMR link adaptation (LA) modewithin the BSS.

Range and step 0 (fast LA mode is used (N)), 1 (enable slow AMR LA mode (Y))

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




fast LA mode is used (N) ==> 0

enable slow AMR LA mode (Y) ==> 1

Default value fast LA mode is used (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . AMR FR (50) (optional) OR AMR HR (72) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name SAL

MML Full Name slow AMR LA enabled

DB Name bsc.slow_amr_la_enabled


8.132 soft blocking C/I 14.4 (SBCI)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/I 14.4

Abbreviated name dfca144Connection_softBlockingCi

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable C/I valuefor circuit switched data connections of 14.4 kbit/s.

NOTE: The parameter value must be equal to or smaller than C/Itarget 14.4.

Value -20 dB means that soft blocking is disabled.

NOTE:

MML modification: Parameter is modifiable if options DynamicFrequency And Channel Allocation (70) AND (HSCSD_PRM ORPRM_144) are ON. Options (HSCSD_PRM and PRM_144) arehidden in MML and available if the operator has purchased thefeature.






Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfca144Connection_ciTarget of BSC


Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND ( High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD -TCSM2) (25) (optional) OR Data 144 Usage (69) (optional) )

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SBCI

MML Full Name soft blocking C/I 14.4

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.d144_c_i_params.soft_block_c_i


8.133 Soft Blocking C/I AMR FR (SBAF)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/I AMR FR

Abbreviated name dfcaAmrFrConnection_softBlockingCi

Managed object BSC

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable C/I valuefor full rate AMR speech connections.

NOTE: The parameter value must be equal to or smaller than C/Itarget AMR FR.







Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfcaAmrFrConnection_ciTarget of BSC


Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND AMR FR (50) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SBAF

MML Full Name Soft Blocking C/I AMR FR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.amr_fr_c_i_params.soft_block_c_i


8.134 soft blocking C/I AMR HR (SBAH)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/I AMR HR

Abbreviated name dfcaAmrHrConnection_softBlockingCi

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable C/I valuefor half rate AMR speech connections.

NOTE: The parameter value must be equal to or smaller than C/Itarget AMR HR.







Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfcaAmrHrConnection_ciTarget of BSC



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SBAH

MML Full Name soft blocking C/I AMR HR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.amr_hr_c_i_params.soft_block_c_i


8.135 soft blocking C/I FR (SBF)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/I FR

Abbreviated name dfcaFrConnection_softBlockingCi

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable C/I valuefor full rate and EFR speech connections, and for circuit switcheddata connections up to 9.6 kbit/s.

NOTE: The parameter value must be equal to or smaller than C/Itarget FR.







Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfcaFrConnection_ciTarget of BSC



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SBF

MML Full Name soft blocking C/I FR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.fr_c_i_params.soft_block_c_i


8.136 Soft Blocking C/I HR (SBH)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/I HR

Abbreviated name dfcaHrConnection_softBlockingCi

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable C/I valuefor half rate speech connections.

NOTE: The parameter value must be equel to or smaller than C/Itarget HR.







Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters dfcaAmrHrConnection_ciTarget of BSC


Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND Half Rate (17) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SBH

MML Full Name Soft Blocking C/I HR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.hr_c_i_params.soft_block_c_i


8.137 soft blocking C/N 14.4 (SBCN)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/N 14.4

Abbreviated name dfca144Connection_softBlockingCn

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable carrier/noise ratio for circuit switched data connections of 14.4 kbit/s.


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value 14 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD - TCSM2) (25)(optional) OR Data 144 Usage (69) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SBCN

MML Full Name soft blocking C/N 14.4

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.d144_c_i_params.soft_block_c_n


8.138 soft blocking C/N AMR FR (SBCNAF)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/N AMR FR

Abbreviated name dfcaAmrFrConnection_softBlockingCn

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable carrier/noise ratio for full rate AMR speech connections.



Default value 7 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online


13/04/2007





Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SBCNAF

MML Full Name soft blocking C/N AMR FR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.amr_fr_c_i_params.soft_block_c_n


8.139 soft blocking C/N AMR HR (SBCNAH)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/N AMR HR

Abbreviated name dfcaAmrHrConnection_softBlockingCn

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable carrier/noise ratio for half rate AMR speech connections.



Default value 12 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . AMR HR (72) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name SBCNAH

MML Full Name soft blocking C/N AMR HR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.amr_hr_c_i_params.soft_block_c_n


8.140 soft blocking C/N FR (SBCNF)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/N FR

Abbreviated name dfcaFrConnection_softBlockingCn

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable carrier/noise ratio for full rate and EFR speech connections, and forcircuit switched data connections up to 9.6 kbit/s.



Default value 12 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SBCNF

MML Full Name soft blocking C/N FR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.fr_c_i_params.soft_block_c_n



13/04/2007


8.141 Soft Blocking C/N HR (SBCNH)

Parameter name Soft Blocking C/N HR

Abbreviated name dfcaHrConnection_softBlockingCn

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable carrier/noise ratio for half rate speech connections.



Default value 14 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Half Rate (17) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SBCNH

MML Full Name Soft Blocking C/N HR

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.hr_c_i_params.soft_block_c_n


8.142 starting moment for supervision of BTS (SMBNT)

Parameter name BTS Supervision Starting Time Hour

Abbreviated name nokBtsOnHour

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description Attribute indicates the hour on which the control of BTSs with notransaction starts.

MML NOTE:


starting moment for supervision of BTS

Range: 00-00 .. 23-59

Default: 08-00



Default value 8



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SMBNT

MML Full Name starting moment for supervision of BTS

DB Name bsc.nok_bts_on


8.143 starting moment for supervision of BTS (SMBNT)

Parameter name BTS Supervision Starting Time Minute

Abbreviated name nokBtsOnMinute

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description Attribute indicates the minute on which the control of BTSs with notransaction starts.

MML NOTE:


starting moment for supervision of BTS

Range: 00-00 .. 23-59

Default: 08-00



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EEO, EEN

MML Abbreviated Name SMBNT

MML Full Name starting moment for supervision of BTS

DB Name bsc.nok_bts_on


8.144 subscriber type (ST)

Parameter name Subscriber Type

Abbreviated name pieToSubscriberType

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 14

Description With this parameter you define the subscriber type that is to beattached to a certain priority level or levels.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Range and step GSM subscriber type (0), MCN subscriber type (1), Prioritysubscriber type (2)


GSM subscriber type ==> 0

MCN subscriber type ==> 1

Priority subscriber type ==> 2

Default value GSM subscriber type (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EET, EEI

MML Abbreviated Name ST

MML Full Name subscriber type

DB Name bsc.pie_to_subscr_type_tbl


8.145 supervision period length for EGPRS inactivityalarm (SPL)

Parameter name Supervision Period Length for EGPRS Inactivity Alarm

Abbreviated name supervisionPeriod

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter determines the length of the supervision period forEGPRS inactivity alarm in minutes.




13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SPL

MML Full Name supervision period length for EGPRS inactivity alarm

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.supervision_period


8.146 TCH in handover (HRI)

Parameter name TCH In Handover

Abbreviated name tchRateInternalHo

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the traffic channel allocation duringBSS internal or external handovers. The parameter controls thetarget cell selection and the TCH channel rate and speech codecdetermination in traffic channel allocation. The parameter can havethe following values:

1 ... The call serving type of TCH has to be primarily allocated.The call serving type of speech codec inside the call serving typeof TCH can change.

2 ... The call serving type of TCH and the call serving type ofspeech codec are preferred to be primarily allocated during thespeech connection. The channel rate change is possible duringdata connection, if necessary, and if the radio interface data rateallows it.

3 ... The channel rate and speech codec changes are totallydenied.

4 ... The preferred channel rate of TCH and preferred speechcodec have to be primarily allocated.

5 ... TCH has to be primarily allocated from the best BTS of thehandover candidate list.

Range and step Actual Rate (1), Data Call (2), No Rate Change (3), Preferred Rate(4), Best Candidate (5)


Actual Rate ==> 1

Data Call ==> 2

No Rate Change ==> 3

Preferred Rate ==> 4

Best Candidate ==> 5

Default value Actual Rate (1)

Default value notes MML default.


Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Half Rate (17) (optional) OR Enhanced Full Rate Codec (24)(optional) OR AMR HR (72) (optional) OR AMR FR (50)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HRI

MML Full Name TCH in handover


13/04/2007


DB Name bsc.tch_rate_int_ho


8.147 TCH transaction count (TTRC)

Parameter name TCH Transaction Count

Abbreviated name tchTransactionCount

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter defines how many incoming TCH transactions(incoming MSC controlled TCH handover or assignment) are takeninto account when calculating average TCH transaction rate.



Default value 10



Special value Averaging is not used (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters maxTchTransactionRate of BSC


Related options -


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TTRC

MML Full Name TCH transaction count

DB Name bsc.s12_bsc_prms.int_to_ext_params.transact_count


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



8.148 threshold for high TCH interference level (HIFLVL)

Parameter name Threshold For High TCH Interference Level

Abbreviated name minHiIf

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the interference level which isregarded as high in traffic channel interference supervision.

NOTE:

Value 0 is the lowest interference level.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HIFLVL

MML Full Name threshold for high TCH interference level

DB Name bsc.min_hi_if


8.149 time limit WPS (TLW)

Parameter name Time Limit WPS

Abbreviated name timeLimitWPS


13/04/2007


Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum queueing time inseconds for WPS call setup attempts.






Special value Queuing is not allowed for WPS call setups. (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TLW

MML Full Name time limit WPS

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.time_limit_wps


8.150 time limit WPS handover (TLWH)

Parameter name Time Limit WPS Handover

Abbreviated name timeLimitWPSHO

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum queuing time inseconds for WPS handover attempts.


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value 5 sec



Special value Queuing is not allowed for WPS handovers. (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TLWH

MML Full Name time limit WPS handover

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.time_limit_wps_ho


8.151 TRHO Guard Time (TGT)

Parameter name TRHO Guard Time

Abbreviated name amhTrhoGuardTime

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the guard time after a BSC-controlled or an MSC-controlled TRHO, during which a handoverback to the original cell is not allowed.



Default value 30 s



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online

Related parameters amhTrhoGuardTime of BTS


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TGT

MML Full Name TRHO Guard Time

DB Name bsc.trho_grd_time


8.152 triggering threshold for service area penalty(TTSAP)

Parameter name Triggering Threshold For Service Area Penalty

Abbreviated name incomeRateThreshold

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the triggering level for a ServiceArea penalty. If the number of incoming Inter-System Handoverswhich occur from a certain Service Area exceed the penaltytriggering level during a measurement period, the Service Area-specific penalty timer is triggered. While the Service Area penaltytimer is ticking, the BSC is not allowed to initiate an Inter-SystemHandover towards WCDMA RAN cells that belong to the ServiceArea.



Default value 127



Related functions -

Modification Online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TTSAP

MML Full Name triggering threshold for service area penalty

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.income_rate_threshold


8.153 UL priority 1 SSS (UP1)

Parameter name UL Priority 1 SSS

Abbreviated name schedStepSizeUlPrior1

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the scheduling step size (SSS) forpriority level 1 (highest) in the uplink direction.



Default value 3



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name UP1

MML Full Name UL priority 1 SSS

DB Name bsc.dl_ul_priority_sss_tbl.ul_priority_1_sss





Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the scheduling step size (SSS) forpriority level 2 in the uplink direction.



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -






DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Defines the scheduling step side (SSS) for priority level 3 in theuplink direction.



Default value 9



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -









Managed object BSC

Parameter group -


13/04/2007


Multiplicity 1

Description Defines the scheduling step side (SSS) for priority level 4 (lowest)in the uplink direction.



Default value 12



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -






8.157 upper limit for FR TCH resources (HRU)

Parameter name Upper Limit For FR TCH Resources

Abbreviated name btsLoadDepTchRateUpper

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter controls the TCH channel rate determination on theBSC level according to the cell load in traffic channel allocation.With this parameter you define the upper limit for the percentageof free full rate resources. Full rate TCHs are allocated when thenumber of free full rate resources exceeds the value of theparameter.


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value 60 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Half Rate (17) (optional) OR AMR HR (72) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HRU

MML Full Name upper limit for FR TCH resources

DB Name bsc.bts_load_dep_tch_rate.upper_limit


8.158 upper limit of MS speed class 1 (MSSCF)

Parameter name Upper Limit Of MS Speed Class 1

Abbreviated name msSpeedC11

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the upper limit of MS speed for thefirst class in MS speed measurement. One parameter step equalsthe speed of 2 km/h.



Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online


13/04/2007




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MSSCF

MML Full Name upper limit of MS speed class 1

DB Name bsc.ms_speed_c1_1


8.159 upper limit of MS speed class 2 (MSSCS)

Parameter name Upper Limit Of MS Speed Class 2

Abbreviated name msSpeedC12

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the upper limit of MS speed for thesecond class in MS speed measurement. One parameter stepequals the speed of 2 km/h.



Default value 30



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name MSSCS

MML Full Name upper limit of MS speed class 2

DB Name bsc.ms_speed_c1_2


8.160 variable DL step size (VDLS)

Parameter name Variable DL Step Size

Abbreviated name variableDlStepSize

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the variable step size isused in the power control algorithm when the downlinktransmission power is decreased.

Range and step The variable downlink step size is not used (N) (0), The variabledownlink step size is used (Y) (1)


The variable downlink step size is not used (N) ==> 0

The variable downlink step size is used (Y) ==> 1

Default value The variable downlink step size is not used (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References . GSM 04.08


MML Abbreviated Name VDLS

MML Full Name variable DL step size


13/04/2007


DB Name bsc.var_dl_step_use


8.161 WCDMA FDD NCCR enabled (WFNE)

Parameter name WCDMA FDD NCCR Enabled

Abbreviated name wcdmaFddNccrEnabled

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you switch on or off the ISNCCR to WCDMAFDD cells.

Due to MS autonomous cell reselection operation, WCMDA FDDneighbour cells are broadcast on PBCCH, even if the value of thisparameter is set to value N.

Range and step ISNCCR is disabled to WCDMA FDD cells (N) (0), ISNCCR isenabled to WCDMA FDD cells (Y) (1)


ISNCCR is disabled to WCDMA FDD cells (N) ==> 0

ISNCCR is enabled to WCDMA FDD cells (Y) ==> 1

Default value ISNCCR is disabled to WCDMA FDD cells (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name WFNE

MML Full Name WCDMA FDD NCCR enabled

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.fdd_nccr_enabled


8.162 WCDMA FDD NCCR preferred (WFNP)

Parameter name WCDMA FDD NCCR Preferred

Abbreviated name wcdmaFddNccrPreferred

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define if the coverage reason inter-systemnetwork-controlled cell re-selection is triggered as soon as anappropriate WCDMA FDD cell is available, or if it is triggered onlyin case there is not an appropriate GSM/EDGE cell available andan appropriate WCDMA FDD cell is available.

If the value of this parameter is set to value Y, Service UTRANCCO IE value sent by SGSN is ignored.

NOTE:MML Range:

Y = ISNCCR is triggered as soon as an appropriate WCDMA cellis available.

N = ISNCCR is triggered only in case there is not an appropriateGSM/EDGE cell available and an appropriate WCDMA cell isavailable.

MML default: Y



Default value true (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online






13/04/2007


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name WFNP

MML Full Name WCDMA FDD NCCR preferred

DB Name bsc.s11_5_bsc_prms.fdd_nccr_preferred


8.163 WPS preference capacity (WPEC)

Parameter name WPS Preference Capacity

Abbreviated name wpsPrefCapa

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how much of the rest of the cell'sresources (100 – WPSPriCapa) can be allocated for WPS userswithout any restriction. This parameter is also applied in DirectedRetry handover target cell evaluation together with parameterWPS priority capacity.



Default value 97 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name WPEC

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name WPS preference capacity

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.wps_pref_capa


8.164 WPS priority capacity (WPIC)

Parameter name WPS Priority Capacity

Abbreviated name wpsPriCapa

Managed object BSC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the portion of cell's total trafficcapacity to which the WPS users are given priority. This parameteris also applied in Directed Retry handover target cell evaluationtogether with the parameter WPS preference capacity.



Default value 25 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name WPIC

MML Full Name WPS priority capacity

DB Name bsc.s11_bsc_prms.wps_pri_capa



13/04/2007


9 Base Transceiver Station (BTS) radionetwork object parameters

9.1 adaptive LA algorithm (ALA)

Parameter name Adaptive LA Algorithm

Abbreviated name adaptiveLaAlgorithm

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter the operator can define if the used GPRS LinkAdaptation algorithm is adaptive or not.

NOTE: NetAct:

Parameter is optional (Coding Schemes CS-3 And CS-4) in OSS4(& CD set 1/2/3) release. Option control (Coding Schemes CS-3And CS-4) will be removed from OSS4.1 release.

Range and step 0 (Adaptive LA algorithm is enabled (Y)), 1 (Adaptive LA algorithmis disabled (N))


Adaptive LA algorithm is enabled (Y) ==> 0

Adaptive LA algorithm is disabled (N) ==> 1

Default value Adaptive LA algorithm is enabled (Y) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Base Transceiver Station (BTS) radio network object parameters

Related features . BSS11088: Coding Schemes CS-3 and CS-4

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EQV, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name ALA

MML Full Name adaptive LA algorithm

Segment Level Parameter

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.adaptive_la





Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the new administrative state of theBTS.

NOTE:

MML Range:

L (locked)

U (unlocked)



Unlocked ==> 1

Locked ==> 3




Related functions -

Modification Online




13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EQO, EQS, EEI




DB Name base_station.adm_state


9.3 AMR FR codec mode set (FRC)

Parameter name AMR FR Codec Mode Set

Abbreviated name amrConfFrCodecModeSet

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the codec mode set for a full ratechannel. If the parameter is defined as disabled, then the wholecodec mode set is disabled. If the parameter is defined asdisabled, then other AMR FR set related parameters (thresholds,hystereses, ICMI and start mode) are set as 0.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0: disabled

1: 4.75 kbit/s

2: 5.15 kbit/s

4: 5.90 kbit/s

8: 6.70 kbit/s

16: 7.40 kbit/s

32: 7.95 kbit/s

64: 10.2 kbit/s

128: 12.2 kbit/s

You can give 0 or 1-4 values at the same time by using the wildcard character &.

MML default:

12.2 7.40 5.9 4.75 kbit/s

Range and step Bit 0: 4.75 kbit/s, Bit 1: 5.15 kbit/s, Bit 2: 5.90 kbit/s, Bit 3: 6.70kbit/s, Bit 4: 7.40 kbit/s, Bit 5: 7.95 kbit/s, Bit 6: 10.2 kbit/s, Bit 7:12.2 kbit/s


Default value 149



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. RAC <-> BSC. BSC <-> RAC

References -

MML Commands EQY, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name FRC


13/04/2007


MML Full Name AMR FR codec mode set


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_conf.codec_mode_set


9.4 AMR FR hysteresis 1 (FRH1)

Parameter name AMR FR Hysteresis 1

Abbreviated name amrConfFrHysteresis1

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter, together with AMR FR threshold 1, you definethe threshold for switching from codec mode 1 (lowest bit rate) tocodec mode 2 (second lowest bit rate). Unused hysteresis is setas 0. If the AMR FR codec mode set parameter is defined asdisabled, then this parameter is set as 0. The thresholds and therelating hystereses must be in consistent order, that is, AMR FRthreshold 1 and AMR FR hysteresis 1 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR FR threshold 2 and AMR FR hysteresis 2 and AMR FRthreshold 2 and AMR FR hysteresis 2 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR FR threshold 3 and AMR FR hysteresis 3.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0 to 15 (0 to 7.5 dB)

MML default:

2 (1 dB)

Range and step 0...7.5 dB, step 0.5 dB


Default value 1 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amrConfFrHysteresis3 of BTS, amrConfFrThreshold1 of BTS,amrConfFrThreshold2 of BTS, amrConfFrThreshold3 of BTS,amrConfHrHysteresis2 of BTS


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FRH1

MML Full Name AMR FR hysteresis 1


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_conf.hysteresis_1





Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter, together with AMR FR threshold 2, you definethe threshold for switching from codec mode 2 (lowest bit rate) tocodec mode 3 (second lowest bit rate). Unused hysteresis is setas 0. If the AMR FR codec mode set parameter is defined asdisabled, then this parameter is set as 0. The thresholds andrelating hystereses must be in consistent order, that is, AMR FRthreshold 1 and AMR FR hysteresis 1 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR FR threshold 2 and AMR FR hysteresis 2 and AMR FRthreshold 2 and AMR FR hysteresis 2 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR FR threshold 3 and AMR FR hysteresis 3.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0 to 15 (0 to 7.5 dB)

MML default: 2 (1 dB)



Default value 1 dB




13/04/2007


Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amrConfFrHysteresis1 of BTS, amrConfFrHysteresis3 of BTS,amrConfFrThreshold1 of BTS, amrConfFrThreshold2 of BTS,amrConfFrThreshold3 of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -










Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter, together with the AMR FR threshold 3, youdefine the threshold for switching from codec mode 3 (lowest bitrate) to codec mode 4 (second lowest bit rate). Unused hysteresisis set as 0. If the AMR FR codec mode set parameter is definedas disabled, then this parameter is set as 0. The thresholds andrelating hystereses must be in consistent order, that is, AMR FRthreshold 1 and AMR FR hysteresis 1 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR FR threshold 2 and AMR FR hysteresis 2 and AMR FRthreshold and AMR FR hysteresis 2 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR FR threshold 3 and AMR FR hysteresis 3.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0 to 15 (0 to 7.5 dB)


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value 1 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amrConfFrHysteresis1 of BTS, amrConfFrHysteresis2 of BTS,amrConfFrThreshold1 of BTS, amrConfFrThreshold2 of BTS,amrConfFrThreshold3 of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -







9.7 AMR FR initial codec mode indicator (ICMI and FRI)

Parameter name AMR FR Initial Codec Mode Indicator

Abbreviated name amrConfFrInitCodecMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define whether the initial codec modeused by the mobile station is defined explicitly in the AMR codecmode set or whether it is implicitly derived by the mobile stationfrom the amount of codec modes in the AMR codec mode set. Ifthe AMR FR codec mode set parameter is defined as disabled,then this parameter is set as 0.

NOTE:

MML description: If the parameter is defined as 0, then the AMRFR start mode parameter is set as 00.

NOTE:

MML range:

0: Initial codec mode is defined by the implicit rule provided inGSM 05.09

1: Initial codec mode is defined by the Start Mode field.

Range and step 0 (Defined by implicit rule provided in GSM 05.09), 1 (Defined byStart Mode)


Defined by implicit rule provided in GSM 05.09 ==> 0

Defined by Start Mode ==> 1

Default value Defined by implicit rule provided in GSM 05.09 (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amrConfHrStartMode of BTS



Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name ICMI and FRI

MML Full Name AMR FR initial codec mode indicator


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_conf.init_codec_mode


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



9.8 AMR FR start mode (FRS)

Parameter name AMR FR Start Mode

Abbreviated name amrConfFrStartMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define explicitly the initial codec modeused by the mobile station.

NOTE:

MML Range:

00: Codec mode 1

01: Codec mode 2

10: Codec mode 3

11: Codec mode 4

MML default: 00

Range and step Codec Mode 1 (0), Codec Mode 2 (1), Codec Mode 3 (2), CodecMode 4 (3)


Codec Mode 1 ==> 0

Codec Mode 2 ==> 1

Codec Mode 3 ==> 2

Codec Mode 4 ==> 3

Default value Codec Mode 1 (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FRS


13/04/2007


MML Full Name AMR FR start mode


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_conf.start_mode


9.9 AMR FR threshold 1 (FRT1)

Parameter name AMR FR Threshold 1

Abbreviated name amrConfFrThreshold1

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold for switching fromcodec mode 2 (second lowest bit rate) to codec mode 1 (lowest bitrate). Unused threshold is set as 0.

MML description:

If the AMR FR codec mode set parameter is defined as disabled,then this parameter is set as 0. The thresholds must be inconsistent order, that is, AMR FR threshold 1 must be equal to orsmaller than AMR FR threshold 2 and AMR FR threshold 2 mustbe equal to or smaller than AMR FR threshold 3.

MML range:

0 to 63 (0...31.5 dB, step 0.5 dB)

MML default:

8 (4 dB)



Default value 4 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amrConfFrThreshold2 of BTS, amrConfFrThreshold3 of BTS



Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FRT1

MML Full Name AMR FR threshold 1


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_conf.threshold_1





Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold for switching fromcodec mode 3 (third lowest bit rate) to codec mode 2 (secondlowest bit rate). Unused threshold is set as 0.

MML description:


NOTE:

MML range: 0 to 63 (0...31.5 dB, step 0.5 dB)




Default value 7 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -










Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold for switching fromcodec mode 4 (third lowest bit rate) to codec mode 3 (secondlowest bit rate). Unused threshold is set as 0.

MML description:


NOTE:

MML range:

0 to 63 (0...31.5 dB, step 0.5 dB)

MML default:

22 (11dB)



Default value 11 dB

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -







9.12 AMR HR codec mode set (HRC)

Parameter name AMR HR Codec Mode Set

Abbreviated name amrConfHrCodecModeSet

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the codec mode set for a full ratechannel. If the parameter is defined as disabled, then the wholecodec mode set is disabled. If the parameter is defined asdisabled, then other AMR HR set related parameters (thresholds,hystereses, ICMI and start mode) are set as 0.

Note:

MML RANGE:

0: disabled

1: 4.75 kbit/s

2: 5.15 kbit/s

4: 5.90 kbit/s

8: 6.70 kbit/s

16: 7.40 kbit/s

MML NOTE: You can give 0 or 1-4 values at the same time byusing the wild card character &.

MML default: 7.40 5.90 4.75 kbit/s

Range and step Bit 0: 4.75 kbit/s, Bit 1: 5.15 kbit/s, Bit 2: 5.90 kbit/s, Bit 3: 6.70kbit/s, Bit 4: 7.40 kbit/s


Default value 21

Default value notes Disabled


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HRC

MML Full Name AMR HR codec mode set


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_conf.codec_mode_set


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



9.13 AMR HR hysteresis 1 (HRH1)

Parameter name AMR HR Hysteresis 1

Abbreviated name amrConfHrHysteresis1

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define together with the AMR HRthreshold 1 the threshold for switching from codec mode 1(lowestbit rate) to codec mode 2 (second lowest bit rate). Unusedhysteresis is set as 0. If the AMR HR codec mode set parameteris defined as disabled, then this parameter is set as 0. Thethresholds and relating hystereses must be in consistent order,that is, AMR HR threshold 1 and AMR HR hysteresis 1 must beequal to or smaller than AMR HR threshold 2 and AMR HRhysteresis 2 and AMR HR threshold 2 and AMR HR hysteresis 2must be equal to or smaller than AMR HR threshold 3 and AMRHR hysteresis 3.

NOTE:

MML range:

0 to 15 (0...7.5 dB, step 0.5 dB)

MML default:

2 (1 dB)



Default value 1 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amrConfHrHysteresis2 of BTS, amrConfHrHysteresis3 of BTS,amrConfHrThreshold1 of BTS, amrConfHrThreshold2 of BTS,amrConfHrThreshold3 of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HRH1


13/04/2007


MML Full Name AMR HR hysteresis 1


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_conf.hysteresis_1





Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter, together with the AMR HR threshold 2, youdefine the threshold for switching from codec mode 2 (lowest bitrate) to codec mode 3 (second lowest bit rate). Unused hysteresisis set as 0. If the AMR HR codec mode set parameter is definedas disabled, then this parameter is set as 0. The thresholds andrelating hystereses must be in consistent order, that is, AMR HRthreshold 1 and AMR HR hysteresis 1 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR HR threshold 2 and AMR HR hysteresis 2 and AMR HRthreshold 2 and AMR HR hysteresis 2 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR HR threshold 3 and AMR HR hysteresis 3.

NOTE:

MML range:

0 to 15 (0...7.5 dB, step 0.5 dB)

MML default;

2 (1 dB)



Default value 1 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -










Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter, together with the AMR HR threshold 3, youdefine the threshold for switching from codec mode 3 (lowest bitrate) to codec mode 4 (second lowest bit rate). Unused hysteresisis set as 0. If the AMR HR codec mode set parameter is definedas disabled, then this parameter is set as 0. The thresholds andrelating hystereses must be in consistent order, that is, AMR HRthreshold 1 and AMR HR hysteresis 1 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR HR threshold 2 and AMR HR hysteresis 2 and AMR HRthreshold 2 and AMR HR hysteresis 2 must be equal to or smallerthan AMR HR threshold 3 and AMR HR hysteresis 3.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0 to 15 (0 to 7.5 dB)




Default value 0 dB




13/04/2007


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -







9.16 AMR HR initial codec mode indicator (ICMI and HRI)

Parameter name AMR HR Initial Codec Mode Indicator

Abbreviated name amrConfHrInitCodecMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define whether the initial codec modeused by the mobile station is defined explicitly in the AMR codecmode set or is it implicitly derived by the mobile station from theamount of codec modes in the AMR codec mode set. If the AMRFR codec mode set parameter is defined as disabled, then thisparameter is set as 0.

NOTE:

MML description:

If the parameter is defined as 0, then the AMR HR start modeparameter is set as 00.

MML range:

0: Initial codec mode is defined by the implicit rule provided inGSM 05.09

1: Initial codec mode is defined by the Start Mode field.

Range and step 0 (Defined by implicit rule provided in GSM 05.09), 1 (Defined byStart Mode)


Defined by implicit rule provided in GSM 05.09 ==> 0

Defined by Start Mode ==> 1

Default value Defined by implicit rule provided in GSM 05.09 (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amrConfHrStartMode of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ICMI and HRI

MML Full Name AMR HR initial codec mode indicator


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_conf.init_codec_mode



13/04/2007


9.17 AMR HR start mode (HRS)

Parameter name AMR HR Start Mode

Abbreviated name amrConfHrStartMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you explicitly define the initial codec modeused by the mobile station.

NOTE:

MML description: If the AMR HR codec mode set parameter isdefined as disabled, then this parameter is set as 00. AMR HRstart mode can be set to be smaller than or equal to the amount ofcodecs in the AMR HR codec mode set. For example, the AMRHR codec mode set contains 3 codec modes and therefore theactual range of AMR HR start mode is from 1 to 3.The exceptionis that 6.70 kbit/s or 7.40 kbit/s cannot be used as the initial codecmode.

NOTE:

MML Range:

00: Codec mode 1

01: Codec mode 2

10: Codec mode 3

11: Codec mode 4

MML default: 00

Range and step Codec Mode 1 (0), Codec Mode 2 (1), Codec Mode 3 (2), CodecMode 4 (3)


Codec Mode 1 ==> 0

Codec Mode 2 ==> 1

Codec Mode 3 ==> 2

Codec Mode 4 ==> 3

Default value Codec Mode 1 (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amrConfHrCodecModeSet of BTS


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HRS

MML Full Name AMR HR start mode


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_conf.start_mode


9.18 AMR HR threshold 1 (HRT1)

Parameter name AMR HR Threshold 1

Abbreviated name amrConfHrThreshold1

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


MML description:

If the AMR HR codec mode set parameter is defined as disabled,then this parameter is set as 0. The thresholds must be inconsistent order, that is, AMR HR threshold 1 must be equal to orsmaller than AMR HR threshold 2 and AMR HR threshold 2 mustbe equal to or smaller than AMR HR threshold 3.

NOTE:

MML range:

0..63 (0..31.5 dB)

MML default: 22 (11dB)



Default value 11 dB




13/04/2007


Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amrConfHrThreshold2 of BTS, amrConfHrThreshold3 of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HRT1

MML Full Name AMR HR threshold 1


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_conf.threshold_1





Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


MML description:

If the AMR HR codec mode set parameter is defined as disabled,then this parameter is set as 0. The thresholds must beinconsistent order, that is, AMR HR threshold 1 must be equal toor smaller than AMR HR threshold 2 and AMR HR threshold 2must be equal to or smaller than AMR HR threshold 3.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0 to 63 (0...31.5 dB, step 0.5 dB)

MML default:

28 (14 dB)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value 14 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -










Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the threshold for switching fromcodec mode 2 (second lowest bit-rate) to codec mode 1 (lowestbit-rate). Unused threshold is set as 0.

MML description:

If the AMR HR codec mode set parameter is defined as disabled,then this parameter is set as 0. The thresholds must be inconsistent order, that is, AMR HR threshold 1 must be equal to orsmaller than AMR HR threshold 2 and AMR HR threshold 2 mustbe equal to or smaller than AMR HR threshold 3.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0 to 63 (0...31.5 dB, step 0.5 dB)

MML default:

0 (0 dB)



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -







DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



9.21 antenna hopping (AHOP)

Parameter name Antenna Hopping

Abbreviated name antennaHopping

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether antenna hopping is usedin the BTS or not.

MML NOTE:

Only Nokia UltraSite EDGE HW, Nokia Flexi EDGE HW, andEDGE TRXs support antenna hopping.

Range and step antenna hopping not used (N) (0), antenna hopping used (Y) (1)


antenna hopping not used (N) ==> 0

antenna hopping used (Y) ==> 1

Default value antenna hopping not used (N) (0)



Related functions -


Modified The BTS must be locked.



Related options . Antenna Hopping Usage (62) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces . Planner <-> RAC. RACApp <-> RAC. RAC <-> BSC

References -

MML Commands EQE, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name AHOP

MML Full Name antenna hopping


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.antenna_hopping



13/04/2007


9.22 background BTS hopping mode (BHOP)

Parameter name Background BTS Hopping Mode

Abbreviated name bg_hoppingMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the frequency hopping mode of theBTS used as background data.

MML description: Parameter ND value removes the old value ofthe background parameter.

NOTE:

MML range:

BB (baseband hopping is used)

RF (radio frequency hopping is used)

N (hopping is not used)

ND (not defined)

MML default: -

Range and step hopping is not used (0), baseband hopping is used (1), radiofrequency hopping is used (2)


hopping is not used ==> 0

baseband hopping is used ==> 1

radio frequency hopping is used ==> 2

Default value hopping is not used (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Commands EQE, EQO, EFO

MML Abbreviated Name BHOP

MML Full Name background BTS hopping mode


DB Name


9.23 background hopping sequence number 1 (BHSN1)

Parameter name Background Hopping Sequence Number 1

Abbreviated name bg_hoppingSequenceNumber1

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the hopping sequence number 1used as background data.

MML description: Parameter value ND removes the old value ofthe background parameter.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0 (cyclic hopping)

1...63 (random hopping)

ND (not defined)



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


13/04/2007



References . GSM reference: I-ETS 300 022-1 (GSM 04.08), I-ETS 300 030(GSM 05.02)


MML Abbreviated Name BHSN1

MML Full Name background hopping sequence number 1


DB Name


9.24 background hopping sequence number 2 (BHSN2)

Parameter name Background Hopping Sequence Number 2


Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the hopping sequence number 2used as background data.


NOTE:

MML range:

0 (cyclic hopping)


ND (not defined)



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name BHSN2

MML Full Name background hopping sequence number 2


DB Name


9.25 background MAIO offset (BMO)

Parameter name Background MAIO Offset

Abbreviated name bg_maioOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you set the lowest MAIO value per sectorused as background data.


NOTE:

MML Range:

0..62

ND (not defined (255))

MML default: -



Default value -


13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EQA, EQO, EFO

MML Abbreviated Name BMO

MML Full Name background MAIO offset


DB Name


9.26 background MAIO step (BMS)

Parameter name Background MAIO Step

Abbreviated name bg_maioStep

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you set the MAIO step used as backgrounddata.


NOTE:

MML Range:

1..62 and ND (not defined (255))

MML default: -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Flexible MAIO Management (31) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. Planner <-> RAC. RAC <-> Planner. RAC <-> BSC

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BMS

MML Full Name background MAIO step


DB Name


9.27 background mobile allocation frequency list(BMAL)

Parameter name Background Used MAL ID

Abbreviated name bg_usedMobileAllocation

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the mobile allocation frequency listused as background data.

NOTE:

MML range: 0...2000 and ND (not defined (65535))

MML default: -

Value 0 detaches the BTS from any mobile allocation frequencylist.



Default value -



Special value detaches the BTS from any mobile alloc. freq. list (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -



References


MML Abbreviated Name BMAL

MML Full Name background mobile allocation frequency list


DB Name


9.28 background underlay BTS hopping mode (BUHOP)

Parameter name Background Underlay BTS Hopping Mode

Abbreviated name bg_underlayHoppingMode

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the underlay layer's BTS hoppingmode used as background data.


NOTE:

MML range:




ND (not defined)

Range and step hopping is not used (0), baseband hopping is used (1), radiofrequency hopping is used (2)


hopping is not used ==> 0

baseband hopping is used ==> 1

radio frequency hopping is used ==> 2

Default value hopping is not used (0)

Default value notes hopping is not used


Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (IUO) With Frequency Hopping (29)(optional) AND ( Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) ORHandover Support For Intelligent Coverage Enhancement (ICE)(30) (optional) )

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name BUHOP

MML Full Name background underlay BTS hopping mode


13/04/2007



DB Name


9.29 background underlay hopping sequence number(BUHSN)

Parameter name Background Underlay Hopping Sequence Number


Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the underlay layer's hoppingsequence number used as background data. Parameter value NDremoves the old value of the background parameter.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0 (cyclic hopping)


ND (not defined)



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) AND IntelligentUnderlay Overlay (IUO) With Frequency Hopping (29) (optional)

Related features -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



References -

MML Commands EQC, EQE, EQO, EFO

MML Abbreviated Name BUHSN

MML Full Name background underlay hopping sequence number


DB Name


9.30 background underlay MAIO offset (BUMO)

Parameter name Background Underlay MAIO Offset

Abbreviated name bg_underlayMaioOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you set the underlay layer's lowest MAIOvalue per sector used as background data.


NOTE:

MML Range:0..62

ND (not defined (255))

MML default: -



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online





13/04/2007


Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name BUMO

MML Full Name background underlay MAIO offset


DB Name


9.31 background underlay MAIO step (BUMS)

Parameter name Background Underlay MAIO Step

Abbreviated name bg_underlayMaioStep

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you set the underlay MAIO step used asbackground data. Parameter value ND removes the old value ofthe background parameter.

NOTE:

MML Range:


MML default: -



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (IUO) With Frequency Hopping (29)(optional) AND Flexible MAIO Management (31) (optional) AND (Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) OR HandoverSupport For Intelligent Coverage Enhancement (ICE) (30)(optional) )

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name BUMS

MML Full Name background underlay MAIO step


DB Name


9.32 background underlay mobile allocation frequencylist (BUMAL)

Parameter name Background Underlay MAL ID

Abbreviated name bg_underlayMA

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the mobile allocation frequency listto which the BTS's underlay layer is attached and which is usedas background data.

NOTE:

MML range:

0..2000

ND = Not defined

MML NOTE: Value 0 detaches the BTS from any list.




13/04/2007


Default value -



Special value Value 0 detaches the BTS from any list (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters bg_underlayMAUsed of BTS

Parameter relationships If Underlay MA In Use = 0, cannot be edited.




References -


MML Abbreviated Name BUMAL

MML Full Name background underlay mobile allocation frequency list


DB Name


9.33 boundary 0 (BO0)

Parameter name Interference Averaging Boundary 0

Abbreviated name interferenceAveragingProcessBoundary0

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define the boundary limits of fourinterference bands for the unallocated time slots. The MMLprogram sets boundary 0 and 5 values automatically.

Range and step -110 dBm. Fixed boundary (0)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




-110 dBm. Fixed boundary ==> 0

Default value -110 dBm. Fixed boundary (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters interferenceAveragingProcessAverPeriod of BTS


Related options -

Related features -



MML Commands EQK, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name BO0

MML Full Name boundary 0


DB Name base_station.interference_averaging_proc.thresholds(0)





Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1





13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -












Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1






DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -












Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -












Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related options -

Related features -












Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


Range and step -47 dBm. Fixed boundary (63)


-47 dBm. Fixed boundary ==> 63

Default value -47 dBm. Fixed boundary (63)



Related functions -

Modification Online




13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -









9.39 BTS downlink throughput factor for CS1-CS4 (TFD)

Parameter name BTS Downlink Throughput Factor For CS1-CS4

Abbreviated name throughputFactor_cs1cs4dlcs

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate typical throughput per timeslot inthe BTS, depending on the direction and (M)CS. The parameter isused when comparing the TSL capacities between different BTSs.

Range and step 0...100 kbit/s, step 1 kbit/s


Default value 12 kbit/s



Related functions -

Modification online





DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TFD

MML Full Name BTS downlink throughput factor for CS1-CS4

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.bts_tput_factor.cs1_cs4_dl_cs


9.40 BTS downlink throughput factor for MCS1-MCS9(TFDM)

Parameter name BTS Downlink Throughput Factor For MCS1-MCS9

Abbreviated name throughputFactor_mcs1mcs9dlcs

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TFDM


13/04/2007


MML Full Name BTS downlink throughput factor for MCS1-MCS9

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.bts_tput_factor.mcs1_mcs9_dl_cs


9.41 BTS hopping mode (HOP)

Parameter name BTS Hopping Mode

Abbreviated name hoppingMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the frequency hopping mode of theBTS.

NOTE:

BTS site type Nokia 2nd generation base stations does notsupport RF hopping.

In the case of Nokia Talk-family, RF and BB hopping cannot beactive simultaneously at the same site (BCF).

Nokia InSite does not support hopping.

If Nokia PrimeSite has a BTS software package of DF6.0 ornewer, it does not support frequency hopping.

NOTE:

MML range:




Range and step Non-hopping (0), Baseband hopping (1), Radio Frequency hopping(2)


Non-hopping ==> 0

Baseband hopping ==> 1

Radio Frequency hopping ==> 2

Default value Non-hopping (0)



Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Modified When the BTS is locked.



Related options -

Related features -



MML Commands EQC, EQE, EQO, EFO, EEI

MML Abbreviated Name HOP

MML Full Name BTS hopping mode


DB Name base_station.hopping_cell


9.42 BTS identification (BTS)

Parameter name BTS ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the BTS. The identificationnumber must be unique within a BSC.

Range:

1..2000


NetAct NOTE:

For foreign BTS identification the range is a pair of LAC and CI inthe following format LLLLLC, where LLLLL is location area code (5characters, left-aligned) and C is a cell identifier. For example: 12812.


13/04/2007




Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -



References

MML Commands EQC, EQD, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name BTS

MML Full Name BTS identification




9.43 BTS load in SEG (LSEG)

Parameter name BTS Load In SEG

Abbreviated name btsLoadInSeg

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the load limit for a BTS. It isused in controlling the load distribution between BTSs in asegment.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 70 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EQM, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name LSEG

MML Full Name BTS load in SEG


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.bts_load_in_seg


9.44 BTS name (NAME)

Parameter name BTS Name

Abbreviated name nwName

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the name of the BTS.

MML Note: The BTS name (NAME) parameter must be uniquewithin a BSC.

NOTE:

MML range:

String of up to 15 characters ('A'..'Z', '0'..'9')



Default value -


13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EQC, EQE, EQO


MML Full Name BTS name


DB Name base_station.bts_name(0…14)


9.45 BTS uplink throughput factor for CS1-CS4 (TFU)

Parameter name BTS Uplink Throughput Factor For CS1-CS4

Abbreviated name throughputFactor_cs1cs4ulcs

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TFU

MML Full Name BTS uplink throughput factor for CS1-CS4

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.bts_tput_factor.cs1_cs4_ul_cs


9.46 BTS uplink throughput factor for MCS1-MCS4(TFUM1)

Parameter name BTS Uplink Throughput Factor For MCS1-MCS4

Abbreviated name throughputFactor_mcs1mcs4ulcs

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Related functions -

Modification online




13/04/2007




Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TFUM1

MML Full Name BTS uplink throughput factor for MCS1-MCS4

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.bts_tput_factor.mcs1_mcs4_ul_cs


9.47 BTS uplink throughput factor for MCS1-MCS9(TFUM)

Parameter name BTS Uplink Throughput Factor For MCS1-MCS9

Abbreviated name throughputFactor_mcs1mcs9ulcs

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name TFUM

MML Full Name BTS uplink throughput factor for MCS1-MCS9

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.bts_tput_factor.mcs1_mcs9_ul_cs


9.48 C/N threshold (CNT)

Parameter name C/N Threshold

Abbreviated name cnThreshold

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum acceptable C/N(carrier/noise) ratio when selecting a time slot to be allocated for acall or handover.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name CNT

MML Full Name C/N threshold


13/04/2007



DB Name base_station.cn_threshold


9.49 coding schemes CS3 and CS4 enabled (CS34)

Parameter name Coding Schemes CS3 And CS4 Enabled

Abbreviated name cs3Cs4Enabled

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the Coding Schemes CS3and CS4 capability is enabled in the BTS. The Coding SchemesCS3 and CS4 can be used in GPRS-enabled TRXs which areEDGE-capable. The GPRS must be enabled in the segment, BTSSW and PCU card must support the Coding Schemes CS3 andCS4 in order to use Coding Schemes CS3 and CS4 in the BTS.

With the rates of 14.4 and 20.0 kbit/s of coding schemes CS3 andCS4 a considerable gain in data rate can be achieved for GPRSMobile Stations not supporting EGPRS. Coding schemes CS3 andCS4 can be used without EGPRS feature due to fact that it ispossible to use coding schemes CS3 and CS4 both in GPRS andin EGPRS territories. However Coding Schemes CS3 and CS4can be used with EGPRS as well.

The parameter can be enabled only for Nokia MetroSite, NokiaUltraSite, and Nokia Flexi EDGE having EDGE, if the BTS SWsupports the Coding Schemes CS3 and CS4 application software,the TRXs under the BTS are using Dynamic Abis, and the PCUcard supports Coding Schemes CS3 and CS4.

Range and step Coding schemes CS3 and CS4 are disabled (N) (0), Codingschemes CS3 and CS4 are enabled (Y) (1)


Coding schemes CS3 and CS4 are disabled (N) ==> 0

Coding schemes CS3 and CS4 are enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value Coding schemes CS3 and CS4 are disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Modified It is possible to modify the parameter only when the BTS islocked.



Related options . Coding Schemes CS-3 And CS-4 (83) (optional) AND BSCGPRS Param Enabled (GPRS O&M in BSC) (39) (optional)


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CS34

MML Full Name coding schemes CS3 and CS4 enabled


DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.cs3_cs4_enabled


9.50 dedicated GPRS capacity (CDED)

Parameter name Dedicated GPRS Capacity

Abbreviated name dedicatedGPRScapacity

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the amount of PSW-onlychannels in a cell. The value of the dedicated GPRS capacityparameter must be smaller than or equal to the value of thedefault GPRS capacity parameter.



Default value 0 %



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified When the BTS is locked or the GPRS is disabled.

Related parameters defaultGPRScapacity of BTS


13/04/2007


Parameter relationships dedicatedGPRScapacity <= defaultGPRScapacity


Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. Planner -> RAC. RAC <-> Optimizer. RAC <-> BSC

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CDED

MML Full Name dedicated GPRS capacity


DB Name base_station.gprs_dedicated_capa


9.51 default GPRS capacity (CDEF)

Parameter name Default GPRS Capacity

Abbreviated name defaultGPRScapacity

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the default GPRS territory sizein a cell. The channels in the default GPRS territory are usedprimarily for packet switched traffic. However, if the circuit switchedterritory becomes congested, the BSC can allocate a trafficchannel in the default GPRS territory for circuit switched use.

The value of the default GPRS capacity parameter must be higherthan or equal to the value of the dedicated GPRScapacityparameter.



Default value 1 %



Related functions -

Modification Online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Modified When the BTS is locked or the GPRS is disabled.

Related parameters dedicatedGPRScapacity of BTS

Parameter relationships defaultGPRScapacity >= dedicatedGPRScapacity


Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name CDEF

MML Full Name default GPRS capacity


DB Name base_station.gprs_default_capa


9.52 DFCA mobile allocation frequency lists (DMAL)

Parameter name DFCA Mobile Allocation Frequency Lists

Abbreviated name dfcaMaLists

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 32

Description With this parameter you define the DFCA mobile allocationfrequency lists that will be attached to the BTS.

NOTE:

MML modification: Online, if DFCA mode is "off" or "standby".

If the DFCA mode of the BTS is "DFCA hopping", modificationrequires BTS locking.



Default value -




13/04/2007


Related functions -


Modified For an unlocked BTS with DFCA mode as OFF or STANDBY themodification of 'DFCA MA list ids' can be made freely. For anunlocked BTS with DFCA mode as DFCA hopping the modificationof 'DFCA MA list ids' requires that all the DFCA TRXs of the BTSare locked. Modification of 'DFCA MA list ids' is also allowed withBTS locking.




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EQA, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name DMAL

MML Full Name DFCA mobile allocation frequency lists


DB Name *) relation


9.53 DFCA mode (DMOD)

Parameter name DFCA Mode

Abbreviated name dfcaMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the operational mode of a DFCABTS.

Range and step Off (0), Standby (1), DFCA hopping (2)


Off ==> 0

Standby ==> 1

DFCA hopping ==> 2

Default value Off (0)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related functions -


Modified Change between modes OFF and STANDBY can be made online.Mode changes to or from mode "DFCA hopping" require BTSlocking. It is not possible to change from mode OFF to mode”DFCA hopping”.




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EQM, EQO, EFL

MML Abbreviated Name DMOD

MML Full Name DFCA mode


DB Name base_station.s11_prms. dfca_mode


9.54 DFCA unsynchronized mode MA frequency list(DUMAL)

Parameter name DFCA Unsynchronized Mode MA Frequency List

Abbreviated name dfcaUnsyncModeMaList

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the DFCA unsynchronized modeMA list. The MA list is to be used in the DFCA TRXs if a BTS in"DFCA hopping" mode loses synchronisation.

NOTE:

MML range:

0...2000

Value 0 detaches the BTS.



Default value 0

Default value notes 0 = Not defined



Related functions -


Modified Online, if DFCA mode is OFF or STANDBY. If the DFCA mode ofthe BTS is "DFCA hopping", modification requires BTS objectlocking.





Interfaces -

References


MML Abbreviated Name DUMAL

MML Full Name DFCA unsynchronized mode MA frequency list


DB Name *) relation


9.55 DL coding scheme in acknowledged mode (DCSA)

Parameter name DL Coding Scheme In Acknowledged Mode

Abbreviated name csAckDl

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you can define the initial Coding Scheme ofthe territory in acknowledge mode in downlink direction. Theparameter values 2, 3, 6, and 7 are valid only for Nokia MetroSite,Nokia UltraSite, and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE:

NetAct: Parameter is optional (Coding Schemes CS-3 And CS-4)in OSS4 (& CD set 1/2/3) release. Option control (CodingSchemes CS-3 And CS-4) will be removed from OSS4.1 release.

MML: Parameter is optional (GPRS Param Enabled (GPRS O&Min BSC)) and values 2, 3, 6, and 7 are optional (Coding SchemesCS-3 And CS-4)

Range and step CS1 (0), CS2 (1), CS3 (2), CS4 (3), LA with initial CS1 (4), LAwith initial CS2 (5), LA with initial CS3 (6), LA with initial CS4 (7)


Default value CS2 (1)



Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DCSA

MML Full Name DL coding scheme in acknowledged mode

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.initial_cs_prms.cs_ack_dl



13/04/2007


9.56 DL coding scheme in unacknowledged mode(DCSU)

Parameter name DL Coding Scheme In Unacknowledged Mode

Abbreviated name csUnackDl

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you can define the initial Coding Scheme ofthe territory in unacknowledged mode in downlink direction. Theparameter values 2, 3, 6, and 7 are valid only for Nokia MetroSite,Nokia UltraSite, and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE:


MML: Parameter is optional (GPRS Param Enabled (GPRS O&Min BSC)) and values 2, 3, 6, and 7 are optional (Coding SchemesCS-3 And CS-4).






Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DCSU

MML Full Name DL coding scheme in unacknowledged mode

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.initial_cs_prms.cs_unack_dl


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



9.57 DL noise level (DLN)

Parameter name DL Noise Level

Abbreviated name dlNoiseLevel

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a BTS-specific downlink noiselevel. In the BTS the margin between the noise level and thedownlink signal level of a connection must be at least theconnection type-specific C/N soft blocking limit.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DLN

MML Full Name DL noise level


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.dl_noise_level



13/04/2007


9.58 EGPRS enabled (EGENA)

Parameter name EGPRS Enabled

Abbreviated name egprsEnabled

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Attribute enables or disables EGPRS on BTS-level. All GPRS-enabled TRXs of the BTS have to be EDGE-capable.The GPRSmust be enabled in the segment in order to enable EGPRS in theBTS.

Range and step EGPRS is disabled (N) (0), EGPRS is enabled (Y) (1)


EGPRS is disabled (N) ==> 0

EGPRS is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value EGPRS is disabled (N) (0)

Default value notes disables EGPRS


Related functions -





Related options . BSC GPRS Param Enabled (GPRS O&M in BSC) (39) (optional)AND Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS) Usage (51) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name EGENA

MML Full Name EGPRS enabled


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.egprs_enabled


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



9.59 EGPRS inactivity alarm end time (EAE)

Parameter name EGPRS Inactivity Alarm End Time Hour

Abbreviated name inactEndTimeHour

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter determines the time of day when the EGPRSinactivity alarm is disabled.

Range and step 0...23 h, step 1 h


Default value 18 h



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters inactEndTimeMinute of BTS




Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EQV,EQO

MML Abbreviated Name EAE

MML Full Name EGPRS inactivity alarm end time


DB Name base_station.s12_prms.inact_end_time.hours


9.60 EGPRS inactivity alarm end time (EAE)

Parameter name EGPRS Inactivity Alarm End Time Minute

Abbreviated name inactEndTimeMinute


13/04/2007


Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter determines the time of day when the EGPRSinactivity alarm is disabled.



Default value 0 min



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EAE

MML Full Name EGPRS inactivity alarm end time


DB Name base_station.s12_prms.inact_end_time.minutes


9.61 EGPRS inactivity alarm start time (EAS)

Parameter name EGPRS Inactivity Alarm Start Time Hour

Abbreviated name inactStartTimeHour

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter determines the time of day when the EGPRSinactivity alarm is enabled.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Range and step 0...23 h, step 1 h


Default value 8 h



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters inactStartTimeMinute of BTS




Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EAS

MML Full Name EGPRS inactivity alarm start time


DB Name base_station.s12_prms.inact_start_time.hours


9.62 EGPRS inactivity alarm start time (EAS)

Parameter name EGPRS Inactivity Alarm Start Time Minute

Abbreviated name inactStartTimeMinute

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter determines the time of day when the EGPRSinactivity alarm is enabled.



Default value 0 min



13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EAS

MML Full Name EGPRS inactivity alarm start time


DB Name base_station.s12_prms.inact_start_time.minutes


9.63 EGPRS inactivity alarm weekdays (EAW)

Parameter name EGPRS Inactivity Alarm Weekdays

Abbreviated name inactWeekDays

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description This parameter determines the day of week when the EGPRSinactivity alarm is enabled.

Note:

MML range:

NONE ... DISABLED

SUN ... SUNDAY

MON ... MONDAY

TUE ... TUESDAY

WED ... WEDNESDAY

THU ... THURSDAY

FRI ... FRIDAY

SAT ... SATURDAY

MTF ... MONDAY - FRIDAY

ALL ... ALL WEEKDAYS

Range and step Bit 0: Sunday, Bit 1: Saturday, Bit 2: Friday, Bit 3: Thursday, Bit 4:Wednesday, Bit 5: Tuesday, Bit 6: Monday


Default value 0

Default value notes NONE


Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EAW

MML Full Name EGPRS inactivity alarm weekdays


DB Name base_station.s12_prms.inact_weekdays



13/04/2007


9.64 forced AMR HR mode C/I threshold (FAHT)

Parameter name Forced AMR HR Mode C/I Threshold

Abbreviated name forcedAmrHrCiThreshold

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description If the BTS level average C/I is below the threshold defined by thisparameter, then HR will be preferred for all the DFCA speechchannel assignments of AMR requests.



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified All BTS objects on one frequency band in a segment must havethe same value for this parameter. This is left to operator to takecare of and must be emphasized in documentation.





Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EQO, EQM

MML Abbreviated Name FAHT

MML Full Name forced AMR HR mode C/I threshold


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.forced_hr_mode_params.amr_c_i_threshold


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



9.65 forced HR mode C/I averaging period (FHR)

Parameter name Forced HR Mode C/I Averaging Period

Abbreviated name forcedHrCiAverPeriod

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the period for calculating anaverage C/I of the 1-way DL C/I estimates used in DFCA channelassignments. This band specific average value is used in decidingbetween full rate and half rate in DFCA channel assignment.






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND ( Half Rate (17) (optional) OR AMR HR (72)(optional) )


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FHR

MML Full Name forced HR mode C/I averaging period


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.forced_hr_mode_params.c_i_aver_period



13/04/2007


9.66 forced HR mode C/I threshold (FHT)

Parameter name Forced HR Mode C/I Threshold

Abbreviated name forcedHrCiThreshold

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description If the BTS level average C/I is below the threshold defined by thisparameter, then HR will be preferred for all the DFCA speechchannel assignments of non-AMR requests.



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related options . Half Rate (17) (optional) AND DFCA (Dynamic Frequency AndChannel Allocation) Usage (70) (optional)


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FHT

MML Full Name forced HR mode C/I threshold


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.forced_hr_mode_params.c_i_threshold


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



9.67 forced HR mode hysteresis (FHH)

Parameter name Forced HR Mode Hysteresis

Abbreviated name forcedHrModeHysteresis

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how many decibels the BTS levelC/I average must be above the corresponding forced HR mode C/Ithreshold in order for the forced HR mode to be switched off.



Default value 3 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) AND ( Half Rate (17) (optional) OR AMR HR (72)(optional) )


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FHH

MML Full Name forced HR mode hysteresis


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.forced_hr_mode_params.hysteresis



13/04/2007


9.68 frequency band in use (BAND)

Parameter name Frequency Band In Use


Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the frequency band used in theBTS. The frequency bands are GSM 800 (800), GSM 900 (900),GSM 1800 (1800) and GSM 1900 (1900).

Range and step GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)


GSM 900 ==> 0

GSM 1800 ==> 1

GSM 1900 ==> 2

GSM 800 ==> 5

Default value GSM 900 (0)



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EQC, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name BAND

MML Full Name frequency band in use


DB Name base_station.freq_band


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



9.69 GPRS non BCCH layer rxlev lower limit (GPL)

Parameter name GPRS Non BCCH Layer Rxlev Lower Limit

Abbreviated name gprsNonBCCHRxlevLower

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold when a reallocationto a better BTS must be made. BTS with the direct GPRS accessBTS option on is selected. If there are no BTSs with direct GPRSaccess BTS set to on.






Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters gprsNonBCCHRxlevUpper of BTS

Parameter relationships The value of this parameter must be lower than or equal to thevalue of the parameter gprsNonBCCHRxlevUpper.


Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EQG, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name GPL

MML Full Name GPRS non BCCH layer rxlev lower limit


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_nonbcch_rxlev_low


9.70 GPRS non BCCH layer rxlev upper limit (GPU)

Parameter name GPRS Non BCCH Layer Rxlev Upper Limit


13/04/2007


Abbreviated name gprsNonBCCHRxlevUpper

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum power level the MShas to receive to allocate resources from the BTS.






Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters gprsNonBCCHRxlevLower of BTS

Parameter relationships The value of this parameter must be higher than or equal to thevalue of the parameter gprsNonBCCHRxlevLower.


Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GPU

MML Full Name GPRS non BCCH layer rxlev upper limit


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_nonbcch_rxlev_up


9.71 hopping sequence number 1 (HSN1)

Parameter name Hopping Sequence Number 1

Abbreviated name hoppingSequenceNumber1

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define whether cyclic or random hoppingis used in BB hopping group 1 and in RF hopping. Hoppingsequence number 1 is used in the frequency hopping sequencegeneration algorithm and it is located in the Frequency HoppingSystem 1 (time slots 0 except BCCH time slot).

NOTE:

Range:

0 (cyclic hopping)




Default value 0



Related functions -



Related parameters bg_hoppingSequenceNumber1 of BTS, hoppingMode of BTS


Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HSN1

MML Full Name hopping sequence number 1


DB Name *) hsn1



13/04/2007


9.72 hopping sequence number 2 (HSN2)

Parameter name Hopping Sequence Number 2


Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether cyclic or random hoppingis used in BB hopping group 2. Hopping sequence number 2 isused in the frequency hopping sequence generation algorithm andit is located in the Frequency Hopping System 2 (time slots 1-7).

Note:

Range:

0 (cyclic hopping)




Default value 0



Related functions -





Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. Planner -> RAC. RAC <-> Optimizer. RAC <-> BSC



MML Abbreviated Name HSN2

MML Full Name hopping sequence number 2


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name *) hsn2


9.73 MAIO offset (MO)

Parameter name MAIO Offset

Abbreviated name maioOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you set the MAIO offset that is the lowestMAIO in the cell. With MAIO offset it is possible to use the sameMA frequency list for two or more sectors of the site withoutcollisions.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified If the BTS is RF hopping, the BTS or overlay TRXs must belocked.



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name MO

MML Full Name MAIO offset



13/04/2007


DB Name base_station.maio_offset


9.74 MAIO Step (MS)

Parameter name MAIO Step

Abbreviated name maioStep

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you choose the MAIOs not to be allocatedsuccessively for the cell, but for instance every second or everythird value.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified If the BTS is RF hopping, the BTS or overlay TRXs must belocked.



Related options . Flexible MAIO Management (31) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name MS

MML Full Name MAIO Step


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name base_station.maio_step


9.75 max GPRS capacity (CMAX)

Parameter name Max GPRS Capacity

Abbreviated name maxGPRSCapacity

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Attribute defines the maximum number of PSW (packet switched)channels in a BTS.



Default value 100 %



Related functions -


Modified When the BTS is locked or GPRS disabled.




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CMAX

MML Full Name max GPRS capacity


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_maximum_capa



13/04/2007


9.76 mobile allocation frequency list (MAL)

Parameter name Used MAL ID

Abbreviated name usedMobileAllocation

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the mobile allocation frequency listto which the BTS will be attached. The parameter is relevant whenRF hopping is used.

MML NOTE: See Mobile Allocation Frequency List (MA).

NOTE:

MML range:

0...2000

MML default: -




Default value 0



Special value No MA list attached (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified If the BTS is RF hopping, the BTS must be locked.

Related parameters hoppingMode of BTS, usedMobileAllocIdUsed of BTS

Parameter relationships Valid if btsIsHopping = 2 (RF Hopping)

Related options -

Related features BSS20118: High Capacity BSC3i O&M


References


MML Abbreviated Name MAL

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name mobile allocation frequency list


DB Name *) relation


9.77 MS tx pwr min (PMIN)

Parameter name MS Tx Pwr Min

Abbreviated name minMsTxPower

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum power level an MSmay use in the serving cell.

NOTE:

MML value range:

GSM 800 and GSM 900: 5..39 dBm (step size 2)



GSM 800/900 default 5

GSM 1800/1900 default 0

NOTE:


GSM 1800:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

34 dBm: 30

36 dBm: 29

GSM 1900:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

33 dBm: 30



Default value 5 dBm


13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters msTxPwrMaxGSM of BTS

msTxPwrMaxGSM1x00 of BTS

Parameter relationships Parameter value must be lower than or equal to txpwr max value.

Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name PMIN

MML Full Name MS tx pwr min


DB Name base_station.min_ms_tx_power


9.78 non BCCH layer offset (NBL)

Parameter name Non BCCH Layer Offset

Abbreviated name nonBCCHLayerOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the predefined offsetmargin is used when evaluating the signal level of the non BCCHlayer.

Range and step -40...40, step 1


Default value 0


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Segment Usage (45) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. RAC <-> Optimizer. Optimizer <-> RAC. Planner <-> RAC

References -


MML Abbreviated Name NBL

MML Full Name non BCCH layer offset


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.non_bcch_layer_offset


9.79 PCU identifier (PCU ID)

Parameter name PCU Identifier

Abbreviated name pcuIdentifier

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter identifies the PCU object in the BSC.



Default value -



Related functions -



13/04/2007




Related options . Gb Over IP (82) (optional)

Related features . BSS20106: Packet Control Pool / DX-part


References -

MML Commands FXI

MML Abbreviated Name PCU ID

MML Full Name PCU identifier


DB Name


9.80 radius extension (EXT)

Parameter name Radius Extension

Abbreviated name radiusExtension

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the radius extension of anextended cell.

NOTE: MML Range:

Nokia 2nd generation: 0..67 (km);

Nokia Talk-family, Nokia UltraSite: 0..35 (km);

Nokia PrimeSite, Nokia MetroSite and Nokia InSite do not supportthe Extended Range Cell feature.

MML related features:

Improved solution for Extended cell radius for 2nd Generation andTalk-Family. Extended Cell for UltraSite licence for UltraSite

Range and step 0...67 km, step 1 km


Default value 0 km



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -





Related options . Extended Cell Radius (10) (optional) OR Extended Cell For US(88) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name EXT

MML Full Name radius extension


DB Name base_station.ext_cell_radius


9.81 RX diversity (RDIV)

Parameter name RX diversity

Abbreviated name diversityUsed

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether RX diversity is used in theBTS.

NOTE:

Parameter only allowed for Nokia MetroSite, Nokia UltraSite, andNokia Flexi EDGE BTSs. 4-way diversity is available for the NokiaUltraSite and Nokia Flexi EDGE site types only.

Range and step 0 (RX diversity is not used (N)), 1 (RX diversity is used (Y))


13/04/2007



RX diversity is not used (N) ==> 0

RX diversity is used (Y) ==> 1

Default value RX diversity is not used (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name RDIV

MML Full Name RX diversity


DB Name base_station.antenna_div_used


9.82 STIRC enabled (STIRC)

Parameter name STIRC Enabled

Abbreviated name stircEnabled

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you can define whether the STIRC feature isused in the BTS.

Parameter is visible only for Nokia UltraSite, Nokia MetroSite andNokia Flexi EDGE Site types.

HW requirements for the STIRC:

All TRXs in the BTS object must be EDGE HW capable in case ofNokia MetroSite and Nokia UltraSite. All TRXs in the BTS objectmust have EDGE baseband unit (BB2E/BB2F).

Range and step 0 (STIRC is enabled (N)), 1 (STIRC is disabled (Y))

Formula for getting internal value STIRC is enabled (N) => 0

STIRC is disabled (Y) => 1

Default value STIRC is enabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . ST-IRC licence (99) (optional)

Related features . BSS20494: ST-IRC Licensing feature. BSS20063: ST-IRC feature

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name STIRC

MML Full Name STIRC ENABLED


DB Name base_station.s12_prms.stirc_enabled


9.83 transport type (TRAT)

Parameter name Transport Type

Abbreviated name transportType

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -


13/04/2007


Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you can manually select the transport type ofthe NSEI which the BTS/SEG will use. This parameter is used inthe PCU selection algorithm.

Range and step FR (0), IP (1), ANY (255)


FR ==> 0

IP ==> 1

ANY ==> 255

Default value FR (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online


Parameter relationships If TRAT is given then gena=y must be given.


Related features . BSS11110: Gb Over IP (IPV4 & IPV6) / DX PART

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EQC, EQV, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name TRAT

MML Full Name transport type




9.84 UL coding scheme in acknowledged mode (UCSA)

Parameter name UL Coding Scheme In Acknowledged Mode

Abbreviated name csAckUl

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you can define the initial Coding Scheme ofthe territory in acknowledge mode in uplink direction. Theparameter values 2, 3, 6, and 7 are valid only for Nokia MetroSite,Nokia UltraSite, and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE:








Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UCSA

MML Full Name UL coding scheme in acknowledged mode

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.initial_cs_prms.cs_ack_ul


9.85 UL coding scheme in unacknowledged mode(UCSU)

Parameter name UL Coding Scheme In Unacknowledged Mode

Abbreviated name csUnackUl

Managed object BTS


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you can define the initial Coding Scheme ofthe territory in unacknowledged mode in uplink direction. Theparameter values 2, 3, 6, and 7 are valid only for Nokia MetroSite,Nokia UltraSite, and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

NOTE:








Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UCSU

MML Full Name UL coding scheme in unacknowledged mode

DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.initial_cs_prms.cs_unack_ul


9.86 UL noise level (ULN)

Parameter name UL Noise Level

Abbreviated name ulNoiseLevel

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a BTS-specific uplink noise level.In the BTS the margin between the noise level and the uplinksignal level of a connection must be at least the connection type-specific C/N soft blocking limit.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ULN

MML Full Name UL noise level


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.ul_noise_level


9.87 underlay BTS hopping mode (UHOP)

Parameter name Underlay BTS Hopping Mode

Abbreviated name underlayHoppingMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the frequency hopping mode of theunderlay layer.

NOTE: MML Range: Default: N

0 (N (hopping is not used)),

1 (BB (baseband hopping is used)),

2 (RF (radio frequency hopping is used))

Range and step Not Used (0), Baseband (1), RF Hopping (2)


Not Used ==> 0

Baseband ==> 1

RF Hopping ==> 2




Related functions -






Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name UHOP

MML Full Name underlay BTS hopping mode


DB Name base_station.underl_hop_mode


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



9.88 underlay hopping sequence number (UHSN)

Parameter name Underlay Hopping Sequence Number


Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether cyclic or random hoppingis used in the underlay layer of the IUO cell. Hopping sequencenumbers are used in the frequency hopping sequence generationalgorithm.

NOTE:

RANGE:

0 (cyclic hopping)




Default value 0



Related functions -





Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) AND IntelligentUnderlay Overlay (IUO) With Frequency Hopping (29) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name UHSN

MML Full Name underlay hopping sequence number



13/04/2007


DB Name *) hsn3


9.89 underlay MAIO offset (UMO)

Parameter name Underlay MAIO Offset

Abbreviated name underlayMaioOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you set the lowest MAIO value of the underlaylayer per sector.

NOTE:

MML modification:

If the BTS is RF hopping, the BTS or underlay TRXs must belocked.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name UMO

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name underlay MAIO offset


DB Name base_station.underl_maio_offset


9.90 underlay MAIO step (UMS)

Parameter name Underlay MAIO Step

Abbreviated name underlayMaioStep

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you choose the MAIOs of the underlay layernot to be allocated successively for the cell, but for example everysecond or every third value.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified If the BTS is RF hopping, the BTS or the underlay TRXs must belocked.



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (IUO) With Frequency Hopping (29)(optional) AND Flexible MAIO Management (31) (optional) AND (Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) OR HandoverSupport For Intelligent Coverage Enhancement (ICE) (30)(optional) )

Related features -


References -



13/04/2007


MML Abbreviated Name UMS

MML Full Name underlay MAIO step


DB Name base_station.underl_maio_step


9.91 underlay mobile allocation frequency list (UMAL)

Parameter name Underlay MAL ID

Abbreviated name underlayMaAllocationId

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the mobile allocation frequency listto which the BTS's underlay layer will be attached.

NOTE:

MML Range: 0...2000

MML Default: -




Default value 0




Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified If the BTS is RF hopping, the BTS must be locked.




Related features BSS20118: High Capacity BSC3i O&M

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




References

MML Commands EQA, EQO, EFO, EBI, ERO

MML Abbreviated Name UMAL

MML Full Name underlay mobile allocation frequency list


DB Name *) relation



13/04/2007


10 SEG-specific Base Transceiver Station(BTS) radio network object parameters

10.1 adjacency on other band (DBC)

Parameter name Adjacency On Other Band

Abbreviated name multiBandCell

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether adjacent cells with aBCCH allocated from a different frequency band than the servingcell BCCH are taken into account in handovers and in idle modecell selection or reselection.

NOTE:

MML Range:

Y (adjacent cells on other band are taken into account inhandovers and in idle mode cell selection/re-selection)

N (adjacent cells on other band are not taken into account inhandovers and in idle mode cell selection/re-selection)

Default: Y



Default value true (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters frequencyBandInUse of BAL

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


SEG-specific Base Transceiver Station (BTS) radio network objectparameters

Parameter relationships If the frequency band in use is GSM or DCS1800, the default isyes. If it is PCS1900, default is no.

Related options . Dual Band GSM/DCS (16) (optional)

Related features -


References -

MML Commands EQF, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name DBC

MML Full Name adjacency on other band

Segment Level Parameter true

DB Name base_station.dual_band_cell


10.2 allow IMSI attach detach (ATT)

Parameter name Allow IMSI Attach Detach

Abbreviated name allowIMSIAttachDetach

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether IMSI attach/detach is usedin the cell.

Range and step IMSI attach/detach is not used (N) (0), IMSI attach/detach is used(Y) (1)


IMSI attach/detach is not used (N) ==> 0

IMSI attach/detach is used (Y) ==> 1

Default value IMSI attach/detach is used (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -


References . I-ETS 300 022-1 (GSM 04.08)

MML Commands EQJ, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name ATT

MML Full Name allow IMSI attach detach


DB Name base_station.config_cch.allow_imsi_attach_detach


10.3 AMH lower load threshold (ALT)

Parameter name AMH Lower Load Threshold

Abbreviated name amhLowerLoadThreshold

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the lower threshold for the load ofthe base station. The parameter is used to trigger advancedmultilayer handling functionality with IUO and/or Dual Band/microcell features.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0...100 % and N

MML default: N



Default value -1 %



Special value Undefined (-1)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amhLowerLoadThreshold of BSC

Parameter relationships Use value N (not in use) if you want to use the correspondingBSC-level value. In this case the parameter of the current cell isBSC-specific.


Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ALT

MML Full Name AMH lower load threshold


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.amh_low_load_thr


10.4 AMH max load of target cell (AML)

Parameter name AMH Max Load Of Target Cell

Abbreviated name amhMaxLoadOfTgtCell

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this advanced multilayer handling parameter you define themaximum traffic load in the adjacent cell that is allowed to be thetarget cell for a traffic reason handover (TRHO).

MML NOTE:

MML Range: 0...100 % and N

MML default: N



Default value -1 %




13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amhMaxLoadOfTgtCell of BSC



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AML

MML Full Name AMH max load of target cell


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.amh_max_load_tgtc


10.5 AMH upper load threshold (AUT)

Parameter name AMH Upper Load Threshold

Abbreviated name amhUpperLoadThreshold

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this advanced multilayer handling parameter you define theupper threshold for the load of the base station. The parameter isused to trigger BSC-controlled traffic reason handovers.

NOTE:

MML Range:

0...100 and N (0xFF)

MML default: N



Default value -1 %

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amhUpperLoadThreshold of BSC



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AUT

MML Full Name AMH upper load threshold


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.amh_upp_load_thr


10.6 AMR Radio Link Timeout (ARLT)

Parameter name AMR Radio Link Timeout

Abbreviated name radioLinkTimeoutAmr

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum value of the radiolink counter expressed in SACCH blocks for AMR connections.

Range and step 4...64 blocks with 4-block steps


Default value 20 blocks



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online



Related options . AMR HR (72) (optional) OR AMR FR (50) (optional)

Related features . BSS20048: Separate radio link timeout parameters for AMR andEFR

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ARLT

MML Full Name AMR Radio Link Timeout


DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.amr_radiolink_time_out


10.7 averaging period (AP)

Parameter name Averaging Period

Abbreviated name interferenceAveragingProcessAverPeriod

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of SACCH multiframesover which the averaging of the interference level in theunallocated time slots is performed.



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name AP

MML Full Name averaging period


DB Name base_station.interference_averaging_proc.averaging_period


10.8 background BTS colour code (BBCC)

Parameter name Background BSIC BCC

Abbreviated name bg_bsIdentityCodeBCC

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of the BTS colour codeused as background data.

NOTE:

MML description:

In background data activation (EE command group), backgrounddata is swapped with active data. Parameter value ND removesthe old value of the background parameter.

NOTE:

MML Range:


MML default: -



Default value -




13/04/2007


Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters tsc of TRX, bg_bsIdentityCodeNCC of BTS

Parameter relationships TRX TSC = BTS BSIC BCC

bsIdentityCode (BSIC) is a structure type parameter in the q3interface and is formed from NCC (0...7) and BCC (0...7)

Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name BBCC

MML Full Name background BTS colour code


DB Name base_station.bg_bsic.bcc


10.9 background network colour code (BNCC)

Parameter name Background BSIC NCC

Abbreviated name bg_bsIdentityCodeNCC

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the number of the network colourcode used as background data.

NOTE:

MML description:

In background data activation (EE command group), backgrounddata is swapped with active data. Parameter value ND removesthe old value of the background parameter.

NOTE:

MML range:


MML default: -



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters bg_bsIdentityCodeBCC of BTS

Parameter relationships bsIdentityCode (BSIC) is a structure type parameter in the q3interface and is formed from NCC (0...7) and BCC (0...7)

Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name BNCC

MML Full Name background network colour code


DB Name base_station.bg_bsic.ncc



13/04/2007


10.10 BCCH allocation usage for active MS (ACT)

Parameter name BCCH Allocation Usage For Active MS

Abbreviated name measurementBCCHAllocation

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the BCCH frequency list used byactive MS's. This list is used for handovers and is sent on theSACCH.

NOTE:

MML Range:

ADJ (BCCH frequency list is taken from the adjacent cells definedfor the BTS)

IDLE (active MSs use the same BCCH frequency list as idle MSs.The same BCCH frequency list is defined by BTS parameterIDLE).

NOTE:

MML values are contrary to those in NetAct (0<-> 1).

Range and step Idle State BCCH List (0), Adjacent Cells BCCHs (1)


Idle State BCCH List ==> 0

Adjacent Cells BCCHs ==> 1

Default value Adjacent Cells BCCHs (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Double BCCH Allocation List (0) (optional) OR DFCA (DynamicFrequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70) (optional)

Related features -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Commands EQB, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name ACT

MML Full Name BCCH allocation usage for active MS


DB Name base_station.idle_list_used




Abbreviated name bsIdentityCodeBCC

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the BTS colour code number.



Default value -



Related functions -



Related parameters tsc of TRX, bsIdentityCodeNCC of BTS, adjCellBsicBcc of ADCE

Parameter relationships BCCH TRX TSC = BTS BSIC BCC

bsIdentityCode (BSIC) is a structure type parameter in the q3interface and is formed from NCC (0...7) and BCC (0...7).

If you modify this parameter, the BCC parameter in adjacent cellsis automatically modified.

Related options -

Related features -



13/04/2007







DB Name base_station.bs_identity_code.bcc


10.12 BTS load threshold (BLT)

Parameter name BTS Load Threshold

Abbreviated name btsLoadThreshold

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define which proportion of reserved orunavailable channels in all channels is acceptable. BTS loadthreshold is one of the parameters used for the handover controlprocess. If the threshold is exceeded, the BTS is considered to beoverloaded, and handovers to that BTS will be avoided.



Default value 70 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



References -


MML Abbreviated Name BLT

MML Full Name BTS load threshold


DB Name base_station.bts_load_threshold


10.13 BTS measure average (BMA)

Parameter name BTS Measure Average

Abbreviated name btsMeasAver

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how many SACCH multiframes areused in measurement averaging in the BTS. The BTS calculatesaverages of the measurements performed by the BTS and the MS.The BTS is able to calculate the average on 2, 3, or 4 SACCHmultiframes. Value 1 denies averaging.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name BMA

MML Full Name BTS measure average


DB Name base_station.bts_measure_aver


10.14 C31 hysteresis (CHYS)

Parameter name C31 Hysteresis

Abbreviated name c31Hysteresis

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the GPRS cell reselectioncriterion.

NOTE:

MML Range:

Y (GPRS cell reselect hysteresis (GCR) shall be applied to theC31 GPRScell reselection criterion)

N (GPRS cell reselect hysteresis (GCR) shall not be applied to theC31GPRS cell reselection criterion)

Default: N






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name CHYS

MML Full Name C31 hysteresis


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gen_cell_select.c31_hyst


10.15 C32 qual (QUAL)

Parameter name C32 Qual

Abbreviated name c32Qual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate an exception to the rule forGPRS cell reselect offset.

NOTE: MML Range:

Y (GPRS cell reselect offset values shall only be applied to theneighbourcell with the highest received level average value)

N (GPRS cell reselect offset values shall not be applied to theneighbourcell with the highest received level average value)

Default: N






Related functions -

Modification Online





13/04/2007


Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name QUAL

MML Full Name C32 qual


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gen_cell_select.c32_qual


10.16 calculation of minimum number of slots (CALC)

Parameter name Calculation Of Minimum Number Of Slots

Abbreviated name calcMinNumberSlots

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you calculate the minimum number of slotsbetween two successive Packet Channel Request messages.

Range and step 12 (0), 15 (1), 20 (2), 30 (3), 41 (4), 55 (5), 76 (6), 109 (7), 163(8), 217 (9)


12 ==> 0

15 ==> 1

20 ==> 2

30 ==> 3

41 ==> 4

55 ==> 5

76 ==> 6

109 ==> 7

163 ==> 8

217 ==> 9

Default value 30 (3)



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name CALC

MML Full Name calculation of minimum number of slots


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.pbcch_s


10.17 call reestablishment allowed (RE)

Parameter name Call Reestablishment Allowed

Abbreviated name callReestablishmentAllowed

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether call re-establishment isallowed in the cell.

Range and step re-establishment is not allowed (N) (0), re-establishment is allowed(Y) (1)


re-establishment is not allowed (N) ==> 0

re-establishment is allowed (Y) ==> 1

Default value re-establishment is not allowed (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -


References . GSM reference: I-ETS 300 022-1 (GSM 04.08) 10.5.2.17


MML Abbreviated Name RE

MML Full Name call reestablishment allowed


DB Name base_station.call_reestablishment_allowed


10.18 cell bar qualify (QUA)

Parameter name Cell Bar Qualify

Abbreviated name cellBarQualify

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether cell barring can beoverridden.

Range and step Cell barring cannot be overridden (N) (0), Cell barring can beoverridden (Y) (1)


Cell barring cannot be overridden (N) ==> 0

Cell barring can be overridden (Y) ==> 1

Default value Cell barring cannot be overridden (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related options . C2 Cell Reselection (3) (optional)

Related features -


References . GSM reference: ETS 300 574 (GSM 05.02)


MML Abbreviated Name QUA

MML Full Name cell bar qualify


DB Name base_station.cell_barr_qual


10.19 cell barred (BAR)

Parameter name Cell Barred

Abbreviated name cellBarred

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether MSs are allowed toaccess the cell.

NOTE: MML range:

N (cell not barred (MSs are allowed to access the cell) (0))

Y (cell barred (MSs are not allowed to access the cell) (1))

Default: N

Range and step cell not barred (0), cell barred (1)


cell not barred ==> 0

cell barred ==> 1

Default value cell not barred (0)




13/04/2007


Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name BAR

MML Full Name cell barred


DB Name base_station.cell_barred


10.20 cell identity (CI)

Parameter name CI

Abbreviated name cellId

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the cells within a location area.



Default value -



Related functions -


Modified All BTSs of the segment must be in a LOCKED state.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related parameters locationAreaIdLAC of BTS


Related options -

Related features -



MML Commands EQC, EQE, EQO, EEI


MML Full Name cell identity


DB Name base_station.cell_id


10.21 cell load for channel search (CLC)

Parameter name Cell Load For Channel Search

Abbreviated name cellLoadForChannelSearch

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you give a load limit for traffic channels in theBTS. If the TCH load in a cell is below the limit traffic, channels forspeech and single slot data calls are allocated using rotationbetween TRXs in a cell and between TSLs of a TRX. If the loadlimit has been reached or exceeded, the TCH allocation isperformed trying to save larger spaces of idle FR resources forpossible multislot HSCSD calls by preferring small gaps of freeresources and ends of a TRX for single slot calls.



Default value 0 %



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name CLC

MML Full Name cell load for channel search


DB Name base_station.cell_load_ch_search


10.22 cell reselect hysteresis (HYS)

Parameter name Cell Reselect Hysteresis

Abbreviated name cellReselectHysteresis

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the received RF power levelhysteresis for required cell reselection.



Default value 4 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HYS

MML Full Name cell reselect hysteresis


DB Name base_station.cell_reselect_hysteresis


10.23 cell reselect offset (REO)

Parameter name Cell Reselect Offset

Abbreviated name cellReselectOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the offset of the C2 reselectioncriterion for a cell.



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


13/04/2007





MML Abbreviated Name REO

MML Full Name cell reselect offset


DB Name base_station.cell_res_offset


10.24 cell reselection parameter index (PI)

Parameter name Cell Reselection Parameter Index

Abbreviated name cellReselectParamInd

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether C2 reselection parametersare broadcast to mobile stations. The C2 cell reselection allowsyou to define other criteria for cell reselection in addition to powerlevel.

Range and step C2 reselection parameters are not broadcast (N) (0), C2reselection parameters are broadcast (Y) (1)


C2 reselection parameters are not broadcast (N) ==> 0

C2 reselection parameters are broadcast (Y) ==> 1

Default value C2 reselection parameters are not broadcast (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name PI

MML Full Name cell reselection parameter index


DB Name base_station.pi


10.25 cell type (CTY)

Parameter name IDR Cell Type

Abbreviated name idrCellType

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the IDR type of the cell. Thisparameter affects the intelligent directed retry.

Range and step GSM (0), MCN/Shared (1)


GSM ==> 0

MCN/Shared ==> 1

Default value GSM (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters cellType (IDR Cell Type) of ADCE

Parameter relationships When you modify this parameter, the cell type parameter of theadjacent cells is automatically modified.



13/04/2007


Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name CTY

MML Full Name cell type


DB Name base_station.cell_type


10.26 coding scheme hop (CODH)

Parameter name Coding Scheme Hop

Abbreviated name pcuCsHopping

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the selection of Coding Schemein RLC (Radio Link Control) Acknowledged mode in casefrequency hopping is used.

Range and step Link Adaptation used (0), CS-1 used (1), CS-2 used (2)


Link Adaptation used ==> 0

CS-1 used ==> 1

CS-2 used ==> 2

Default value Link Adaptation used (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CODH

MML Full Name coding scheme hop


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_link_adapt_prms.pcu_cs_hopping


10.27 coding scheme no hop (COD)

Parameter name Coding Scheme No Hop

Abbreviated name pcuCsNonHopping

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the selection of Coding Schemein RLC (Radio Link Control) Acknowledged mode in casefrequency hopping is not used.

Range and step Link Adaptation used (0), Cs1 used (1), Cs2 used (2)


Link Adaptation used ==> 0

Cs1 used ==> 1

Cs2 used ==> 2

Default value Cs2 used (2)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


13/04/2007


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name COD

MML Full Name coding scheme no hop


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_link_adapt_prms.pcu_cs_non_hop


10.28 direct GPRS access BTS (DIRE)

Parameter name Direct GPRS Access BTS

Abbreviated name directGPRSAccessBts

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define which BTSs in the SEG may beused for GPRS or EGPRS without signal level measurements.This parameter defines the signal level compared to non BCCHlayer offset. When the value of this parameter is higher than thevalue of the parameter non BCCH layer offset the direct GPRSaccess to non BCCH layer BTS is applied. This is used in initialchannel allocation and reallocation.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters nonBCCHLayerOffset of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name DIRE

MML Full Name direct GPRS access BTS


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.direct_gprs_access_bts


10.29 directed retry method (DRM)

Parameter name Directed Retry Method

Abbreviated name drMethod

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define which method is used in directedretry procedure when candidate cells are evaluated. Thisparameter is also used to switch off directed retry methodimprovements.

Range and step Basic directed retry method (0), Threshold evaluation method (1)


Basic directed retry method ==> 0

Threshold evaluation method ==> 1

Default value Basic directed retry method (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Directed Retry (1) (optional) OR Intelligent Directed Retry (IDR)(20) (optional)

Related features -



13/04/2007


References -


MML Abbreviated Name DRM

MML Full Name directed retry method


DB Name base_station.dr_method


10.30 directed retry used (DR)

Parameter name Directed Retry Used

Abbreviated name drInUse

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define if the directed retry feature is in usein the cell.

Range and step directed retry is not in use (N) (0), directed retry is in use (Y) (1)


directed retry is not in use (N) ==> 0

directed retry is in use (Y) ==> 1

Default value directed retry is not in use (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Directed Retry (1) (optional)

Related features -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name DR

MML Full Name directed retry used


DB Name base_station.dr_in_use


10.31 DL adaption probability threshold (DLA)

Parameter name DL adaption probability threshold

Abbreviated name pcuDlLaRiskLevel

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the allowed probability (%) for thesystem to make a wrong decision in downlink adaptation.



Default value 20 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DLA

MML Full Name DL adaption probability threshold


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_link_adapt_prms.pcu_dl_la_risk_level


13/04/2007



10.32 DL BLER crosspoint for CS selection hop (DLBH)

Parameter name DL BLER Crosspoint For CS Selection Hop

Abbreviated name pcuDlBlerCpHopping

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the RLC BLER (block error ratepercentage) for CS-1 channel coding. At this point CS-1 and CS-2give the same effective bit rate and Coding Scheme selectioncriteria in RLC Acknowledged mode for downlink TBFs changes.The parameter is meaningful only if link adaptation and Base BandFrequency Hopping are used.



Default value 20 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DLBH

MML Full Name DL BLER crosspoint for CS selection hop


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_link_adapt_prms.pcu_dl_bler_cp_hopping


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.33 DL BLER crosspoint for CS selection no hop (DLB)

Parameter name DL BLER Crosspoint For CS Selection No Hop

Abbreviated name pcuDlBlerCpNonHop

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the RLC BLER (block error ratepercentage) for CS-1 channel coding. At this point CS-1 and CS-2give the same effective bit rate and Coding Scheme selectioncriteria in RLC Acknowledged mode for downlink TBFs changes.

The parameter is meaningful only if link adaptation is used in caseof no frequency hopping.



Default value 90 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DLB

MML Full Name DL BLER crosspoint for CS selection no hop


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_link_adapt_prms.pcu_dl_bler_cp_non_hop



13/04/2007


10.34 DTM enabled (DENA)

Parameter name DTM Enabled

Abbreviated name dtmEnabled

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter indicates if DTM is enabled in a SEGMENT.

Range and step DTM disabled (N) (0), DTM enabled (Y) (1)


DTM disabled (N) ==> 0

DTM enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value DTM disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified GPRS must be enabled in the BTS when enabling DTM. DTMcannot be enabled at the same time when modifying parametersthat require GPRS disabling.

Related parameters . dtmEnabled of ADCE. gprsEnabled of BTS

Parameter relationships If an adjacent cell is created with a BTS reference, the value iscopied from the referenced BTS (Master-BTS).

GPRS must be enabled in the BTS when enabling DTM.



Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DENA

MML Full Name DTM enabled


DB Name base_station.s12_prms.dtm_enabled


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.35 DTX Mode (DTX)

Parameter name DTX Mode

Abbreviated name dtxMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how the MS uses DTX(discontinuous transmission).

Range and step MS may use DTX (0), MS shall use DTX (1), MS shall not useDTX (2)


MS may use DTX ==> 0

MS shall use DTX ==> 1

MS shall not use DTX ==> 2

Default value MS shall not use DTX (2)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name DTX

MML Full Name DTX Mode


DB Name base_station.dtx_mode



13/04/2007


10.36 early sending indication (ESI)

Parameter name Early Sending Indication

Abbreviated name earlySendingIndication

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you accept or forbid the early sending of theMS Classmark 3 message in call setup phase to the network.

Range and step 0 (early classmark sending is forbidden (N)), 1 (early classmarksending is accepted (Y))


early classmark sending is forbidden (N) ==> 0

early classmark sending is accepted (Y) ==> 1

Default value early classmark sending is accepted (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name ESI

MML Full Name early sending indication


DB Name base_station.early_sending_ind


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.37 EGPRS link adaptation enabled (ELA)

Parameter name EGPRS Link Adaptation Enabled

Abbreviated name egprsLinkAdaptEnabled

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you enable or disable EGPRS link adaptationon cell level. If disabled the system uses the MCS value definedby initial MCS for acknowledged mode or initial MCS forunacknowledged mode parameters or a lower MCS.

Range:

0... EGPRS link adaptation is disabled

1... EGPRS link adaptation is enabled for RLC acknowledgedmode

2... EGPRS link adaptation is enabled for both RLC acknowledgedand RLC unacknowledged modes

Range and step EGPRS link adaptation is disabled (0), enabled for RLCacknowledged mode (1), enabled for RLC acknowledged andunacknowledged (2)


EGPRS link adaptation is disabled ==> 0

enabled for RLC acknowledged mode ==> 1

enabled for RLC acknowledged and unacknowledged ==> 2

Default value enabled for RLC acknowledged and unacknowledged (2)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS) Usage (51) (optional) AND BSCGPRS Param Enabled (GPRS O&M in BSC) (39) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ELA


13/04/2007


MML Full Name EGPRS link adaptation enabled


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.egprs_link_adapt_prms.egprs_link_adapt_enabled


10.38 emergency call restricted (EC)

Parameter name Emergency Call Restricted

Abbreviated name emergencyCallRestricted

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define if an emergency call in the cell isallowed to all MSs or only to the MSs which belong to one of theclasses between 11 to 15. Value "Y" means the latter case.

NOTE: MML range:

Y (emergency call in the cell allowed only from the MSs thatbelong to one of the MS access classes from 11 to 15)

N (emergency call in the cell allowed from all MSs)

Default: N






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






MML Abbreviated Name EC

MML Full Name emergency call restricted


DB Name base_station.emergency_call_not_allowed


10.39 FDD cell reselect offset (FDD)

Parameter name FDD Cell Reselect Offset

Abbreviated name fddQOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a WCDMA RAN cell reselectionoffset for non-GPRS capable dual mode mobiles which are in theidle state.

The mobiles add the offset to the running average (RLA_C) of thereceived signal level of the serving GSM cell and non-servingGSM cells. After that the mobiles compare the measured RSCPvalues of WCDMA RAN cells with signal levels of the GSM cells.

NOTE:

"-32 db = minus infinity dB"

MML NOTE:

range: -28..28 dB, step 4 dB




Default value notes -32 db = minus infinity dB.

MML default: N = minus infinity dB



13/04/2007


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP 04.18, 44.018, 05.08


MML Abbreviated Name FDD

MML Full Name FDD cell reselect offset


DB Name base_station.s10_5_prms.fdd_qoffset


10.40 GPRS cell barred (GBAR)

Parameter name GPRS Cell Barred

Abbreviated name gprsCellBarred

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you combine the cell barred (BAR) and cellbarqualify (QUA) parameters and indicate the status for cellreselection.

Range and step Status for cell reselection is set to normal (0), Status for cellreselection is set to barred (1)


Status for cell reselection is set to normal ==> 0

Status for cell reselection is set to barred ==> 1

Default value Status for cell reselection is set to normal (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related parameters cellBarQualify of BTS, cellBarred of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name GBAR

MML Full Name GPRS cell barred


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.cell_bar_access_2


10.41 GPRS cell reselect hysteresis (GHYS)

Parameter name GPRS Cell Reselect Hysteresis

Abbreviated name gprsCellReselHysteresis

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define additional hysteresis applied inREADY state for selecting a cell in the same routing area.



Default value 4 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -


13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name GHYS

MML Full Name GPRS cell reselect hysteresis


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gen_cell_select.gprs_cell_resel_hyst


10.42 GPRS enabled (GENA)

Parameter name GPRS Enabled

Abbreviated name gprsEnabled

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the GPRS capability isenabled in the cell.

Range and step GPRS is disabled (N) (0), GPRS is enabled (Y) (1)


GPRS is disabled (N) ==> 0

GPRS is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value GPRS is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name GENA

MML Full Name GPRS enabled


DB Name base_station.gprs_enabled


10.43 GPRS fdd cell reselect offset (GFDD)

Parameter name GPRS FDD Cell Reselect Offset

Abbreviated name fddGprsQOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a WCDMA RAN cell reselectionoffset for GPRS capable dual mode mobiles which are in the idlestate.

The mobiles add the offset to the running average (RLA_P) of thereceived signal level of the serving GSM cell and non-servingGSM cells. After that the mobiles compare the measured RSCPvalues of WCDMA RAN cells with the signal levels of the GSMcells.

NOTE:

MML value range: -28..28 dB, step 4 dB




Default value notes -32 db = minus infinity dB.

MML default: N = minus infinity dB


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


13/04/2007


Interfaces -

References . 3GPP 04.60, 05.08


MML Abbreviated Name GFDD

MML Full Name GPRS fdd cell reselect offset


DB Name base_station.s10_5_prms.fdd_gprs_qoffset


10.44 GPRS max number of retransmission (GRET)

Parameter name GPRS Max Number Of Retransmission

Abbreviated name gprsMaxRetrans

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 4

Description With this parameter you indicate the maximum number ofretransmissions allowed on the PRACH for each Radio Prioritylevel 1 to 4. Radio Priority level 1 represents the highest priority.One parameter contains four values.

MML description: All the values must be given at the same time byusing the character &.

NOTE:

MML range:

1, 2, 4, 7 for each Radio Priority level

MML default: 4 4 4 4

Range and step 1 (0), 2 (1), 4 (2), 7 (3)


1 ==> 0

2 ==> 1

4 ==> 2

7 ==> 3

Default value 4 (2)



Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name GRET

MML Full Name GPRS max number of retransmission


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.pbcch_max_retrans(0..3)


10.45 GPRS minimum fdd threshold (GFDM)

Parameter name GPRS Minimum FDD Threshold

Abbreviated name gprsFddQMin

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description This parameter defines a minimum Ec/Io threshold that must beexceeded before a GPRS capable dual mode mobile is allowed tomake a reselection from the serving GSM cell to an adjacentWCDMA RAN cell that is using frequency division duplex (FDD)type access technology/mode.

Value range: -20 ..-6 dB with 2 dB steps

Value Description -20 -20 dB

-18 -18 dB

-16 -16 dB

-14 -14 dB

-12 -12 dB (*)

-10 -10 dB (*)

- 8 - 8 dB (*)

- 6 - 6 dB (*)

(*) Some rare MSs used in test purposes may interpret thereceived value as a greater dB value in case of values -12 dB, -10dB, -8 dB, and -6 dB if the MSs do not follow an interpretationchange made according to 3GPP Standardisation 05.08 CR A375.

The rare MSs mentioned above interpret value -12 dB as -13 dB, -10 dB as -15 dB, -8 dB as -17 dB, and -6 dB as -19 dB.

Range and step -20 dB (0), -6 dB (1), -18 dB (2), -8 dB (3), -16 dB (4), -10 dB (5),-14 dB (6), -12 dB (7)


-20 dB ==> 0

-6 dB ==> 1

-18 dB ==> 2

-8 dB ==> 3

-16 dB ==> 4

-10 dB ==> 5

-14 dB ==> 6

-12 dB ==> 7

Default value -12 dB (7)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Inter System HO (ISHO Support In BSC) (56) (optional) ANDBSC GPRS Param Enabled (GPRS O&M in BSC) (39) (optional)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name GFDM

MML Full Name GPRS minimum fdd threshold


DB Name base_station.s10_5_prms.gprs_fdd_qmin


10.46 gprs ms txpwr max cch 1x00 (GTXP2)

Parameter name GPRS MS Txpwr Max CCH 1x00

Abbreviated name gprsMsTxPwrMaxCCH1x00

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum transmission powerlevel a mobile station may use when accessing a packet controlchannel in the cell for GSM 1800/1900 bands.

NOTE:

MML value range:



NOTE:


GSM 1800:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

34 dBm: 30

36 dBm: 29

GSM 1900:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

33 dBm: 30


13/04/2007




Default value 30



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters frequencyBandInUse of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces . RAC <-> BSC. RACApp <-> RAC




MML Full Name gprs ms txpwr max cch 1x00


DB Name base_station.s10_5_prms.gprs_ms_txp_max_cch_1x


10.47 GPRS MS txpwr max cch (GTXP1)

Parameter name GPRS MS Txpwr Max CCH

Abbreviated name gprsMsTxpwrMaxCCH

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum transmission powerlevel a mobile station can use when accessing a packet controlchannel in the cell for GSM 900/800 bands.





DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters frequencyBandInUse of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands EAC, EAM, EAO, EQG, EQO


MML Full Name GPRS MS txpwr max cch


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_ms_txpwr_max_cch


10.48 GPRS not allowed access classes (GACC)

Parameter name GPRS Not Allowed Access Classes

Abbreviated name gprsAccessCtrlClass

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 16

Description With this parameter you define the MS access classes that are notallowed to access a cell.

NOTE:

MML range:

0 ... 9 AND 11 ... 15 (&,&&)

MML default: - (no not allowed access classes)

You can enter several values at the same time by using the wildcard characters & and &&. The old values are overwritten.

MML NOTE:

To clear the parameter (values from database), enter theparameter name only (without a parameter value).



13/04/2007



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name GACC

MML Full Name GPRS not allowed access classes


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_not_allow_acc_classes(0..14)


10.49 GPRS number of slots spread transmission (GSLO)

Parameter name GPRS Number Of Slots Spread Transmission

Abbreviated name gprsNbrSlotsSpreadTrans

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of slots used to spreadtransmission on the PRACH (Packet random access Channel).

Range and step 2 (0), 3 (1), 4 (2), 5 (3), 6 (4), 7 (5), 8 (6), 9 (7), 10 (8), 12 (9), 14(10), 16 (11), 20 (12), 25 (13), 32 (14), 50 (15)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




2 ==> 0

3 ==> 1

4 ==> 2

5 ==> 3

6 ==> 4

7 ==> 5

8 ==> 6

9 ==> 7

10 ==> 8

12 ==> 9

14 ==> 10

16 ==> 11

20 ==> 12

25 ==> 13

32 ==> 14

50 ==> 15




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name GSLO

MML Full Name GPRS number of slots spread transmission


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.pbcch_tx_int



13/04/2007


10.50 GPRS rxlev access min (GRXP)

Parameter name GPRS Rxlev Access Min

Abbreviated name gprsRxlevAccessMin

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum power level an MShas to receive before it is allowed to access the cell.






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References . GSM reference: GSM 04.60


MML Abbreviated Name GRXP

MML Full Name GPRS rxlev access min


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_rxlev_access_min


10.51 GPRS threshold to search WCDMA RAN cells(QSRP)

Parameter name GPRS Threshold To Search WCDMA RAN Cells

Abbreviated name qSearchP

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold for GPRS-capabledual mode mobiles to search for and to measure WCDMA RANneighbour cells introduced in 3G Cell Reselection list when arunning average of the received downlink signal level (RLA_C) ofthe serving cell is below (0-7) or above (8-15) the threshold. Thisparameter is broadcast either on BCCH or PBCCH.

This parameter is sent on BCCH if PBCCH does not exist. In casethis parameter is broadcast on BCCH it shall be used only ifGPRS cell re-selection parameters for one or more cells are sentto the MS in a Packet Cell Change Order or Packet MeasurementOrder message

NOTE:

If the parameter value is 7, GPRS-capable multi-RAT MSsmeasure always neighbour WCDMA RAN cell(s). If the parametervalue is 15, GPRS-capable multi-RAT MSs do not measure any ofneighbour WCDMA RAN cells.

Range and step -98 dBm (0), -94 dBm (1), -90 dBm (2), -86 dBm (3), -82 dBm (4),-78 dBm (RLA_P below) (5), -74 dBm (RLA_P below) (6), Infinity(always) (7), -78 dBm (RLA_P above) (8), -74 dBm (RLA_Pabove) (9), -70 dBm (10), -66 dBm (11), -62 dBm (12), -58 dBm(13), -54 dBm (14), Infinity (never) (15)


-98 dBm ==> 0

-94 dBm ==> 1

-90 dBm ==> 2

-86 dBm ==> 3

-82 dBm ==> 4

-78 dBm (RLA_P below) ==> 5

-74 dBm (RLA_P below) ==> 6

Infinity (always) ==> 7

-78 dBm (RLA_P above) ==> 8

-74 dBm (RLA_P above) ==> 9

-70 dBm ==> 10

-66 dBm ==> 11

-62 dBm ==> 12

-58 dBm ==> 13

-54 dBm ==> 14

Infinity (never) ==> 15

Default value -


13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified The administrative state of the PBCCH TRX must be locked onthe serving GSM cell.

Related parameters qSearchI of BTS

Parameter relationships GPRS-capable dual mode MS shall search and measure WCDMARAN neighbour cells according to parameter qSearchI (ThresholdTo Search WCDMA RAN Cells) if PBCCH does not exist andGPRS cell re-selection parameters for one or more cells are notsent to the MS in a Packet Cell Change Order or PacketMeasurement Order message.


Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name QSRP

MML Full Name GPRS threshold to search WCDMA RAN cells


DB Name base_station.s10_5_prms.qsearch_p


10.52 HCS threshold (HCS)

Parameter name HCS Threshold

Abbreviated name hcsThreshold

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the signal strength threshold forapplying HCS in GPRS and LSA reselection.



Default value 255 dB

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name HCS

MML Full Name HCS threshold


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.pbcch_hcs_thr


10.53 HSCSD cell load lower limit (HCL)

Parameter name HSCSD Cell Load Lower Limit

Abbreviated name lowerLimitCellLoadHSCSD

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the lower limit in percent forcell load when the singleslot TCH allocation is stopped and themultislot allocation is started and resource upgrades are allowedfor the HSCSD calls.



Default value 100 %



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online



Related options . High Speed Circuit Switched Data (HSCSD - TCSM2) (25)(optional)

Related features -


References . GSM TS 02.34 (GSM 02.34). TS 101 038 (GSM 03.34)

MML Commands EQX, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name HCL

MML Full Name HSCSD cell load lower limit


DB Name base_station.low_cell_load_hscsd


10.54 HSCSD cell load upper limit (HCU)

Parameter name HSCSD Cell Load Upper Limit

Abbreviated name upperLimitCellLoadHSCSD

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the upper limit in percent forcell load when the multislot TCH allocation is stopped and thesingleslot allocation is started for the HSCSD calls.



Default value 100 %



Related functions -

Modification Online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HCU

MML Full Name HSCSD cell load upper limit


DB Name base_station.upp_cell_load_hscsd


10.55 HSCSD downgrade guard time (HDT)

Parameter name HSCSD Downgrade Guard Time

Abbreviated name downgradeGuardTimeHSCSD

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the guard time before aresource downgrade for a HSCSD call is executed after call setup,handover, ALA, resource upgrade or resource downgrade.

If the parameter is set to value 0, resource downgrade is not done.



Default value 0 s



Special value Deactivated (0)

Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HDT

MML Full Name HSCSD downgrade guard time


DB Name base_station.downgr_guard_hscsd


10.56 HSCSD minimum exhaust (HME)

Parameter name HSCSD Minimum Exhaust

Abbreviated name minExhaustHSCSD

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine how much the data rate shoulddecrease at least during the downgrade of an HSCSD call.

NOTE:

Range:

1 (one TCH always released in downgrade)

2 (downgrade is made from four to two, three to two, two to oneTCHs)

3 (downgrade is made from four to two, three to one, two to oneTCHs)

4 (only one TCH left always after downgrade)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Range and step Release 1 (1), Release 2 or 1 or 1 (2), Release 2 or 2 or 1 (3),Release 3 or 2 or 1 (4)


Release 1 ==> 1

Release 2 or 1 or 1 ==> 2



Default value Release 1 (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HME

MML Full Name HSCSD minimum exhaust


DB Name base_station.min_exhaust_hscsd


10.57 HSCSD regular cell load upper limit (HRCU)

Parameter name HSCSD Regular Cell Load Upper Limit

Abbreviated name upperLimitRegularLoadHSCSD

Managed object BTS


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the upper limit in percent forthe cell load in the IUO regular frequency area when the multislotTCH allocation is stopped and the singleslot allocation is startedfor the HSCSD calls. Resource upgrades are not done in the IUOregular frequency area.



Default value 100 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HRCU

MML Full Name HSCSD regular cell load upper limit


DB Name base_station.upp_regular_load_hscsd


10.58 HSCSD TCH capacity minimum (HTM)

Parameter name HSCSD TCH Capacity Minimum

Abbreviated name minHSCSDcapacityCell

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the minimum TCH capacity inpercent which is offered to HSCSD calls in the cell. In low trafficload situation, the HSCSD calls can have more TCHs thanindicated by the parameter.



Default value 100 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HTM

MML Full Name HSCSD TCH capacity minimum


DB Name base_station.min_hscsd_capa


10.59 HSCSD upgrade gain (HUG)

Parameter name HSCSD Upgrade Gain

Abbreviated name upgradeGainHSCSD


13/04/2007


Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the data rate gain (%) whichmust be achieved before the resource upgrade can be done eventhough the upgrade guard time is not over.

NOTE: MML Range:

0 (no upgrade during guard time),

33 (upgrade during guard time if gain at least 33%),

50 (upgrade during guard time if gain at least 50%),

100 (upgrade during guard time if gain at least 100%)

MML Default = 0

Range and step Gain Not Used (0), When Possible (33), 1 or 2 TSL (50), 1 or 2 or4 TSL (100)


Gain Not Used ==> 0

When Possible ==> 33

1 or 2 TSL ==> 50

1 or 2 or 4 TSL ==> 100

Default value Gain Not Used (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HUG

MML Full Name HSCSD upgrade gain

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




DB Name base_station.upgrade_gain_hscsd


10.60 HSCSD upgrade guard time (HUT)

Parameter name HSCSD Upgrade Guard Time

Abbreviated name upgradeGuardTimeHSCSD

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the guard time before aresource upgrade for a HSCSD call is executed after call setup,handover, ALA, resource upgrade or resource downgrade. If theparameter is set to value 0, resource upgrade is not done.



Default value 0 s



Special value Deactivated (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name HUT


13/04/2007


MML Full Name HSCSD upgrade guard time


DB Name base_station.upgr_guard_hscsd


10.61 identification of BCCH frequency list (IDLE)

Parameter name Idle State BCCH Allocation List (BAL) ID

Abbreviated name idleStateBcchAllocListId

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the BCCH frequency list used byidle MSs. This list is used for cell reselection and is sent on theBCCH.

NOTE:

MML range: 0...2000

0 (BCCH frequency list is taken from the adjacent cells defined forthe BTS)



Default value 0



Special value BCCH freq list is taken from the adjacent cells (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online






DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





MML Abbreviated Name IDLE

MML Full Name identification of BCCH frequency list


DB Name *) relation


10.62 IMSI based handover GSM enabled (IGE)

Parameter name IMSI Based Handover GSM Enabled

Abbreviated name ibhoGsmEnabled

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether forbidden neighbour GSMcells are filtered out from mobile specific handover target cell listsor not. The filtering is done based on IMSI information of a mobile,Authorised Networks and Subscriber Group definitions.

If the filtering is enabled in the cell and the MS is anonymous forBSC, then the BSC level filtering parameterIBHO_GSM_CELLS_ANONY_MS is used to define permittedneighbour GSM cells for the MS.

When you modify the parameter, all the BTSs of the segment mustbe in a LOCKED state.

NOTE: Nokia 2nd generation and Nokia InSite BTS do not supportIMSI based handover functionality.

Range and step IMSI based handover to GSM cells is disabled (N) (0), IMSI basedhandover to GSM cells is enabled (Y) (1)


IMSI based handover to GSM cells is disabled (N) ==> 0

IMSI based handover to GSM cells is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value IMSI based handover to GSM cells is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -



13/04/2007







Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IGE

MML Full Name IMSI based handover GSM enabled


DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.ibho_gsm_enabled


10.63 IMSI based handover WCDMA enabled (IWE)

Parameter name IMSI Based Handover WCDMA Enabled

Abbreviated name ibhoWcdmaEnabled

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether forbidden neighbourWCDMA cells are filtered out from mobile specific handover targetcell lists or not. The filtering is done based on IMSI information ofa mobile, Authorised Networks and Subscriber Group definitions.

If the filtering is enabled in the cell and the MS is anonymous forBSC, then the BSC level filtering parameterIBHO_WCDMA_CELLS_ANONY_MS is used to define permittedneighbour WCDMA cells for the MS.

When you modify the parameter, all the BTSs in the segment mustbe in a LOCKED state.

NOTE: Nokia 2nd generation and Nokia InSite BTS do not supportIMSI based handover functionality.

Range and step IMSI based handover to WCDMA cells is disabled (N) (0), IMSIbased handover to WCDMA cells is enabled (Y) (1)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




IMSI based handover to WCDMA cells is disabled (N) ==> 0

IMSI based handover to WCDMA cells is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value IMSI based handover to WCDMA cells is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -





Related options . Inter System HO (ISHO Support In BSC) (56) (optional) ANDIBHO (IMSI Based Handover) in BSC (80) (optional)


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IWE

MML Full Name IMSI based handover WCDMA enabled


DB Name base_station.s11_5_prms.ibho_wcdma_enabled


10.64 initial MCS for acknowledged mode (MCA)

Parameter name Initial MCS For Acknowledged Mode

Abbreviated name egprsInitMcsAckMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the Modulation andCodingScheme (MCS) used at the beginning of a TBF foracknowledged mode. The parameter is used in EGPRS linkadaptation.



13/04/2007



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MCA

MML Full Name initial MCS for acknowledged mode


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.egprs_link_adapt_prms.init_mcs_ack_mode


10.65 initial MCS for unacknowledged mode (MCU)

Parameter name Initial MCS For Unacknowledged Mode

Abbreviated name egprsInitMcsUnAckMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the MCS used at the beginning ofa TBF for unacknowledged mode. The parameter is used inEGPRS link adaptation.



Default value 5



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MCU

MML Full Name initial MCS for unacknowledged mode


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.egprs_link_adapt_prms.init_mcs_unack_mode


10.66 intelligent directed retry used (IDR)

Parameter name Intelligent Directed Retry Used

Abbreviated name idrUsed

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define if the directed retry feature is in usein the cell.

Range and step Intelligent Directed Retry is not in use (N) (0), Intelligent DirectedRetry is in use (Y) (1)


Intelligent Directed Retry is not in use (N) ==> 0

Intelligent Directed Retry is in use (Y) ==> 1

Default value Intelligent Directed Retry is not in use (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online


13/04/2007





Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name IDR

MML Full Name intelligent directed retry used


DB Name base_station.idr_in_use


10.67 limit for free TCHs (LIMIT)

Parameter name Limit For Free TCHs

Abbreviated name freeTchLimit

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of free traffic channelsthat must be exceeded before all access attempts are granted.The value is BTS-specific and common to all traffic types of thatBTS.



Default value 16



Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related features -


References -

MML Commands EQT, EQO, ETO

MML Abbreviated Name LIMIT

MML Full Name limit for free TCHs


DB Name base_station.free_tch_limit



Parameter name LAC

Abbreviated name locationAreaIdLAC

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the location area code number.



Default value -



Related functions -


Modified All BTSs of the segment must be in a LOCKED state and theGPRS is disabled.

Related parameters cellId of BTS, locationAreaIdMCC of BTS, locationAreaIdMNC ofBTS



13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -



MML Commands EQC, EQE, EQO, EEI




DB Name base_station.lai.location_area_code


10.69 lower limit for FR TCH resources (FRL)

Parameter name Lower Limit For FR TCH Resources

Abbreviated name btsSpLoadDepTchRateLower

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the percentage of full rate TCHresources that must be available for traffic channel allocation. Fullrate TCHs are allocated until the number of free full rate resourcesis reduced below the threshold given in the parameter. The halfrate resources are then allocated.



Default value 100 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name FRL

MML Full Name lower limit for FR TCH resources


DB Name base_station.bts_sp_load_dep_tch_rate.lower_limit


10.70 maximum BLER in acknowledged mode (BLA)

Parameter name Maximum BLER In Acknowledged Mode

Abbreviated name egprsMaxBlerAckMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the maximum block error rate offirst transmission in acknowledged mode. The parameter is usedin EGPRS link adaptation.



Default value 90 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -


13/04/2007


References -


MML Abbreviated Name BLA

MML Full Name maximum BLER in acknowledged mode


DB Name base_station. s10_prms.egprs_link_adapt_prms.max_bler_ack_mode


10.71 maximum BLER in unacknowledged mode (BLU)

Parameter name Maximum BLER In Unacknowledged Mode

Abbreviated name egprsMaxBlerUnAckMode

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the maximum block error rate inunacknowledged mode. The unit is parts per thousand. Theparameter is used in EGPRS link adaptation.

MML NOTE:

The parameter is coded according to the following table:

Param

1 = 0.1 %

2 = 0.2 %

3 = 0.3 %

.

.

100 = 10 %



Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BLU

MML Full Name maximum BLER in unacknowledged mode


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.egprs_link_adapt_prms.max_bler_unack_mode


10.72 max number of repetition (NY1)

Parameter name Max Number Of Repetition

Abbreviated name maxNumberOfRepetition

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum number of repetitionsof the PHYSICAL INFO message during a handover that thetransceiver can perform.



Default value 5



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


13/04/2007





MML Abbreviated Name NY1

MML Full Name max number of repetition


DB Name base_station.max_number_of_repetition


10.73 max number of retransmission (RET)

Parameter name Max Number Of Retransmission

Abbreviated name maxNumberRetransmission

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum number ofretransmissions on the RACH (random access channel) that theMS can perform.

Range and step 1 (1), 2 (2), 4 (4), 7 (7)


1 ==> 1

2 ==> 2

4 ==> 4

7 ==> 7

Default value 4 (4)



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name RET

MML Full Name max number of retransmission


DB Name base_station.max_number_retransmission


10.74 max queue length (MQL)

Parameter name Max Queue Length

Abbreviated name maxQueueLength

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how many call and handoverattempts can be queued to wait for a TCH release in a BTS. Theparameter value is a percentage (0 - 100%) of the TCHs in use ina BTS.



Default value 50 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -


13/04/2007


Related features -


References -

MML Commands EQH, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name MQL

MML Full Name max queue length


DB Name base_station.queue_info.max_queue_length


10.75 max time limit directed retry (MADR)

Parameter name Max Time Limit Directed Retry

Abbreviated name maxTimeLimitDirectedRetry

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum time period startingfrom the assignment request during which the target cellevaluation for the directed retry handover is allowed.

NOTE: The value of the parameter MADR should be smaller thanthe value of the timer T10.



Default value 5 s



Related functions -

Modification Online




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name MADR

MML Full Name max time limit directed retry


DB Name base_station.max_time_limit_dr


10.76 mean BEP offset 8PSK (MBP)

Parameter name Mean BEP Offset 8PSK

Abbreviated name egprsMeanBepOffset8psk

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you can adjust the MCS and modulationpreferences. This is the offset added to reported 8PSK mean BEPvalues before BEP table lookups. The value applies to both uplinkand downlink directions. The parameter is used in EGPRS linkadaptation.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


13/04/2007


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MBP

MML Full Name mean BEP offset 8PSK


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.egprs_link_adapt_prms.mean_bep_off_8psk


10.77 mean BEP offset GMSK (MBG)

Parameter name Mean BEP Offset GMSK

Abbreviated name egprsMeanBepOffsetGmsk

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you can adjust the MCS and modulationpreferences. This is the offset added to reported GMSK meanBEP values before BEP table lookups. The value applies to bothuplink and downlink directions. The parameter is used in EGPRSlink adaptation.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name MBG

MML Full Name mean BEP offset GMSK


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.egprs_link_adapt_prms.mean_bep_off_gsmk


10.78 measurement BCCH Allocation list (MEAS)

Parameter name Measurement BCCH Allocation List

Abbreviated name measListUsedDuringMeas

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether or not MeasurementBCCH Allocation List is used during measurements whennecessary.

NOTE:


Range and step Measurement BCCH Allocation List not used (N) (0), MeasurementBCCH Allocation List used (Y) (1)


Measurement BCCH Allocation List not used (N) ==> 0

Measurement BCCH Allocation List used (Y) ==> 1

Default value Measurement BCCH Allocation List used (Y) (1)



Related functions -




Related options . DFCA (Dynamic Frequency And Channel Allocation) Usage (70)(optional) OR Double BCCH Allocation List (0) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name MEAS

MML Full Name measurement BCCH Allocation list


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.use_meas_list


10.79 minimum fdd threshold (FDM)

Parameter name Minimum FDD Threshold

Abbreviated name fddQMin

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter defines a minimum Ec/Io threshold which must beexceeded before a non-GPRS capable dual mode mobile isallowed to make a reselection from the serving GSM cell to anadjacent WCDMA RAN cell that is using frequency division duplex(FDD) type access technology/mode.

Value range: -20 ..-6 dB with 2 dB steps

Value Description -20 -20 dB

-18 -18 dB

-16 -16 dB

-14 -14 dB

-12 -12 dB (*)

-10 -10 dB (*)

- 8 - 8 dB (*)

- 6 - 6 dB (*)

(*) Some rare MSs used in test purposes may interpret thereceived value as a greater dB value in case of values -12 dB, -10dB, -8 dB, and -6 dB if the MSs do not follow an interpretationchange made according to 3GPP Standardisation 05.08 CR A375.

The rare MSs mentioned above interpret value -12 dB as -13 dB, -10 dB as -15 dB, -8 dB as -17 dB, and -6 dB as -19 dB.

Range and step -20 dB (0), -6 dB (1), -18 dB (2), -8 dB (3), -16 dB (4), -10 dB (5),-14 dB (6), -12 dB (7)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




-20 dB ==> 0

-6 dB ==> 1

-18 dB ==> 2

-8 dB ==> 3

-16 dB ==> 4

-10 dB ==> 5

-14 dB ==> 6

-12 dB ==> 7

Default value -12 dB (7)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP 04.18, 44.018, 05.08


MML Abbreviated Name FDM

MML Full Name minimum fdd threshold


DB Name base_station.s10_5_prms.fdd_qmin


10.80 min time limit directed retry (MIDR)

Parameter name Min Time Limit Directed Retry

Abbreviated name minTimeLimitDirectedRetry

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the period starting from theassignment request during which the target cell evaluation for thedirected retry handover is not allowed.



Default value 0 s



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name MIDR

MML Full Name min time limit directed retry


DB Name base_station.min_time_limit_dr


10.81 MS max distance in call setup (DMAX)

Parameter name MS Max Distance In Call Setup

Abbreviated name msMaxDistInCallSetup

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the maximum distance between theBTS and the MS in call setup. The maximum distance isexpressed as an access delay. Within the range of 0...62, one stepcorrelates to a distance of 550 meters.

If the access delay of the channel request message exceeds thegiven maximum, the call attempt is rejected. When the parameteris given a value from 63 to 255, call attempts are never rejected.

Range and step 0...255 *550m, step 1 *550m


Default value 255 *550m



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name DMAX

MML Full Name MS max distance in call setup


DB Name base_station.ms_max_dist_cs


10.82 MS priority used (MPU)

Parameter name MS Priority Used

Abbreviated name msPriorityUsedInQueueing

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -


13/04/2007


Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the call priority in theASSIGNMENT REQUEST message (or the HANDOVERREQUEST message in handover) from the MSC is taken intoaccount in queue handling.

Range and step MS priority is not used (N) (0), MS priority is used (Y) (1)


MS priority is not used (N) ==> 0

MS priority is used (Y) ==> 1

Default value MS priority is used (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name MPU

MML Full Name MS priority used


DB Name base_station.queue_info.queue_priority_used


10.83 MS txpwr max CCH1x00 (TXP2)

Parameter name MS Tx Pwr Max CCH 1x00

Abbreviated name msTxPwrMaxCCH1x00

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum transmission poweran MS may use when accessing a CCH in the cell for GSM 1800/1900 bands.

NOTE:

MML value range:



NOTE:


GSM 1800:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

34 dBm: 30

36 dBm: 29

GSM 1900:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

33 dBm: 30






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name TXP2

MML Full Name MS txpwr max CCH1x00


DB Name base_station.s10_5_prms.ms_txp_max_cch_1x


13/04/2007



10.84 MS txpwr max CCH (TXP1)

Parameter name MS Tx Pwr Max CCH

Abbreviated name msTxPwrMaxCCH

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum transmission poweran MS may use when accessing a CCH in the cell for GSM 900/800 bands.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name TXP1

MML Full Name MS txpwr max CCH


DB Name base_station.ms_txpwr_max_cch


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.85 MS txpwr max GSM1x00 (PMAX2)

Parameter name MS Tx Pwr Max GSM 1x00

Abbreviated name msTxPwrMaxGSM1x00

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum power level an MSmay use in the serving cell. When segment usage option is onand the segment does not contain a BCCH BTS you cannotmodify this parameter.

NOTE:

MML value range:



NOTE:


GSM 1800:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

34 dBm: 30

36 dBm: 29

GSM 1900:

0..30 dBm: 0..15 (UI value - 30)/-2

32 dBm: 31

33 dBm: 30






Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters minMsTxPower of BTS

Parameter relationships Parameter value must be higher than or equal to txpwr min value.

Related options -

Related features -


13/04/2007


Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EAC, EAM, EAO / EQM, EQO


MML Full Name MS txpwr max GSM1x00


DB Name base_station.stand_pwr_lev_for_enter_ms.ms_txpwr_max_gsm1x00


10.86 MS txpwr max GSM (PMAX1)

Parameter name MS Tx Pwr Max GSM

Abbreviated name msTxPwrMaxGSM

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum power level an MSmay use in the serving cell for GSM 800 and GSM 900 bands.When the segment usage option is ON and the segment does notcontain a BCCH BTS you cannot modify this parameter.






Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters minMsTxPower of BTS

Parameter relationships Parameter value must be higher than or equal to txpwr min value.

Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EAC, EAM, EAO / EQM, EQO

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Full Name MS txpwr max GSM


DB Name base_station.stand_pwr_lev_for_enter_ms.ms_txpwr_max_gsm



Parameter name MCC

Abbreviated name locationAreaIdMCC

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the mobile country code number.

NOTE:

The location area id (LAI) parameter is composed of the MCC,MNC, and LAC parameters. Location area (LA) is an area wherean MS can move without performing a location updatingprocedure.

Check the adjacent cell parameters.



Default value -



Related functions -



Related parameters locationAreaIdLAC of BTS, locationAreaIdMNC of BTS


Related options -

Related features -


13/04/2007








DB Name base_station.lai.mobile_country_code



Parameter name MNC

Abbreviated name locationAreaIdMNC

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:

MML Range:

0..99

0..999 OPTIONAL (Three digits MNC)

The location area id (LAI) parameter is composed of the MCC,MNC, and LAC parameters. Location area (LA) is an area wherean MS can move without performing a location updatingprocedure.

Check the adjacent cell parameters.

MNC length must be always three digits if MCC is 310, 311, 312,313, 314, 315, or 316.



Default value -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -



Related parameters locationAreaIdLAC of BTS, locationAreaIdMCC of BTS


Related options -

Related features -







DB Name base_station.lai.mobile_network_code


10.89 multiband cell reporting (MBR)

Parameter name Multiband Cell Reporting

Abbreviated name multiBandCellReporting

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of adjacent cells fromthe other frequency band that the MS will report in the RX levelreport.



Default value 1




13/04/2007


Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Dual Band GSM/DCS (16) (optional)

Related features -


References . GSM reference: ETS 300 557 (GSM 04.08), ETS 300 578 (GSM05.08), TR 101 266 (GSM 03.26)


MML Abbreviated Name MBR

MML Full Name multiband cell reporting


DB Name base_station.multiband_cell_rep




Abbreviated name bsIdentityCodeNCC

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the network colour code number.



Default value -



Related functions -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related parameters bsIdentityCodeBCC of BTS, adjCellBsicNcc of ADCE

Parameter relationships bsIdentityCode (BSIC) is a structure type parameter in the q3interface and is formed from NCC (0...7) and BCC (0...7).

If you modify this parameter, the NCC parameter in adjacent cellsis automatically modified.

Related options -

Related features -







DB Name base_station.bs_identity_code.ncc


10.91 network service entity identifier (NSEI)

Parameter name NSEI

Abbreviated name nsei

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you can manually select the network serviceentity identifier to which the BTS/SEG will be connected. If yougive this parameter the PCU selection algorithm is not used. Therouting area must be created and the NSEI must exist on therouting area the BTS/SEG is using.

NOTE:

Parameter can be given only when GPRS is enabled at the sametime (MML: GENA = Y, NetAct: GPRS Enabled = true). WhenGPRS is already enabled it needs to be disabled first and thenenabled again with a new Network Service Entity Identifier (NSEI).

Modification via File Based Plan Provisioning is possible althoughtGPRS is already enabled in the cell.

Either Packet Service Entity Identifier (PSEI) or Network ServiceEntity Identifier (NSEI) can be used for identifying NSE layer.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified When no BTS uses the NSEI.




Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP TS 48.016

MML Commands FXC, FXI, FXK, FXO, EQC, EQV, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name NSEI

MML Full Name network service entity identifier


DB Name *) relation


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.92 new establishment causes support (NECI)

Parameter name New Establishment Causes Support

Abbreviated name newEstabCausesSupport

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the BSC supports newestablishment causes.

Range and step New establishment causes support is not allowed(N) (0), Newestablishment causes support is allowed(Y) (1)


New establishment causes support is not allowed(N) ==> 0

New establishment causes support is allowed(Y) ==> 1

Default value New establishment causes support is not allowed(N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name NECI

MML Full Name new establishment causes support


DB Name base_station.neci



13/04/2007


10.93 not allowed access classes (ACC)

Parameter name Not Allowed Access Classes

Abbreviated name notAllowedAccessClasses

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 16

Description With this parameter you define the MS access classes that are notallowed to access a cell.

NOTE:

MML range:

0 ... 9 AND 11 ... 15 (&,&&)

MML default: -

You can enter several values at the same time by using the wildcard characters & and &&. The old values are overwritten.

MML NOTE:

To clear the parameter, enter the parameter name only (without aparameter value).






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name ACC

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name not allowed access classes


DB Name base_station.not_allowed_access_classes(0..14)


10.94 number of blocks for access grant msg (AG)

Parameter name Number Of Blocks For Access Grant Msg

Abbreviated name noOfBlocksForAccessGrant

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of blocks reserved foraccess grant messages from the CCCH during the 51 TDMAframe (a multiframe).

NOTE:

MML Range:

0..7 (if combined BCCH not used)

1..7 (if CBCH used at SDCCH/8)

0..2 (if combined BCCH used)



Default value 1



Related functions -





Related options -

Related features -


13/04/2007



References . GSM reference: I-ETS 300 022-1 (GSM 04.08), I-ETS 300 030(GSM 05.02), I-ETS 300 030 (GSM 05.02)


MML Abbreviated Name AG

MML Full Name number of blocks for access grant msg


DB Name base_station.config_cch.no_of_blocks_for_ag_msg


10.95 number of multiframes (MFR)

Parameter name Number Of Multiframes

Abbreviated name noOfMFramesBetweenPaging

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of multiframes betweentwo transmissions of the same paging message to the MSs of thesame paging group.



Default value 4



Related functions -





Related options -

Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






MML Abbreviated Name MFR

MML Full Name number of multiframes


DB Name base_station.config_cch.no_of_multiframes


10.96 number of slots spread trans (SLO)

Parameter name Number Of Slots Spread Trans

Abbreviated name nbrOfSlotsSpreadTrans

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of TDMA frames overwhich retransmission is spread on the RACH (random accesschannel).

NOTE:

MML Range:

3..12, 14, 16, 20, 25, 32, 50

MML default:

10

Range and step 3 (0), 4 (1), 5 (2), 6 (3), 7 (4), 8 (5), 9 (6), 10 (7), 11 (8), 12 (9), 14(10), 16 (11), 20 (12), 25 (13), 32 (14), 50 (15)


13/04/2007



3 ==> 0

4 ==> 1

5 ==> 2

6 ==> 3

7 ==> 4

8 ==> 5

9 ==> 6

10 ==> 7

11 ==> 8

12 ==> 9

14 ==> 10

16 ==> 11

20 ==> 12

25 ==> 13

32 ==> 14

50 ==> 15




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name SLO

MML Full Name number of slots spread trans


DB Name base_station.number_of_slots_spread_trans


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.97 number of traffic channels reserved for prioritysubscribers only (TCRP)

Parameter name Number Of TCH Reserved For Priority Subscribers Only

Abbreviated name nbrTchForPrioritySubs

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of traffic channelsreserved in the BTS for priority subscribers only.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -

MML Commands EQT, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name TCRP

MML Full Name number of traffic channels reserved for priority subscribers only


DB Name base_station.pr_subscr_tch_count



13/04/2007


10.98 packet service entity identifier (PSEI)

Parameter name Packet Service Entity Identifier

Abbreviated name psei

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter identifies the PSE object in the BSC.

With this parameter you identify the Packet Service Entity.

The Packet Service Entity Identifier (PSEI) is used in the BSS todetermine Packet Control Pool (PCP).

NOTE:

Parameter can be given only when GPRS is enabled at the sametime (MML: GENA = Y, NetAct: GPRS Enabled = true). WhenGPRS is already enabled it needs to be disabled first and thenenabled again with a new Packet Service Entity Identifier (PSEI).

Modification via File Based Plan Provisioning is possible althoughtGPRS is already enabled in the cell.

Either Packet Service Entity Identifier (PSEI) or Network ServiceEntity Identifier (NSEI) can be used for identifying NSE layer.

Packet Service Entity Identifier and Network Service EntityIdentifier attributes cannot be present at object creationsimultaneously.



Default value -




Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces . RAC <-> RACApp. BSC <-> RAC

References . 3GPP TS 48.016, 48.018

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Commands EQC, EQV, EQO, FXA, FXI, FXK, FXL

MML Abbreviated Name PSEI

MML Full Name packet service entity identifier


DB Name *) relation


10.99 PAGCH blocks (PAB)

Parameter name PAGCH Blocks

Abbreviated name bsPagingBlocksRes

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the number of blocks on eachPDCH carrying the PCCCH per multiframe where neither packetpaging nor PBCCH should appear. This number correspondstherefore to the number of blocks reserved for PAGCH, PNCH,PDTCH and PACCH. The sum of parameters(bsPagingBlocksRes) and PBB (bsPBCCHBlocks) has to be lessthan 12.



Default value 4



Related functions -


Modified PBCCH TRX must be locked.

Related parameters bsPBCCHBlocks of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: TS 44.060



13/04/2007


MML Abbreviated Name PAB

MML Full Name PAGCH blocks


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.pccch_org_params.bs_pag_blks_res


10.100 PBCCH blocks (PBB)

Parameter name PBCCH Blocks

Abbreviated name bsPBCCHBlocks

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the amount of blocks allocated tothe PBCCH in the multiframe. The sum of parameters PAB(bsPagingBlocksRes) and PBB (bsPBCCHBlocks) has to be lessthan 12.


Formula for getting internal value internal_value = (gui_value - 1)

Default value 3



Related functions -



Related parameters bsPagingBlocksRes of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name PBB

MML Full Name PBCCH blocks


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name base_station.s10_prms.pccch_org_params.bs_pbcch_blks


10.101 penalty time (PET)

Parameter name Penalty Time

Abbreviated name penaltyTime

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the duration for which thetemporary offset (TEO) applies. The parameter can be changed insteps of 20 s. Value 640 s indicates that the sign of the cellreselect offset (REO) parameter will be changed and thetemporary offset (TEO) parameter will be ignored.



Default value 20 s



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name PET

MML Full Name penalty time


DB Name base_station.penalty_time


13/04/2007



10.102 PLMN permitted (PLMN)

Parameter name PLMN Permitted

Abbreviated name plmnPermitted

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 8

Description With this parameter you define to which PLMNs the MS ispermitted to report measurement results. The values relate to theNCC part of the BSICs.

NOTE: MML Range: 0..7



Default value -

Default value notes The BTS own NCC is selected as default


Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name PLMN

MML Full Name PLMN permitted


DB Name base_station.plmn_permitted(0..x)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




10.103 power offset (PO)

Parameter name Power Offset

Abbreviated name powerOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum transmission power aclass 3 GSM 1800 MS may use when accessing the system. Themaximum transmit power is ms txpwr max cch (TXP) + poweroffset (PO).



Default value 0 dBm



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters msTxPwrMaxCCH of BTS


Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name PO

MML Full Name power offset


DB Name base_station.bts_power_offset



13/04/2007


10.104 PRACH blocks (PRB)

Parameter name PRACH Blocks

Abbreviated name bsPRACHBlocks

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the number of blocks reserved ina fixed way to the PRACH channel on any PDCH carrying thePCCCH.



Default value 6



Related functions -






Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name PRB

MML Full Name PRACH blocks


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.pccch_org_params.bs_prach_blks


10.105 prefer BCCH frequency GPRS (BFG)

Parameter name Prefer BCCH Frequency GPRS

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name preferBCCHfreqGPRS2

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the BCCH TRX or otherTRXs are preferred in GPRS channel allocation.

NOTE: MML Range:

0 (no prioritisation is determined between TRXs),

1 (GPRS channels are allocated primarily from the BCCH TRX),

2 (GPRS channels are allocated primarily beyond the BCCH TRX)

Range and step No (0), Yes (1), GPRS channels are allocated beyond the BCCHTRX (2)


No ==> 0

Yes ==> 1

GPRS channels are allocated beyond the BCCH TRX ==> 2

Default value No (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified You can modify the BFG parameter online when the value of theGENA parameter is N. If the value of the GENA parameter is Y,you must lock the BTS before modifying the BFG parameter.

Related parameters trxPriorityInTchAlloc of BTS

Parameter relationships The meaning of this parameter depends on the value of the BTSparameter TRX priority in TCH allocation (TRP)


Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name BFG

MML Full Name prefer BCCH frequency GPRS



13/04/2007


DB Name base_station.gprs_prefer_bcch_freq


10.106 priority class (PRC)

Parameter name Priority Class

Abbreviated name hcsPriorityClass

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the HCS (hierarchical cellstructures) priority for the cells. 0 is the lowest and 7 is the highestpriority.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name PRC

MML Full Name priority class


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.pbcch_priority_class


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.107 queueing priority call (QPC)

Parameter name Queueing Priority Call

Abbreviated name queueingPriorityCall

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the call attempt priority in the BTS.Queueing priority call is one of the queueing type priorities. Theothers are urgent handovers (parameter QPH) and non-urgenthandovers (parameter QPN). Note that you have to define theQPU parameter value as Y before the queueing type priorities aretaken into account.

MML NOTE:

Value 1 is the highest priority.



Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters queuePriorityUsed of BTS


Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name QPC

MML Full Name queueing priority call


DB Name base_station.queue_info.priority_call



13/04/2007


10.108 queueing priority non-urgent handover (QPN)

Parameter name Queueing Priority Non-Urgent Handover

Abbreviated name queuePriorityNonUrgentHo

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the non-urgent handover attempt(queueing type) priority in the BTS. Queueing priority non-urgenthandover is one of the queueing type priorities. The others are:call attempts (parameter QPC) and urgent handovers (parameterQPH). Note that you have to define the QPU parameter value asY before the queueing type priorities are taken into account.

MML NOTE:




Default value 9



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name QPN

MML Full Name queueing priority non-urgent handover


DB Name base_station.queue_pri_non_urg_ho


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.109 queueing priority urgent handover (QPH)

Parameter name Queueing Priority Urgent Handover

Abbreviated name queueingPriorityHandover

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the urgent handover attempt(queueing type) priority in the BTS. Queueing Priority UrgentHandover is one of the queueing type priorities. The others arecall attempts (parameter Queueing Priority Call) and non-urgenthandovers (parameter Queueing Priority non-urgent handover).Note that you have to define the Queue Priority Used parametervalue as Y before the queueing type priorities are taken intoaccount.

MML NOTE:




Default value 9



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name QPH

MML Full Name queueing priority urgent handover


DB Name base_station.queue_info.priority_handover


13/04/2007



10.110 queue priority used (QPU)

Parameter name Queue Priority Used

Abbreviated name queuePriorityUsed

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the BSC internal queueingtype priority (parameters queueing priority call (QPC), queueingpriority urgent handover (QPH) and queueing priority non-urgenthandover (QPN)) is taken into account in queue handling.

Range and step Queue priority is not used (N) (0), Queue priority is used (Y) (1)


Queue priority is not used (N) ==> 0

Queue priority is used (Y) ==> 1

Default value Queue priority is used (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters queuePriorityNonUrgentHo of BTS, queueingPriorityCall of BTS,queueingPriorityHandover of BTS


Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name QPU

MML Full Name queue priority used


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name base_station.queue_info.queue_priority_used


10.111 radio link timeout (RLT)

Parameter name Radio Link Timeout

Abbreviated name radioLinkTimeout

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum value of the radiolink counter expressed in SACCH blocks for non-AMRconnections.

Range and step 4...64 blocks with 4-block steps


Default value 20 blocks



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name RLT

MML Full Name radio link timeout


DB Name base_station.radio_link_timeout


13/04/2007



10.112 ra reselect hysteresis (RRH)

Parameter name RA Reselect Hysteresis

Abbreviated name raReselectHysteresis

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define additional hystereses applied inboth STANDBY and READY states for selecting a cell in adifferent routing area.



Default value 4 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name RRH

MML Full Name ra reselect hysteresis


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gen_cell_select.ra_reselect_hysteresis


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.113 reselection time (RES)

Parameter name Reselection Time

Abbreviated name tResel

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the time in seconds that a mobilestation, which has performed an abnormal release with cellreselection from this cell, is not allowed to reselect this cell ifanother cell is available.

Range and step 5 s (0), 10 s (1), 15 s (2), 20 s (3), 30 s (4), 60 s (5), 120 s (6),300 s (7)


5 s ==> 0

10 s ==> 1

15 s ==> 2

20 s ==> 3

30 s ==> 4

60 s ==> 5

120 s ==> 6

300 s ==> 7

Default value 5 s (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name RES

MML Full Name reselection time



13/04/2007


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gen_cell_select.t_resel


10.114 reservation method used in trunk reservation(REM)

Parameter name Reservation Method Used In Trunk Reservation

Abbreviated name reservationMethod

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define which reservation method of trafficchannels the trunk reservation algorithm uses.

Range and step 0 (dynamic reservation method (DYN)), 1 (static reservationmethod (STAT))


dynamic reservation method (DYN) ==> 0

static reservation method (STAT) ==> 1

Default value dynamic reservation method (DYN) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name REM

MML Full Name reservation method used in trunk reservation

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




DB Name base_station.tr_res_method


10.115 restricted use of priority channels in incominghandover (RUP)

Parameter name Restricted Use Of Priority Channels In Incoming HO

Abbreviated name priorityChUseIncomingHO

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define if the priority channels are availableonly for priority subscribers also in an incoming handover.

NOTE: MML Range:

Y (TCRP-defined number of traffic channels is available only forpriority subscribers also in an incoming handover)

N (all traffic channels are available for all subscribers in anincoming handover)

Default: Y

Range and step Only For Priority Subscriber (0), All Subscribers (1)


Only For Priority Subscriber ==> 0

All Subscribers ==> 1

Default value Only For Priority Subscriber (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


13/04/2007



References -


MML Abbreviated Name RUP

MML Full Name restricted use of priority channels in incoming handover


DB Name base_station.avail_pr_chs_in_ho



Parameter name RAC

Abbreviated name rac

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify GPRS cells using the routing areacode number.

NetAct NOTE: When creating BTS using RAC default value 255the RAC will not be defined for the BTS.



Default value 255



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified Only when the GPRS is disabled.




Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007









DB Name base_station.rac_of_bts


10.117 rxlev access min (RXP)

Parameter name Rxlev Access Min

Abbreviated name rxLevAccessMin

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum power level an MShas to receive before it is allowed to access the cell.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


13/04/2007





MML Abbreviated Name RXP

MML Full Name rxlev access min


DB Name base_station.rxlev_access_min


10.118 scale ord (SCO)

Parameter name Scale Ord

Abbreviated name scaleOrd

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether or not a 10 dB offset shallbe added to the reported downlink signal level, or if the mobilemakes the decision automatically.

Range and step NO (0), scaled by 10 dB (1), AUTOMATIC (2)


NO ==> 0

scaled by 10 dB ==> 1

AUTOMATIC ==> 2

Default value NO (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related options . Support For Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) (67)(optional) OR NC Cell Re-selection (85) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name SCO

MML Full Name scale ord


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.scale_ord


10.119 SEG identification (SEG)

Parameter name Segment ID

Abbreviated name segmentId

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the segment.

NetAct Note:

If Multi BCF is not used, Segment ID is the same as BTS ID. Thisparameter should not have any value in the RAC Templates.

NOTE:


MML NOTE:

MML modification: Not modifiable



Default value -

Default value notes BTS ID


Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online






References

MML Commands Many commands.

MML Abbreviated Name SEG

MML Full Name SEG identification


DB Name base_station.segment.seg_id


10.120 SEG name (SEGNAME)

Parameter name Segment Name

Abbreviated name segmentName

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the segment by its name.

NetAct Note:

If Multi BCF is not used, it is the same as BTS NW Name. Thisparameter should not have any value in the RAC Templates.

NOTE:

MML Default: Same as BTS name

MML modification: Read only



Default value -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces . Planner <-> RAC. RAC <-> BSC. RACApp <-> RAC

References -

MML Commands Many commands

MML Abbreviated Name SEGNAME

MML Full Name SEG name


DB Name base_station.segment.seg_name


10.121 SMS CB used (CB)

Parameter name SMS CB Used

Abbreviated name smsCbUsed

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you allow or deny cell broadcast SMS (shortmessage service) in a cell.

NOTE: If the value is "Y", a CBCH must be defined for the cell.

Range and step SMS CB is not allowed (N) (0), SMS CB is allowed (Y) (1)


SMS CB is not allowed (N) ==> 0

SMS CB is allowed (Y) ==> 1

Default value SMS CB is not allowed (N) (0)



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name CB

MML Full Name SMS CB used


DB Name base_station.sms_cb_used


10.122 Table Identification (TBL)

Parameter name Table Identification

Abbreviated name tableIdentification

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of the trunk reservationdecision threshold table which will be attached to the BTS. Value 0detaches traffic type(s) from any table.

Use value 0 to detach the defined traffic type(s) from alldecisionthreshold tables. In addition, if you have not defined the traffictypes (parameter TT), all traffic types of that BTS are detachedfrom all decision threshold tables.



Default value -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TBL

MML Full Name Table Identification


DB Name


10.123 TCH rate intra-cell handover (TRIH)

Parameter name TCH Rate Intra-Cell Handover

Abbreviated name tchRateIntraCellHo

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you control the TCH channel ratedetermination in TCH allocation and the TCH speech codec to beallocated during internal intra-cell handover.

NOTE: MML Range:

0 (constraints given by the BSS-level parameter TCH rate internalHO are followed)

1 (the call serving type of TCH and the call serving type of speechcodec are preferred to be primarily allocated)

2 (the call serving type of TCH and the call serving type of speechcodec are preferred to be primarily allocated during the speechconnection. The channel rate change is possible during dataconnection when needed if the radio interface data rate allows it)

3 (the channel rate and speech codec changes are totally denied.The call serving type of channel is the only alternative in TCHallocation)

4 (the preferred channel rate of TCH and preferred speech codechave to be primarily allocated)

Range and step No Constraints (0), Actual Rate (1), Data Call (2), No RateChange (3), Preferred Rate (4)


No Constraints ==> 0

Actual Rate ==> 1

Data Call ==> 2

No Rate Change ==> 3

Preferred Rate ==> 4

Default value No Constraints (0)

Default value notes No Constraints


Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Enhanced Full Rate Codec (24) (optional) OR AMR HR (72)(optional) OR Half Rate (17) (optional)

Related features -


References -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name TRIH

MML Full Name TCH rate intra-cell handover


DB Name base_station.tch_rate_intra_cell_ho


10.124 temporary offset (TEO)

Parameter name Temporary Offset

Abbreviated name temporaryOffset

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the negative offset of the C2reselection criterion for the duration of the penalty time (PET) afterthe MS has placed the cell on the list of the strongest carriers. Theparameter can be changed in 10 dB steps. Value 70 dB meansinfinity.



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References . GSM reference: ETS 300 574 (GSM 05.02) ver 4.5.0 6.4


MML Abbreviated Name TEO


13/04/2007


MML Full Name temporary offset


DB Name base_station.temp_offset


10.125 threshold to search WCDMA RAN cells (QSRI)

Parameter name Threshold To Search WCDMA RAN Cells

Abbreviated name qSearchI

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold for dual modemobiles in idle state to search for and to measure WCDMA RANneighbour cells introduced in 3G Cell Reselection list when arunning average of the received downlink signal level (RLA_C) ofthe serving cell is below (0-7) or above (8-15) the threshold. Thisparameter is broadcast only on BCCH.

NOTE:

If the parameter value is 7, dual mode mobiles in idle statemeasure always neighbour WCDMA RAN cell(s). If the parametervalue is 15, dual mode mobiles in idle state do not measure any ofthe neighbour WCDMA RAN cells.

Range and step -98 dBm (0), -94 dBm (1), -90 dBm (2), -86 dBm (3), -82 dBm (4),-78 dBm (RLA_C below) (5), -74 dBm (RLA_C below) (6), Infinity(always) (7), -78 (RLA_C above) (8), -74 (RLA_C above) (9), -70(10), -66 (11), -62 (12), -58 (13), -54 (14), Infinity (never) (15)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




-98 dBm ==> 0

-94 dBm ==> 1

-90 dBm ==> 2

-86 dBm ==> 3

-82 dBm ==> 4

-78 dBm (RLA_C below) ==> 5

-74 dBm (RLA_C below) ==> 6

Infinity (always) ==> 7

-78 (RLA_C above) ==> 8

-74 (RLA_C above) ==> 9

-70 ==> 10

-66 ==> 11

-62 ==> 12

-58 ==> 13

-54 ==> 14

Infinity (never) ==> 15

Default value Infinity (never) (15)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters qSearchP of BTS

Parameter relationships GPRS-capable dual mode MS shall search and measure WCDMARAN neighbour cells according to parameter qSearchP (GPRSthreshold to search WCDMA RAN cells) if PBCCH exists or GPRScell re-selection parameters for one or more cells are sent to theMS in a Packet Cell Change Order or Packet Measurement Ordermessage.


Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP 04.18, 44.018, 05.08


MML Abbreviated Name QSRI

MML Full Name threshold to search WCDMA RAN cells


DB Name base_station.s10_5_prms.qsearch_i


13/04/2007



10.126 time limit call (TLC)

Parameter name Time Limit Call

Abbreviated name timeLimitCall

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum queueing time forcall attempts (incoming or outgoing) in the BTS in seconds. Value0 deactivates call attempt queueing.



Default value 10 s



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name TLC

MML Full Name time limit call


DB Name base_station.queue_info.time_limit_call


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.127 time limit handover (TLH)

Parameter name Time Limit Handover

Abbreviated name timeLimitHandover

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum queueing time forhandover attempts (both urgent and non-urgent) in the BTS inseconds.



Default value 5 s



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name TLH

MML Full Name time limit handover


DB Name base_station.queue_info.time_limit_handover



13/04/2007


10.128 timer for periodic MS location updating (PER)

Parameter name Timer For Periodic MS Location Updating

Abbreviated name timerPeriodicUpdateMs

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the interval between periodic MSlocation updates. The value 0 means that the periodic locationupdate is not used.

Range and step 0...25.5 h, step 0.1 h


Default value 0.5 h



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -




MML Abbreviated Name PER

MML Full Name timer for periodic MS location updating


DB Name base_station.config_cch.timer_periodic_update_ms


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



10.129 traffic types (TT)

Parameter name Traffic Types

Abbreviated name trafficTypesForTrunk

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 10

Description With this parameter you define the specified decision thresholdtable for traffic type(s).

NOTE:

MML range:

Traffic Types:

1 GSM Call Setup

2 MCN Call Setup

3 GSM Handover

4 MCN Handover

5 priority call setup

6 priority handover

7-10



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name TT


13/04/2007


MML Full Name traffic types


DB Name *) relation


10.130 TRHO guard time (TGT)

Parameter name TRHO Guard Time

Abbreviated name amhTrhoGuardTime

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the guard time after a BSC-controlled or an MSC-controlled TRHO, during which a handoverback to the original cell is not allowed.

NOTE:

MML range: 0...120s and N

MML default: N

NOTE:

If a cell-level parameter has some other value than N, it replacesthe corresponding BSC-level parameter.



Default value -1 s



Special value Not defined (-1)

Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amhTrhoGuardTime of BSC


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



References -


MML Abbreviated Name TGT

MML Full Name TRHO guard time


DB Name base_station.s11_prms.trho_guard_time


10.131 trunk reservation used (TR)

Parameter name Trunk Reservation Used

Abbreviated name trunkReservationUsed

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the trunk reservationalgorithm is used in the cell.

Range and step trunk reservation algorithm is not in use (N) (0), trunk reservationalgorithm is in use (Y) (1)


trunk reservation algorithm is not in use (N) ==> 0

trunk reservation algorithm is in use (Y) ==> 1

Default value trunk reservation algorithm is not in use (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -



13/04/2007


References -


MML Abbreviated Name TR

MML Full Name trunk reservation used


DB Name base_station.tr_in_use


10.132 TRX priority in TCH allocation (TRP)

Parameter name TRX Priority In TCH Allocation

Abbreviated name trxPriorityInTchAlloc

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the BCCH TRX or otherTRXs (of the regular frequency area) are preferred in trafficchannel allocation.

Range and step No Priority (0), From BCCH TRX (1), Beyond BCCH TRX (2)


No Priority ==> 0

From BCCH TRX ==> 1

Beyond BCCH TRX ==> 2

Default value No Priority (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




References -


MML Abbreviated Name TRP

MML Full Name TRX priority in TCH allocation


DB Name base_station.trx_pri_tch_alloc


10.133 UL adaption probability threshold (ULA)

Parameter name UL Adaption Probability Threshold

Abbreviated name pcuUlLaRiskLevel

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the allowed probability (%) for thesystem to make a wrong decision in uplink adaptation.



Default value 10 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



13/04/2007


MML Abbreviated Name ULA

MML Full Name UL adaption probability threshold


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_link_adapt_prms.pcu_ul_la_risk_level


10.134 UL BLER crosspoint for CS selection hop (ULBH)

Parameter name UL BLER Crosspoint For CS Selection Hop

Abbreviated name pcuUlBlerCpHopping

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the RLC BLER (block error ratepercentage) for CS-1 channel coding. At this point CS-1 and CS-2give the same effective bit rate and Coding Scheme selectioncriteria in RLC Acknowledged mode for uplink TBFs changes. Theparameter is meaningful only if link adaptation and hopping areused.



Default value 24 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ULBH

MML Full Name UL BLER crosspoint for CS selection hop


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_link_adapt_prms.pcu_ul_bler_cp_hopping


10.135 UL BLER crosspoint for CS selection no hop (ULB)

Parameter name UL BLER Crosspoint For CS Selection No Hop

Abbreviated name pcuUlBlerCpNonHop

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the RLC BLER (block error ratepercentage) for CS-1 channel coding. At this point CS-1 and CS-2give the same effective bit rate and Coding Scheme selectioncriteria in RLC Acknowledged mode for uplink TBFs changes. Theparameter is meaningful only if link adaptation is used in case ofno frequency hopping.



Default value 90 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ULB

MML Full Name UL BLER crosspoint for CS selection no hop


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.gprs_link_adapt_prms.pcu_ul_bler_cp_non_hop


13/04/2007



10.136 upper limit for FR TCH resources (FRU)

Parameter name Upper Limit For FR TCH Resources

Abbreviated name btsSpLoadDepTchRateUpper

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the percentage of full rate TCHresources that must be available for traffic channel allocation. Fullrate TCHs are again allocated when the number of the free fullrate resources increases above the threshold given by theparameter.



Default value 0 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name FRU

MML Full Name upper limit for FR TCH resources


DB Name base_station.bts_sp_load_dep_tch_rate.upper_limit


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


11 Dynamic Abis Pool (DAP) radio networkobject parameters

11.1 BCSU ID (BCSU)

Parameter name BCSU ID

Abbreviated name bcsuID

Managed object DAP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the base station signalling unitlogical index where you want to create the NS-VL.

NOTE:

Either Packet Service Entity Identifier (PSEI) or then BCSU ID &PCU Index can be used as packet control unit identifiers. If BCSUID & PCU Index, which user is given, are changed by the system,event/upload is updating NetAct database.

Range:

Range 0..6 for BSC3i 660


Range 0..8 for other BSCs



Default value -1



Special value Not defined

Related functions -

Modification Online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Dynamic Abis Pool (DAP) radio network object parameters

Related parameters . pcuID of DAP. psei of DAP

Parameter relationships If psei parameter is given, this parameter cannot be given.

If this parameter is given, pcuID parameter is obligatory.

Related options . Dynamic Abis (54) (optional) AND (Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS)Usage (51) (optional) OR Coding Schemes CS-3 And CS-4 (83)(optional))


Interfaces . BSC -> RAC. RACApp <-> RAC

References -

MML Commands ESE, ESM

MML Abbreviated Name BCSU

MML Full Name BCSU ID

DB Name dap.pcu_address_info.pcu_bcsu_log_add


11.2 circuit (CRCT)

Parameter name Circuit

Abbreviated name circuit

Managed object DAP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description The parameter defines the Abis interface ET-PCM number and thetime slots reserved from the ET-PCM for the dynamic Abis pool.The pool size is from 1 to 24 ET-PCM TSLs.

Note:

If both firstTSL and lastTSL parameters are given, then the valueof firstTSL must always be equal or smaller than the value oflastTSL.

Parameter dictionary:

NetAct use parameters: pcmCircuit-ID, firstTSL, lastTSL

Range:

CRCT PCM: 0..3391

CRT TSLs: in ETSI 1 ..31, in ANSI 1..24

NOTE:

2048..3391 is reserved for OC-3/T1 administration area

NOTE:

NO NetAct interface.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Dynamic Abis (54) (optional) AND ( Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS)Usage (51) (optional) OR Coding Schemes CS-3 And CS-4 (83)(optional) )

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ESC, ESE, ESM, ESI

MML Abbreviated Name CRCT

MML Full Name circuit

DB Name


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



11.3 new first time slot (NFT)

Parameter name New First Time Slot

Abbreviated name newFirstTimeSlot

Managed object DAP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the new first time slot. The timeslots are entered as time slot numbers. By entering a numbersmaller than the first time slot you add the time slot(s) to thebeginning of the pool. By entering a number bigger than the firsttime slot you remove time slot(s) from the beginning of the pool.

NOTE: NO NetAct interface.



Default value -



Special value -

Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters DAP-firstTSL

Parameter relationships By using newFirstTimeSlot you modify the original firstTSL.

Related options Dynamic Abis (54) (optional) AND ( Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS)Usage (51) (optional) OR Coding Schemes CS-3 And CS-4 (83)(optional) )

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ESM

MML Abbreviated Name NFT

MML Full Name new first time slot

DB Name



13/04/2007


11.4 new last time slot (NLT)

Parameter name New Last Time Slot

Abbreviated name newLastTimeSlot

Managed object DAP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the new last time slot. The timeslots are entered as time slot numbers. By entering a numberbigger than the last time slot you add time slot(s) to end of thepool. By entering a number smaller than the last time slot youremove time slot(s) from the end of the pool.




Default value -



Special value -

Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters DAP-lastTSL

Parameter relationships By using newLastTimeSlot you modify the original lastTSL.


Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ESM

MML Abbreviated Name NLT

MML Full Name new last time slot

DB Name


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object DAP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




NOTE:

Either Packet Service Entity Identifier (PSEI) or then BCSU ID &PCU Index can be used as packet control unit identifiers.



Default value -




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Dynamic Abis (54) (optional) AND Gb Over IP (82) (optional)AND ( Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS) Usage (51) (optional) ORCoding Schemes CS-3 And CS-4 (83) (optional) )


Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ESE, ESM






13/04/2007


11.6 PCU index (PCU)

Parameter name PCU Index

Abbreviated name pcuID

Managed object DAP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter identifies a controlling PCU (Packet Control Unit)which handles the dynamic Abis Pool in BSC.

NOTE: Parameter old Full name has been PCU ID.

Either Packet Service Entity Identifier (PSEI) or then BCSU ID &PCU Index can be used as packet control unit identifiers. If BCSUID & PCU Index, which user is given, are changed by the system,event/upload is updating NetAct database.



Default value -1



Special value Not defined

Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters . bcsuID of DAP. psei of DAP

Parameter relationships If this parameter is given, bcsuID parameter is obligatory.

If psei parameter is given, this parameter cannot be given.


Related features -

Interfaces . BSC -> RAC. RACApp <-> RAC

References -

MML Commands ESE, ESM, FXA

MML Abbreviated Name PCU

MML Full Name PCU index

DB Name dap.pcu_address_info.pcu_index


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



11.7 pool identification (ID)

Parameter name DAP ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object DAP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter identifies the Dynamic Abis Pool in a BSC. Theidentification number must be unique within the BSC.



Default value -




Related functions -






Interfaces -

References

MML Commands ESE, ESG, ESM, ESI

MML Abbreviated Name ID

MML Full Name pool identification




13/04/2007


11.8 pool size (SIZE)

Parameter name Pool Size

Abbreviated name poolSize

Managed object DAP

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Pool size. The minimum poolsize is 3.




Default value -



Special value -

Related functions -

Modification Unmodifiable




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ESE


MML Full Name pool size

DB Name


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


12 GPRS control (GPC) radio networkobject parameters

12.1 NCCR number of zero results (NNZR)

Parameter name NCCR Number Of Zero Results

Abbreviated name nccrNumberZeroResults

Managed object GPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the number of zero results thatcan be omitted when the measurement results of the adjacentcells are averaged in RR Packet transfer mode and RR Packetidle mode.

This parameter is valid only for GSM neighbours cells. Instead ofusing this parameter for WCDMA FDD neighbour cellmeasurement averaging, all zero results are omitted in WCDMAFDD neighbour cell measurement averaging.



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . NC Cell Re-selection (85) (optional) AND BSC GPRS ParamEnabled (GPRS O&M in BSC) (39) (optional)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


GPRS control (GPC) radio network object parameters


Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EQN, EQO

MML Abbreviated Name NNZR

MML Full Name NCCR number of zero results

DB Name gpc.nccr_params.nc_no_of_zero_res


12.2 NCCR other PCU cell offset (NOPO)

Parameter name NCCR Other PCU Cell Offset

Abbreviated name nccrOtherPcuCellOffset

Managed object GPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the used offset for power budgetNCCR criterion of the neighbor cells under control of a differentPCU than the serving cell.



Default value 4 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name NOPO

MML Full Name NCCR other PCU cell offset

DB Name gpc.nccr_params.nc_other_pcu_co


12.3 NCCR rxlev idle mode window size (NRIW)

Parameter name NCCR Rxlev Idle Mode Window Size

Abbreviated name nccrRxlevIdleWinSize

Managed object GPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the window size when theNetwork Control (NC) measurement results of the adjacent cellsare averaged in RR Packet idle mode.



Default value 5



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name NRIW

MML Full Name NCCR rxlev idle mode window size

DB Name gpc.nccr_params.nc_rxlev_i_win_size

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




12.4 NCCR rxlev transfer mode window size (NRTW)

Parameter name NCCR Rxlev Transfer Mode Window Size

Abbreviated name nccrRxlevTraWinSize

Managed object GPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the window size when theNetwork Control (NC) measurement results of the adjacent cellsare averaged in RR Packet transfer mode.



Default value 5



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name NRTW

MML Full Name NCCR rxlev transfer mode window size

DB Name gpc.nccr_params.nc_rxlev_t_win_size



13/04/2007


12.5 QC EGPRS DL RLC ack throughput threshold(QEDRT)

Parameter name Quality Control EGPRS DL RLC Ack Throughput Threshold

Abbreviated name qcTputThrModes_egprsDlRlcAckMode

Managed object GPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a threshold to trigger QC actionsfor acknowledged mode downlink TBF.






Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QEDRT

MML Full Name QC EGPRS DL RLC ack throughput threshold

DB Name gpc.eqos_params.qc_tput_thr_modes.egprs_dl_rlc_ack_mode


12.6 QC EGPRS UL RLC ack throughput threshold(QEURT)

Parameter name Quality Control EGPRS UL RLC Ack Throughput Threshold

Abbreviated name qcTputThrModes_egprsUlRlcAckMode

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object GPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a threshold to trigger QC actionsfor acknowledged mode uplink TBF.






Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QEURT

MML Full Name QC EGPRS UL RLC ack throughput threshold

DB Name gpc.eqos_params.qc_tput_thr_modes.egprs_ul_rlc_ack_mode


12.7 QC GPRS DL RLC ack throughput (QGDRT)

Parameter name Quality Control GPRS DL RLC Ack Throughput Threshold

Abbreviated name qcTputThrModes_gprsDlRlcAckMode

Managed object GPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a threshold to trigger QC actionsfor acknowledged mode downlink TBF.



13/04/2007






Related functions -

Modification online





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QGDRT

MML Full Name QC GPRS DL RLC ack throughput

DB Name gpc.eqos_params.qc_tput_thr_modes.gprs_dl_rlc_ack_mode


12.8 QC GPRS UL RLC ack throughput (QGURT)

Parameter name Quality Control GPRS UL RLC Ack Throughput Threshold

Abbreviated name qcTputThrModes_gprsUlRlcAckMode

Managed object GPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a threshold to trigger QC actionsfor acknowledged mode uplink TBF.






Related functions -

Modification online

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007







Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QGURT

MML Full Name QC GPRS UL RLC ack throughput

DB Name gpc.eqos_params.qc_tput_thr_modes.gprs_ul_rlc_ack_mode



13/04/2007


13 Handover control (HOC) radio networkobject parameters

13.1 800 reporting offset (R8)

Parameter name 800 Reporting Offset

Abbreviated name reportingOffset

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you apply an offset to the reported value whenprioritising GSM 800 cells for reporting.

NOTE:

MML RANGE: 0..7 (0 dB…42 dB, with 6 dB step)


Formula for getting internal value internal_value = gui_value/6

Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification online



Related options . Support For Enhanced Measurement Report (EMR) (67)

OR. NC Cell Re-selection (85) (optional)

Related features . 3GPP Reference: 45.008 (public). 3GPP Reference: 44.018 (public)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Handover control (HOC) radio network object parameters

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHN, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name R8

MML Full Name 800 reporting offset

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.gsm_850_rep_params.gsm_rep_850_offset


13.2 800 reporting threshold (RT8)

Parameter name 800 Reporting Threshold

Abbreviated name reportingThreshold

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you apply priority reporting if the reportedsignal level of the GSM 800 band neighbouring cell is above thethreshold.

Range and step Always (0), 6 dB (1), 12 dB (2), 18 dB (3), 24 dB (4), 30 dB (5), 36dB (6), Never (7)


Default value Always (0)



Related functions -

Modification online






Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name RT8

MML Full Name 800 reporting threshold

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.gsm_850_rep_params.gsm_rep_850_threshold





Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:




Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification online






Interfaces -

References -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007










Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Related functions -

Modification online






Interfaces -

References -





13/04/2007







Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:




Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification online






Interfaces -

References -





DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007







Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Related functions -

Modification online






Interfaces -

References -







13/04/2007





Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:




Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification online






Interfaces -

References -






DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Related functions -

Modification online






Interfaces -

References -







13/04/2007


13.9 adjacent cell averaging window size (AWS)

Parameter name Adjacent Cell Averaging Window Size

Abbreviated name averagingWindowSizeAdjCell

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the window size for averaging thesignal quality, signal level and distance measurement results.

NOTE: Units: SACCH Periods



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AWS

MML Full Name adjacent cell averaging window size

DB Name handover_control.averaging_window_size_adj_cell


13.10 adjacent WCDMA RAN cell averaging window size(UAWS)

Parameter name Adjacent WCDMA RAN Cell Averaging Window Size

Abbreviated name utranAveragingNumber

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the window size for averaging thesignal quality, signal level and distance measurement results thatare adjacent WCDMA RAN cell related.

NOTE: Units: SACCH periods



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHN, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name UAWS

MML Full Name adjacent WCDMA RAN cell averaging window size

DB Name handover_control.utran_averaging_number


13.11 all adjacent cells averaged (AAC)

Parameter name All Adjacent Cells Averaged

Abbreviated name allAdjacentCellsAveraged

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you indicate whether the signal measurementresults will be averaged for all adjacent cells, or only for the sixbest adjacent cells.

Range and step the six best adjacent cells (N) (0), all adjacent cells (Y) (1)


the six best adjacent cells (N) ==> 0

all adjacent cells (Y) ==> 1

Default value the six best adjacent cells (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AAC

MML Full Name all adjacent cells averaged

DB Name handover_control.all_adjacent_cells_averaged


13.12 all adjacent WCDMA RAN cells averaged (UAAC)

Parameter name All Adjacent WCDMA RAN Cells Averaged

Abbreviated name allUtranAdjAver

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the signal measurementresults will be averaged for all adjacent WCDMA RAN cells, oronly for the three best adjacent WCDMA RAN cells.

Range and step the three best RAN cells (N) (0), all adjacent WCDMA RAN cells(Y) (1)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




the three best RAN cells (N) ==> 0

all adjacent WCDMA RAN cells (Y) ==> 1

Default value the three best RAN cells (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UAAC

MML Full Name all adjacent WCDMA RAN cells averaged

DB Name handover_control.all_utran_adj_aver


13.13 all interfering cells averaged (AVER)

Parameter name All Interfering Cells Averaged

Abbreviated name allInterfCellsAveraged

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether measurement results willbe averaged for all interfering cells (value Y), or only for thoseinterfering cells which are among the six best neighbouring cellsreceived in the last measurement result message (value N).

NOTE: MML Range:

Y (measurement results are averaged for all interfering cells)

N (measurement results are averaged for the cells that are amongthe six best neighbouring cells)

Default: N


13/04/2007







Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHY, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name AVER

MML Full Name all interfering cells averaged

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_all_aver


13.14 AMH traffic control IUO (ATCI)

Parameter name AMH Traffic Control IUO

Abbreviated name amhTrafficControlIUO

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the Advanced MultilayerHandling is used with Intelligent Underlay-Overlay.

Range and step method is not used (N) (0), method is used (Y) (1)


method is not used (N) ==> 0

method is used (Y) ==> 1

Default value method is not used (N) (0)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHG, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name ATCI

MML Full Name AMH traffic control IUO

DB Name handover_control.amh_traf_ctrl_iuo_used


13.15 AMH traffic control MCN (ATCM)

Parameter name AMH Traffic Control MCN

Abbreviated name amhTrafficControlMCN

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the Advanced MultilayerHandling is used with micro cells or dual band.

Range and step method is not used (N) (0), method is used (Y) (1)


method is not used (N) ==> 0

method is used (Y) ==> 1

Default value method is not used (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online


13/04/2007





Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ATCM

MML Full Name AMH traffic control MCN

DB Name handover_control.amh_traf_ctrl_mcn_used


13.16 AMH TRHO pbgt margin (ATPM)

Parameter name AMH TRHO PBGT Margin

Abbreviated name amhTrhoPbgtMargin

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the power budget margin used inAdvance Multilayer Handling when the load of the cell exceeds thevalue defined with the AMH Upper Load Threshold (AUT).

Range and step -24...24 dBm, step 1 dBm



Default value notes


Special value 255 (not active (N))

Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters amhUpperLoadThreshold of BSC



Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ATPM

MML Full Name AMH TRHO pbgt margin

DB Name handover_control.amh_trho_pbgt_marg


13.17 C/I estimation method

Parameter name C/I Estimation Method

Abbreviated name ciEstMethod

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the C/I estimation method, whichis used for calculating the co-channel interference level of thehandover candidate.

NOTE: MML RANGE:

1 AVE (average taking method used),

2 MAX (maximum taking method used),

0 NONE (estimation methods not in use)

Range and step NONE (0), AVE (1), MAX (2)


NONE ==> 0

AVE ==> 1

MAX ==> 2

Default value NONE (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online





13/04/2007


Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHX, EHO


MML Full Name C/I estimation method

DB Name handover_control.hoc_ci_est.ci_est_method


13.18 count of successive rapid field drop thresholds(CNT)

Parameter name Count Of Successive Rapid Field Drop Thresholds

Abbreviated name hoThresholdsRapidLevUlN

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how many successive rapid fielddrop thresholds have to be triggered before a call will be handedover to a chained adjacent cell.



Default value 0

Default value notes disabled


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHS, EHO

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name CNT

MML Full Name count of successive rapid field drop thresholds

DB Name handover_control.ho_th_rapid_lev_ul_n


13.19 deep dropping EDGE monitoring window (ERMW)

Parameter name Deep Dropping EDGE Monitoring Window

Abbreviated name ddeWindow

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of SACCH frames thatthe deep dropping edge is checked against.

NOTE: Units: SACCH frames



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ERMW

MML Full Name deep dropping EDGE monitoring window

DB Name handover_control.dde_window



13/04/2007


13.20 enable enhanced rapid field drop (ERFD)

Parameter name Enable Enhanced Rapid Field Drop

Abbreviated name erfdEnabled

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate when the Enhanced Rapid FieldDrop feature is enabled.

NOTE: MML RANGE:

DIS (enhanced rapid field drop is disabled),

UL (rapid field drop detection is based on uplink measurements),

DL (rapid field drop detection is based on downlinkmeasurements),

UDL (rapid field drop detection is based on both uplink anddownlink measurements)

Range and step Not Used (0), Based On UL Meas (1), Based On DL Meas (2),Based On UL And DL Meas (3)


Not Used ==> 0

Based On UL Meas ==> 1

Based On DL Meas ==> 2

Based On UL And DL Meas ==> 3




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Enhanced Rapid Field Drop (28) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ERFD

MML Full Name enable enhanced rapid field drop

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name handover_control.erfd_enabled


13.21 enable fast averaging call setup (EFA)

Parameter name Enable Fast Averaging Call Setup

Abbreviated name enaFastAveCallSetup

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the Fast HandoverMeasurement Averaging Method is enabled in the call setup phasein the SDCCH channel.

Range and step method is disabled (N) (0), method is enabled (Y) (1)


method is disabled (N) ==> 0

method is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value method is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EFA

MML Full Name enable fast averaging call setup

DB Name handover_control.ena_fast_ave_call_set



13/04/2007


13.22 enable fast averaging HO (EFH)

Parameter name Enable Fast Averaging HO

Abbreviated name enaFastAveHo

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the Fast HandoverMeasurement Averaging Method is enabled after handovers and inthe new TCH.








Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EFH

MML Full Name enable fast averaging HO

DB Name handover_control.ena_fast_ave_ho


13.23 enable fast averaging PC (EFP)

Parameter name Enable Fast Averaging PC

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name enaFastAvePc

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the Fast HandoverMeasurement Averaging Method after power control is enabled.








Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EFP

MML Full Name enable fast averaging PC

DB Name handover_control.ena_fast_ave_pc


13.24 enable inter FRT handover (EFHO)

Parameter name Enable Inter FRT Handover

Abbreviated name enableInterFrtIuoHo

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you indicate whether a handover betweensuper-reuse frequency groups is enabled in situations when ahandover to a regular TRX is not possible.

NOTE:

MML Range:

REG (handover between super-reuse frequency groups isenabled, but a handover back to a regular frequency group isalways preferable (1)),

SUP (handover between super-reuse frequency groups is enabledand it is preferable in case of bad C/I ratio (2)),

DIS (handover between super-reuse frequency groups is disabled(0))

Range and step 0 (disabled), 1 (enabled), 2 (priority)


disabled ==> 0

enabled ==> 1

priority ==> 2

Default value disabled (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EFHO

MML Full Name enable inter FRT handover

DB Name handover_control.inter_frt_iuo_ho


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.25 enable intracell handover interference DL (EIH)

Parameter name Enable Intracell Handover Interference DL

Abbreviated name enableIntraHoDl

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether an intracell handovercaused by downlink interference is enabled. The parameter doesnot affect handovers between normal and extended areas.

NetAct NOTE: If this parameter is True, Enable Intracell HO andEnable Intracell HO UL must be False.

NOTE: MML default: Y

Range and step handover control is disabled (N) (0), handover control is enabled(Y) (1)


handover control is disabled (N) ==> 0

handover control is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value handover control is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EIH

MML Full Name enable intracell handover interference DL

DB Name handover_control.enable_bss_ho_control



13/04/2007


13.26 enable intracell handover interference UL (EIC)

Parameter name Enable Intracell Handover Interference UL

Abbreviated name enableIntraHoUl

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether an intracell handovercaused by uplink interference is enabled. The parameter does notaffect handovers between normal and extended areas.

NetAct NOTE: If this parameter is True, Enable Intracell HO andEnable Intracell HO DL must be False.

NOTE:

MML default: Y





Default value handover control is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EIC

MML Full Name enable intracell handover interference UL



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.27 enable MS distance process (EMS)

Parameter name Enable MS Distance Process

Abbreviated name enableMsDistance

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the BTS - MS distanceprocess is enabled.

NOTE: If “Y” check the MS Distance Behaviour parameter (a BSCspecific parameter).

Range and step distance process is disabled (N) (0), distance process is enabled(Y) (1)


distance process is disabled (N) ==> 0

distance process is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value distance process is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters msDistanceBehaviour of BSC


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EMS

MML Full Name enable MS distance process




13/04/2007


13.28 enable power budget handover (EPB)

Parameter name Enable Power Budget Handover

Abbreviated name enablePowerBudgetHo

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the BTS power budgethandover control is enabled.





Default value handover control is enabled (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EPB

MML Full Name enable power budget handover



13.29 enable SDCCH handover (ESD)

Parameter name Enable SDCCH Handover

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name enableSddchHandover

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the BTS SDCCHhandover is enabled.

Range and step handover is disabled (N) (0), handover is enabled (Y) (1)


handover is disabled (N) ==> 0

handover is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value handover is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . SDCCH Handover (5) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ESD

MML Full Name enable SDCCH handover



13.30 enable TCH assignment super IUO (ETA)

Parameter name Enable TCH Assignment Super IUO

Abbreviated name enaTchAssSuperIuo

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you indicate whether the TCH assignment to asuper-reuse TRX is enabled in IUO and what the BSIC (BaseStation Identity Code) decoding time in SDCCH is.

NOTE:

The value zero means that TCH assignment to super-reuse TRXis disabled.




Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) AND Directed Retry(1) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ETA

MML Full Name enable TCH assignment super IUO

DB Name handover_control.ena_tch_ass_iuo


13.31 enable umbrella handover (EUM)

Parameter name Enable Umbrella Handover

Abbreviated name enableUmbrellaHo

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the BTS umbrellahandover is enabled.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Range and step handover is disabled (N) (0), handover is enabled (Y) (1)


handover is disabled (N) ==> 0

handover is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value handover is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name EUM

MML Full Name enable umbrella handover



13.32 enhanced rapid field drop duration (ERD)

Parameter name Enhanced Rapid Field Drop Duration

Abbreviated name erfdOver

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how long the modified averagingwindow is being used after the deep dropping edge in serving cellsignal is detected.



Default value 10 s



13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ERD

MML Full Name enhanced rapid field drop duration

DB Name handover_control.erfd_over


13.33 FDD reporting offset (FR)

Parameter name FDD Reporting Offset


Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you apply an offset to the reported value whenprioritising FDD cells for reporting.

NOTE:







Related functions -

Modification online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007







Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FR

MML Full Name FDD reporting offset

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.gsm_fdd_rep_params.gsm_fdd_rep_offset


13.34 FDD reporting threshold (FRT)

Parameter name FDD Reporting Threshold


Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you apply priority reporting if the reportedmeasurement quantity of the neighbouring cell of the FDD accesstechnology is above the threshold.






Related functions -

Modification online




13/04/2007





Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FRT

MML Full Name FDD reporting threshold

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.gsm_fdd_rep_params.gsm_fdd_rep_threshold


13.35 GSM PLMN priorisation (GPP)

Parameter name GSM PLMN Priorisation

Abbreviated name gsmPlmnPriorisation

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a preference order for handovertarget GSM cells according to PLMN area.

NOTE: Used only for CS handovers.

NOTE: MML RANGE:

0 (PLMN area based prioritisation is not used), 1 (Intra-PLMNintra-GSM handovers have higher priority than Inter-PLMN intra-GSM handovers), 2 (Inter-PLMN intra-GSM handovers have higherpriority than Intra-PLMN intra-GSM handovers)

Range and step Not Used (0), Own (1), Outer (2)


Not Used ==> 0

Own ==> 1

Outer ==> 2



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GPP

MML Full Name GSM PLMN priorisation

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.gsm_plmn_priority


13.36 handover period power budget (HPP)

Parameter name Handover Period Power Budget

Abbreviated name hoPeriodPbgt

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the interval between power budgethandover threshold comparisons.




Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online




13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HPP

MML Full Name handover period power budget

DB Name handover_control.ho_period_pbgt


13.37 handover period umbrella (HPU)

Parameter name Handover Period Umbrella

Abbreviated name hoPeriodUmbrella

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the interval between umbrellahandover threshold comparisons.




Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name HPU

MML Full Name handover period umbrella

DB Name handover_control.ho_period_umbrella


13.38 inter-system direct access enabled (IDE)

Parameter name Inter-System Direct Access Enabled

Abbreviated name interSystemDa

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you enable or disable the Inter-System DirectAccess to the WCDMA RAN. If the value of the parameter is Yes,the Inter-System Direct Access to the WCDMA RAN is tried first.

NOTE: MML RANGE:

Y (Inter-System Direct Access to the WCDMA RAN is enabled)

N (Inter-System Direct Access to the WCDMA RAN is disabled)

Default: N






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IDE


13/04/2007


MML Full Name inter-system direct access enabled

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.inter_system_da


13.39 interfering cell averaging window size (SIZE)

Parameter name Interfering Cell Averaging Window Size

Abbreviated name intfCellAvgWindowSize

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the window size, that is, thenumber of consecutive measurement samples for calculatingaveraged values from downlink (interfering cell) signal strengthmeasurements for the C/I evaluation procedure.




Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name interfering cell averaging window size

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_aver


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.40 interfering cell number of zero results (ZERO)

Parameter name Interfering Cell Number Of Zero Results

Abbreviated name intfCellNbrOfZeroResults

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the number of zero results whichcan be omitted when measurement results of the interfering cellsare being averaged for the C/I evaluation procedure.




Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ZERO

MML Full Name interfering cell number of zero results

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_zero_res


13.41 intra HO threshold Rx qual AMR FR (IHRF)

Parameter name Intra HO Threshold Rx Qual AMR FR

Abbreviated name amrHoFrInHoThrDlRxQual


13/04/2007


Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the signalquality downlink and uplink measurements for triggering the intra-cell handover process for an AMR FR call in order to switch it toan AMR HR call.

NOTE:

MML range:

0...7, default 0

NOTE:

NetAct managed object class: BTS

MML managed object class: HOC

Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7

Default value < 0.2% (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHB, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name IHRF

MML Full Name intra HO threshold Rx qual AMR FR

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_handover.rx_qual_intra_ho


13.42 Intra HO threshold Rx qual AMR HR (IHRH)

Parameter name AMR Handover HR Intra Threshold DL Rx Qual

Abbreviated name amrHoHrInHoThrDlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the signalquality downlink and uplink measurements for triggering the intra-cell handover process for an AMR HR call in order to switch it toan AMR FR call.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7

Default value 1.6% - 3.2% (4)



Related functions -

Modification Online




13/04/2007



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHB, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name IHRH

MML Full Name Intra HO threshold Rx qual AMR HR

DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_handover.rx_qual_intra_ho


13.43 invalid BSIC reporting (IBR)

Parameter name Invalid BSIC Reporting

Abbreviated name invalidBsicReporting

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate if GSM cells with invalid BSIC butallowed NCC part may be reported in the Enhanced MeasurementReport.

NOTE: MML RANGE:

0: Report on cells with invalid BSIC and allowed NCC part of BSICis not allowed,

1: Report on cells with invalid BSIC and allowed NCC part of BSICis allowed






Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name IBR

MML Full Name invalid BSIC reporting

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.invalid_bsic_rep


13.44 level downlink weighting (LDW)

Parameter name Level Downlink Weighting

Abbreviated name hoAvaragingLevDLWeighting

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting factor for calculatingthe averaged values from the signal strength downlinkmeasurements for the handover control.

This parameter indicates the weighting factor for measurementsthat have not used Discontinuous Transmission (DTX).

NOTE:

Value 1 indicates the DTX measurements weighting factor.

Value 3 indicates the highest weighting factor.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online




13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHA, EHC, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name LDW

MML Full Name level downlink weighting

DB Name handover_control.ho_averaging_lev_dl.weighting


13.45 level downlink window size (LDWS)

Parameter name Level Downlink Window Size

Abbreviated name hoAvaragingLevDlWindowSize

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters calculate averaged values from signal strengthdownlink measurements. The window size represents theaveraging window size in SACCH periods.




Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name LDWS

MML Full Name level downlink window size

DB Name handover_control.ho_averaging_lev_dl.window_size


13.46 level uplink weighting (LUW)

Parameter name Level Uplink Weighting

Abbreviated name hoAveragingLevUlWeighting

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting factor for calculatingthe averaged values from the signal strength uplink measurementsfor the handover control.


NOTE:





Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LUW


13/04/2007


MML Full Name level uplink weighting

DB Name handover_control.ho_averaging_lev_ul.weighting


13.47 level uplink window size (LUWS)

Parameter name Level Uplink Window Size

Abbreviated name hoAveragingLevUlWindowSize

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters calculate averaged values from signal strengthuplink measurements. The window size represents the averagingwindow size in SACCH periods.




Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LUWS

MML Full Name level uplink window size

DB Name handover_control.ho_averaging_lev_ul.window_size


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.48 lower C/I limit for band 1-6 (L1-L6)

Parameter name Lower C/I Limit For Band 1-6

Abbreviated name lowerCiLimit

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 6

Description With these parameters you define the estimated co-channelinterference level for each of the 6 interference bands. Thisinterference level is compared to the co-channel interference levelparameter of the handover candidate to find out the priorityadjustment step used.

NOTE:

Range:

Default values for lower C/I limit for band L1-L6:

L1: 30

L2: 25

L3: 20

L4: 17

L5: 13

L6: 9



Default value 30 dB

Default value notes


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHX, EHO


MML Full Name lower C/I limit for band 1-6


13/04/2007


DB Name handover_control.hoc_ci_est.band_limits_steps.lower_ci_limit


13.49 lower speed limit (LSL)

Parameter name Lower Speed Limit

Abbreviated name lowerSpeedLimit

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the lower speed threshold for anMS. If the speed of the MS is lower than this threshold, the MSwill be handed over to a lower layer adjacent cell (if any). Oneparameter step equals the speed of 2 km/h. If the value is zero,then the lower speed verifying will not be made.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHP, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name LSL

MML Full Name lower speed limit

DB Name handover_control.lower_speed_limit


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.50 minimum BSIC decode time (TIM)

Parameter name Minimum BSIC Decode Time

Abbreviated name minBsicDecodeTime

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the period after a call set-up ora handover during which the handover to a super-reuse TRX isnot possible.




Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name TIM

MML Full Name minimum BSIC decode time

DB Name handover_control.min_bsic_decode_time


13.51 min int between HO req (MIH)

Parameter name Min Int Between HO Req

Abbreviated name minIntBetweenHoReq


13/04/2007


Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum interval betweenhandovers related to the same connection.



Default value 5 s



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MIH

MML Full Name min int between HO req

DB Name handover_control.min_int_between_ho_req


13.52 min int between unsucc HO attempt (MIU)

Parameter name Min Int Between Unsucc HO Attempt

Abbreviated name minIntBetweenUnsuccHoAttempt

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum interval betweenunsuccessful handover attempts related to the same connection.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 3 s



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MIU

MML Full Name min int between unsucc HO attempt

DB Name handover_control.min_int_between_unsucc_attempt


13.53 min interval between IUO HO req BQ (MIR)

Parameter name Min Interval Between IUO HO Req BQ

Abbreviated name minIntIuoHoReqBQ

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum time for handoverattempt from a regular TRX to a super-reuse TRX. This minimuminterval is calculated after a successful HO from this particularsuper-reuse TRX to a regular TRX, when there has been a badquality experience in this super-reuse TRX.



Default value 10



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MIR

MML Full Name min interval between IUO HO req BQ

DB Name handover_control.min_int_iuo_ho_req_bq


13.54 min interval between unsucc ISHO attempt (UMIU)

Parameter name Min Interval Between Unsucc ISHO Attempt

Abbreviated name minIntUnsuccIsHo

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum length of time intervalbetween inter-system handover attempts related to the sameconnection and the same non-GSM cell when a handover attemptfrom the serving GSM cell to a non-GSM cell has beenunsuccessful.



Default value 3 s



Related functions -

Modification Online




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UMIU

MML Full Name min interval between unsucc ISHO attempt

DB Name handover_control.min_int_unsucc_is_ho


13.55 min interval between unsucc IUO HO (MIO)

Parameter name Min Interval Between Unsucc IUO HO

Abbreviated name minIntUnsuccIuoHo

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the length of time intervalbetween handover attempts when a HO attempt from a regularTRX to a super-reuse TRX has failed.



Default value 20



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MIO

MML Full Name min interval between unsucc IUO HO


13/04/2007


DB Name handover_control.min_int_unsucc_iuo_ho


13.56 min traffic load for speech call (LTSC)

Parameter name Min Traffic Load For Speech Call

Abbreviated name utranHoThScTpdc

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum traffic load that mustbe exceeded on the serving GSM cell before the handoveralgorithm is allowed to initiate a handover for a speech call fromthe serving GSM cell to a WCDMA RAN cell.



Default value 80 %

Default value notes % of serving GSM cell's total traffic capacity


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LTSC

MML Full Name min traffic load for speech call

DB Name handover_control.utran_ho_th_sc_tpdc


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.57 modified averaging window (ERAW)

Parameter name Modified Averaging Window

Abbreviated name modifiedAveWinNCell

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the new averaging window size ofthe serving cell and adjacent cell. A new averaging window isemployed after the deep dropping edge in serving cell signal isdetected.



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ERAW

MML Full Name modified averaging window

DB Name handover_control.mod_ave_win_ncell


13.58 modified number of zero results (ERZ)

Parameter name Modified Number Of Zero Results

Abbreviated name modifiedNoz


13/04/2007


Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the new number of zero resultsafter the deep dropping edge in serving cell signal is detected.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ERZ

MML Full Name modified number of zero results

DB Name handover_control.mod_noz


13.59 MS distance averaging window size (MSWS)

Parameter name MS Distance Averaging Window Size

Abbreviated name msDistanceAveragingParamHreqave

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is the averaging parameter for triggering thehandover process because the MS is out of the cell boundary.With this parameter you define the number of SACCH multiframesover which the averaging is done.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHD, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name MSWS

MML Full Name MS distance averaging window size

DB Name handover_control.ms_distance_averaging_par.hreqave


13.60 MS distance HO threshold ext cell max (MAX)

Parameter name MS Distance HO Threshold Ext Cell Max

Abbreviated name maxMsDistanceHoThreshold

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level for themaximum value of timing advance. If this threshold is reached, thecall is handed over to an extended area of an extended cell in thecase of the Nokia Talk-family and Nokia UltraSite type, and to anouter cell or another cell in the case of the Nokia 2nd generationsite type.



Default value 63



13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MAX

MML Full Name MS distance HO threshold ext cell max

DB Name handover_control.max_ms_dist_ho_th.timing_advance


13.61 MS distance ho threshold ext cell min (MIN)

Parameter name MS Distance HO Threshold Ext Cell Min

Abbreviated name minMsDistanceHoThreshold

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of minimumvalue of timing advance. If this threshold is reached, the call ishanded over to a normal area of an extended cell in the case ofthe Nokia Talk-family and Nokia UltraSite type, and to an inner oranother cell in the case of the Nokia 2nd generation site type.



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MIN

MML Full Name MS distance ho threshold ext cell min

DB Name handover_control.min_ms_dist_ho_th.timing_advance


13.62 MS distance threshold param MS max range (MSR)

Parameter name MS Distance Threshold Param MS Max Range

Abbreviated name msDistanceHoThresholdParamMsRangeMax

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the MS-BS distance with the maximumallowed distance.

Range and step 0...63 bits, step 1 bits


Default value 63 bits



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



13/04/2007


MML Abbreviated Name MSR

MML Full Name MS distance threshold param MS max range

DB Name handover_control.ms_distance_ho_threshold_par.ms_range_max


13.63 MS distance threshold param Nx (MSN)

Parameter name MS Distance Threshold Param Nx

Abbreviated name msDHoThrParamN8

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the MS-BS distance with the maximumallowed distance. Nx is the number of distances that have to betaken into account when making a handover decision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MSN

MML Full Name MS distance threshold param Nx

DB Name handover_control.ms_distance_ho_threshold_par.n8


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.64 MS distance threshold param Px (MSP)

Parameter name MS Distance Threshold Param Px

Abbreviated name msDistanceHoThresholdParamP8

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the MS-BS distance with the maximumallowed distance. Px is the number of distances that have to begreater than the maximum distance before making a handoverdecision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MSP

MML Full Name MS distance threshold param Px

DB Name handover_control.ms_distance_ho_threshold_par.p8


13.65 MS speed averaging (MSA)

Parameter name MS Speed Averaging

Abbreviated name msSpeedAveraging

Managed object HOC


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the averaging window size for theMS speed indications from the BTS.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHA, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name MSA

MML Full Name MS speed averaging

DB Name handover_control.ms_speed_averaging


13.66 MS speed detection state (SDS)

Parameter name MS Speed Detection State

Abbreviated name msSpeedDetectionState

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you indicate the method used for MS speeddetection algorithm.

NOTE: MML RANGE:

0 (MS speed algorithm is used for handover between macro andmicro layers),

1-100 (variable window size feature is used and the parameterindicates the scaling factor for averaging window size)



Default value 0



Special value 0

Special value notes MS speed algorithm is used.

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SDS

MML Full Name MS speed detection state

DB Name handover_control.ms_speed_detec_state


13.67 MS speed threshold Nx (STN)

Parameter name MS Speed Threshold Nx

Abbreviated name msSpeedThresholdNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description The parameter is used in threshold comparison between theaveraged MS speed and the upper and lower speed thresholds.Nx is the total number of averages to be taken into account beforethe decision is possible. This parameter is common to both lowerand upper speed thresholds.



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name STN

MML Full Name MS speed threshold Nx

DB Name handover_control.ms_speed_threshold_nx


13.68 MS speed threshold Px (STP)

Parameter name MS Speed Threshold Px

Abbreviated name msSpeedThresholdPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used in threshold comparison between theaveraged MS speed and the upper and lower speed thresholds.Px is the number of averages out of total averages that have to belower/higher than the threshold, before a handover due to MSspeed is possible. This parameter is common to both lower andupper speed thresholds.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value 3



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name STP

MML Full Name MS speed threshold Px

DB Name handover_control.ms_speed_threshold_px


13.69 non BCCH layer access threshold (LAR)

Parameter name Non BCCH Layer Access Threshold

Abbreviated name nonBcchLayerAccessThr

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a threshold value for the estimateddownlink signal level on non-BCCH layer for a moving MS fromBCCH layer to non-BCCH layer.

The exception is when the BCCH has been configured to GSM1900 band in GSM800/GSM1900 Common BCCH cell. In thatcase you define a threshold value for the downlink signal level onGSM 1900 layer for allowing access to GSM 1900 BCCH layer.





13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Common BCCH GSM900 (46) (optional) OR Common BCCHEGSM900 (47) (optional) OR Common BCCH GSM1800 (48)(optional) OR Common BCCH GSM1900 (58) (optional) ORCommon BCCH GSM800 (57) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHS, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name LAR

MML Full Name non BCCH layer access threshold

DB Name handover_control.non_bcch_layer_acc_thres


13.70 non BCCH layer exit threshold (LER)

Parameter name Non BCCH Layer Exit Threshold

Abbreviated name rxLevel

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a threshold value for the measureddownlink signal level on non-BCCH layer for a moving MS fromnon-BCCH layer to BCCH layer WCDMA RAN cells.

The exception is when the BCCH has been configured toGSM1900 band in GSM800/GSM1900 Common BCCH cell. In thatcase you define a threshold value for the measured downlinksignal level on GSM 1900 layer for a moving MS from GSM 1900BCCH layer to GSM 800 layer.




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LER

MML Full Name non BCCH layer exit threshold

DB Name handover_control.non_bcch_layer_exit_thres.rx_level


13.71 non BCCH layer exit threshold nx (LEN)

Parameter name Non BCCH Layer Exit Threshold Nx

Abbreviated name nonBcchLayerExitThr_nx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the total number of the averagedvalues of the signal strength downlink measurements for triggeringthe handover.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online


13/04/2007





Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LEN

MML Full Name non BCCH layer exit threshold nx

DB Name handover_control.non_bcch_layer_exit_thres.nx


13.72 non BCCH layer exit threshold px (LEP)

Parameter name Non BCCH Layer Exit Threshold Px

Abbreviated name nonBcchLayerExitThr_px

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of averaged signalstrength downlink measurements for triggering the handover.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LEP

MML Full Name non BCCH layer exit threshold px

DB Name handover_control.non_bcch_layer_exit_thres.px


13.73 number of measured FDD cells (FDMR)

Parameter name Number Of Measured FDD Cells

Abbreviated name fddMultiratRep

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of the best validWCDMA RAN cells to be reported by a dual mode mobile in thelist of the strongest cells or in the measurement report.



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: 3GPP 04.18, 44.018


13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name FDMR

MML Full Name number of measured FDD cells

DB Name handover_control.fdd_cell_cnt_mrat_rep


13.74 number of WCDMA RAN zero results (UNOZ)

Parameter name Number Of WCDMA RAN Zero Results

Abbreviated name noOfZeroResUtran

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of zero results that canbe omitted when the measurement results of the adjacentWCDMA RAN cells are averaged.



Default value 5



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UNOZ

MML Full Name number of WCDMA RAN zero results

DB Name handover_control.no_of_zero_res_utran


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.75 number of zero results (NOZ)

Parameter name Number Of Zero Results

Abbreviated name numberOfZeroResults

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the number of zero results whichcan be omitted when the measurement results of the adjacentcells are averaged.



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name NOZ

MML Full Name number of zero results

DB Name handover_control.number_of_zero_results


13.76 priority adjustment step for band 1-7 (P1-P7)

Parameter name Priority Adjustment Step For Band 1-7

Abbreviated name priorityAdjStep

Managed object HOC


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 7

Description With these parameters you define the priority adjustment step foreach of the 7 interference bands. The values are used in thecalculation of the final priority of the handover candidate. Value -8disables the handover to the handover candidate.

NOTE:

Range:

Default values for priority adjustment step for band P1-P7:

P1: 3

P2: 1

P3: 0

P4: -1

P5: -2

P6: -5

P7: -8



Default value 3

Default value notes


Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHX, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name P1-P7

MML Full Name priority adjustment step for band 1-7

DB Name handover_control.hoc_ci_est.band_limits_steps(0…6).priority_adj_step


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.77 quality downlink weighting (QDW)

Parameter name Quality Downlink Weighting

Abbreviated name hoAveragingQualDlWeighting

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting factor for calculatingthe averaged values from the signal quality downlinkmeasurements for the handover control.


NOTE:





Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QDW

MML Full Name quality downlink weighting

DB Name handover_control.ho_averaging_qual_dl.weighting



13/04/2007


13.78 quality downlink window size (QDWS)

Parameter name Quality Downlink Window Size

Abbreviated name hoAveragingQualDlWindowSize

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters calculate averaged values from signal qualitydownlink measurements. The window size represents theaveraging window size in SACCH periods.




Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QDWS

MML Full Name quality downlink window size

DB Name handover_control.ho_averaging_qual_dl.window_size


13.79 quality uplink weighting (QUW)

Parameter name Quality Uplink Weighting

Abbreviated name hoAveragingQualUlWeighting

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting factor for calculatingthe averaged values from the signal quality uplink measurementsfor the handover control.


NOTE:

Range:





Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QUW

MML Full Name quality uplink weighting

DB Name handover_control.ho_averaging_qual_ul.weighting


13.80 quality uplink window size (QUWS)

Parameter name Quality Uplink Window Size

Abbreviated name hoAveragingQualUlWindowSize


13/04/2007


Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters calculate averaged values from signal qualityuplink measurements. Window size represents the averagingwindow size in SACCH periods.




Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QUWS

MML Full Name quality uplink window size

DB Name handover_control.ho_averaging_qual_ul.window_size


13.81 reporting rate (REP)

Parameter name Reporting Rate

Abbreviated name reportingRate

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define a reporting rate for the remainingmeasured neighbouring cells that do not fit into the first threepriority classes.

NOTE: MML RANGE:

0 (SACCH rate),

1 (reduced rate but at least once in four consecutive reports)

Range and step SACCH Rate (0), Reduced Rate (1)


SACCH Rate ==> 0

Reduced Rate ==> 1

Default value SACCH Rate (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: 44.018, 45.008



MML Full Name reporting rate

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.report_rate


13.82 serving band reporting (SBR)

Parameter name Serving Band Reporting

Abbreviated name servingBandReporting

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the number of cells from theserving GSM frequency band that shall be included in theEnhanced Measurement Report.



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online





Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name SBR

MML Full Name serving band reporting

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.serv_band_rep


13.83 super reuse bad C/I threshold (BCI)

Parameter name Super Reuse Bad C/I Threshold

Abbreviated name superReuseBadCiThresholdCiRatio

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter compares the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reusedTRX for triggering a handover from the super-reused TRX. C/Iratio: Threshold level for a handover.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BCI

MML Full Name super reuse bad C/I threshold

DB Name handover_control.ho_lower_ci_threshold.ci_ratio


13.84 super reuse bad C/I threshold AMR HR (BCIH)

Parameter name Super Reuse Bad C/I Threshold AMR HR

Abbreviated name amrHoHrSupReuBadCiThr

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reuse TRX for triggering the HO from the super-reuse TRX.Defined for AMR HR calls.

NOTE:





Default value 10


13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) AND AMR HR (72)(optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BCIH

MML Full Name super reuse bad C/I threshold AMR HR

DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_handover.super_reuse_bad


13.85 super reuse bad C/I threshold AMR FR (BCIF)

Parameter name Super Reuse Bad C/I Threshold AMR FR

Abbreviated name amrHoFrSupReuBadCiThr

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reuse TRX for triggering the HO from the super-reuse TRX.Defined for AMR FR calls.

NOTE:





Default value 10 dB



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) AND AMR FR (50)(optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BCIF

MML Full Name super reuse bad C/I threshold AMR FR

DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_handover.super_reuse_bad


13.86 super reuse bad C/I threshold Nx (BNX)

Parameter name Super Reuse Bad C/I Threshold Nx

Abbreviated name superReuseBadCiThresholdNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter compares the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reusedTRX for triggering a handover from the super-reused TRX. Nx:Total number of comparisons to be taken into account before adecision is possible.



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online




13/04/2007



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BNX

MML Full Name super reuse bad C/I threshold Nx

DB Name handover_control.ho_lower_ci_threshold.nx


13.87 super reuse bad C/I threshold Px (BPX)

Parameter name Super Reuse Bad C/I Threshold Px

Abbreviated name superReuseBadCiThresholdPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter compares the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reusedTRX for triggering a handover from the super-reused TRX. Px:Number of comparisons out of total comparisons that have to begreater than or equal to the threshold before a handover ispossible.



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name BPX

MML Full Name super reuse bad C/I threshold Px

DB Name handover_control.ho_lower_ci_threshold.px


13.88 super reuse bad threshold Nx (CBN)

Parameter name Super Reuse Bad Threshold Nx

Abbreviated name superReuseBadRxLevThresholdNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the downlink signal level ofthe super-reuse TRX for triggering the handover to a regular TRX.Nx: Total number of comparisons to be taken into account beforethe handover decision is possible.



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Handover Support For Intelligent Coverage Enhancement (ICE)(30) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CBN

MML Full Name super reuse bad threshold Nx

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_bad.nx


13/04/2007



13.89 super reuse bad threshold Px (CBP)

Parameter name Super Reuse Bad Threshold Px

Abbreviated name superReuseBadRxLevThresholdPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the downlink signal level ofthe super-reuse TRX for triggering the handover to a regular TRX.Px: Number of comparisons out of total comparisons where thedownlink signal level has to be lower or equal to the thresholdbefore the handover decision is possible.



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CBP

MML Full Name super reuse bad threshold Px

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_bad.px


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.90 super reuse bad threshold Rx level (CBR)

Parameter name Super Reuse Bad Threshold Rx Level

Abbreviated name superReuseBadRxLevThresholdRxLevel

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the downlink signal level ofthe super-reuse TRX for triggering the handover to a regular TRX.






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CBR

MML Full Name super reuse bad threshold Rx level

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_bad.rx_level


13.91 super reuse estimation method (METH)

Parameter name Super Reuse Estimation Method

Abbreviated name superReuseEstMethod

Managed object HOC


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the method which will be used inthe handover evaluation procedure when the handover algorithmcalculates either the downlink C/I ratio for Intelligent Underlay-Overlay (IUO) or the downlink signal level for Intelligent CoverageEnhancement (ICE).

NOTE: MML Range:

AVE (average taking method for IUO), MAX (maximum takingmethod for IUO), ICE (handover support for ICE), NONE (IUO orICE is not in use for this cell)

NOTE: Parameter range is dependent on the use of optionalfeatures. Parameter values AVE and MAX are visible if theoptional feature Intelligent Underlay Overlay is enabled, andparameter value ICE is visible if Intelligent Coverage Enhancementis enabled. Value NONE is always visible.

Range and step Not Used (0), Average (1), Maximum (2), ICE (3)


Not Used ==> 0

Average ==> 1

Maximum ==> 2

ICE ==> 3




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) OR HandoverSupport For Intelligent Coverage Enhancement (ICE) (30)(optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name METH

MML Full Name super reuse estimation method

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_est


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.92 super reuse good C/I threshold (GCI)

Parameter name Super Reuse Good C/I Threshold

Abbreviated name superReuseGoodCiThresholdCiRatio

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter compares the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reusedTRX for triggering a handover to the super-reused TRX. C/I ratio:Threshold level for a handover.



Default value 17



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GCI

MML Full Name super reuse good C/I threshold

DB Name handover_control.ho_upper_ci_threshold.ci_ratio


13.93 super reuse good C/I threshold AMR HR (GCIH)

Parameter name Super Reuse Good C/I Threshold AMR HR


13/04/2007


Abbreviated name amrHoHrSupReuGoodCiThr

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reuse TRX for triggering the HO to the super-reuse TRX. Definedfor AMR HR calls.

NOTE:





Default value 17



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) AND AMR HR (72)(optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GCIH

MML Full Name super reuse good C/I threshold AMR HR

DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_handover.super_reuse_good


13.94 super reuse good C/I threshold AMR FR (GCIF)

Parameter name Super Reuse Good C/I Threshold AMR FR

Abbreviated name amrHoFrSupReuGoodCiThr

Managed object BTS

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reuse TRX for triggering the HO to the super-reuse TRX. Definedfor AMR FR calls.

NOTE:





Default value 17 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional) AND AMR FR (50)(optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GCIF

MML Full Name super reuse good C/I threshold AMR FR

DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_handover.super_reuse_good


13.95 super reuse good C/I threshold Nx (GNX)

Parameter name Super Reuse Good C/I Threshold Nx

Abbreviated name superReuseGoodCiThresholdNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description The parameter compares the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reusedTRX for triggering a handover to the super-reused TRX. Nx: Totalnumber of comparisons to be taken into account before a decisionis possible.



Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GNX

MML Full Name super reuse good C/I threshold Nx

DB Name handover_control.ho_upper_ci_threshold.nx


13.96 super reuse good C/I threshold Px (GPX)

Parameter name Super Reuse Good C/I Threshold Px

Abbreviated name superReuseGoodCiThresholdPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter compares the downlink C/I ratio on a super-reusedTRX for triggering a handover to the super-reused TRX.Px:Number of comparisons out of total comparisons that have to begreater than or equal to the threshold before a handover ispossible.


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value 8



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name GPX

MML Full Name super reuse good C/I threshold Px

DB Name handover_control.ho_upper_ci_threshold.px


13.97 super reuse good threshold Nx (CGN)

Parameter name Super Reuse Good Threshold Nx

Abbreviated name superReuseGoodRxLevThresholdNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the downlink signal level fortriggering a handover to the super-reuse TRX. Nx: Total number ofcomparisons to be taken into account before the handoverdecision is possible.



Default value 10



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CGN

MML Full Name super reuse good threshold Nx

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_good.nx


13.98 super reuse good threshold Px (CGP)

Parameter name Super Reuse Good Threshold Px

Abbreviated name superReuseGoodRxLevThresholdPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the downlink signal level fortriggering a handover to the super-reuse TRX. Px: Number ofcomparisons out of total comparisons where the downlink signallevel has to be greater or equal to the threshold before a handoverdecision is possible.



Default value 8



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CGP

MML Full Name super reuse good threshold Px

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_good.px


13.99 super reuse good threshold Rx level (CGR)

Parameter name Super Reuse Good Threshold Rx Level

Abbreviated name superReuseGoodRxLevThresholdRxLevel

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the downlink signal level fortriggering a handover to the super-reuse TRX.






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



13/04/2007


MML Abbreviated Name CGR

MML Full Name super reuse good threshold Rx level

DB Name handover_control.super_reuse_good.rx_level


13.100 threshold deep dropping EDGE (ERT)

Parameter name Threshold Deep Dropping EDGE

Abbreviated name ddeThresholdsLevRxLevel

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the size of the signal dropfor triggering the rapid field drop handover.



Default value 10 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ERT

MML Full Name threshold deep dropping EDGE

DB Name handover_control.dde_threshold.rx_level


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.101 threshold deep dropping EDGE Nx (ERN)

Parameter name Threshold Deep Dropping EDGE Nx

Abbreviated name ddeThresholdsLevNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the size of the signal dropfor triggering the rapid field drop handover.

Total number of measurement samples to be taken into accountbefore the handover decision is possible.



Default value 3



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ERN

MML Full Name threshold deep dropping EDGE Nx

DB Name handover_control.dde_threshold.nx


13.102 threshold deep dropping EDGE Px (ERP)

Parameter name Threshold Deep Dropping EDGE Px

Abbreviated name ddeThresholdsLevPx


13/04/2007


Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the size of the signal dropfor triggering the rapid field drop handover. Number ofmeasurement sample frames when the deep dropping edge isdetected.



Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ERP

MML Full Name threshold deep dropping EDGE Px

DB Name handover_control.dde_threshold.px


13.103 threshold dl Rx qual AMR HR (QDRH)

Parameter name Threshold Dl Rx Qual AMR HR

Abbreviated name amrHoHrThrDlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the signalquality downlink measurements for triggering the handover.Defined for the default AMR HR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QDRH

MML Full Name threshold dl Rx qual AMR HR

DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_handover.rx_qual_dl_thres



13/04/2007


13.104 threshold dl Rx qual for AMR FR (QDRF)

Parameter name Threshold Dl Rx Qual For AMR FR

Abbreviated name amrHoFrThrDlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the signalquality downlink measurements for triggering the handover.Defined for the default AMR FR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QDRF

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name threshold dl Rx qual for AMR FR

DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_handover.rx_qual_dl_thres


13.105 threshold for multi-RAT MS (QSRC)

Parameter name Threshold For Multi-RAT MS

Abbreviated name qSearchC

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate a threshold for multi-RAT (radioaccess technology) MSs in dedicated state to measure WCDMARAN neighbour cells introduced in 3G Cell Reselection list whenthe measured downlink signal level (RLA_C) of the serving cell isbelow (0-7) or above (8-15) the threshold.

NOTE: If the parameter value is 7 then dual mode GSM/WCDMA(multi-RAT) MSs in dedicated state measure always neighbourWCDMARAN cell(s). If the parameter value is 15 then dual modeGSM/WCDMA (multi-RAT) MSs in dedicated state do not measureany of the neighbour WCDMA RAN cells.



Default value 15



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References . 3GPP Reference: 3GPP 04.18, 05.08


MML Abbreviated Name QSRC

MML Full Name threshold for multi-RAT MS


13/04/2007


DB Name handover_control.qsearch_c


13.106 threshold interference downlink Nx (IDN)

Parameter name Threshold Interference Downlink Nx

Abbreviated name hoThrInterferenceDlNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of interferencedownlink measurements for triggering the handover process. Nx:Number of averages that have to be taken into account whenmaking a handover decision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHI, EHO

MML Abbreviated Name IDN

MML Full Name threshold interference downlink Nx

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_interference_dl.nx


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.107 threshold interference downlink Px (IDP)

Parameter name Threshold Interference Downlink Px

Abbreviated name hoThrInterferenceDlPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of interferencedownlink measurements for triggering the handover process. Px:Number of averages that have to be upper/lower than thethreshold.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IDP

MML Full Name threshold interference downlink Px

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_interference_dl.px


13.108 threshold interference downlink Rx level (IDR)

Parameter name Threshold Interference Downlink Rx Level

Abbreviated name hoThresholdsInterferenceDlRxLevel

Managed object HOC


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of interferencedownlink measurements for triggering the handover process.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IDR

MML Full Name threshold interference downlink Rx level

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_interference_dl.rx_level


13.109 threshold interference uplink Nx (IUN)

Parameter name Threshold Interference Uplink Nx

Abbreviated name hoThresholdsInterferenceULNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of interferenceuplink measurements for triggering the handover process. Nx:Number of averages that have to be taken into account whenmaking a handover decision.


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IUN

MML Full Name threshold interference uplink Nx

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_interference_ul.nx


13.110 threshold interference uplink Px (IUP)

Parameter name Threshold Interference Uplink Px

Abbreviated name hoThresholdsInterferenceULPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of interferenceuplink measurements for triggering the handover process. Px:Number of averages that have to be upper/lower than thethreshold.



Default value 1



Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name IUP

MML Full Name threshold interference uplink Px

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_interference_ul.px


13.111 threshold interference uplink Rx level (IUR)

Parameter name Threshold Interference Uplink Rx Level

Abbreviated name hoThresholdsInterferenceULRxLevel

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of interferenceuplink measurements for triggering the handover process.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



References -


MML Abbreviated Name IUR

MML Full Name threshold interference uplink Rx level

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_interference_ul.rx_level


13.112 threshold level downlink Nx (LDN)

Parameter name Threshold Level Downlink Nx

Abbreviated name hoThresholdsLevDLNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal strengthdownlink measurements for triggering the handover process. Nx:Number of averages that have to be taken into account whenmaking a handover decision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHO, EHS

MML Abbreviated Name LDN

MML Full Name threshold level downlink Nx

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_lev_dl.nx


13/04/2007



13.113 threshold level downlink Px (LDP)

Parameter name Threshold Level Downlink Px

Abbreviated name hoTLDlPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal strengthdownlink measurements for triggering the handover process. Px:Number of averages that have to be upper/lower than thethreshold.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LDP

MML Full Name threshold level downlink Px

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_lev_dl.px


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.114 threshold level downlink Rx level (LDR)

Parameter name Threshold Level Downlink Rx Level

Abbreviated name hoTLDlRxLevel

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal strengthdownlink measurements for triggering the handover process.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LDR

MML Full Name threshold level downlink Rx level

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_lev_dl.rx_level


13.115 threshold level uplink for rapid field drop (RPD)

Parameter name Threshold Level Uplink For Rapid Field Drop

Abbreviated name hoThresholdsRapidLevUl

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -


13/04/2007


Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define an uplink Rx threshold level forrapid field drop.






Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name RPD

MML Full Name threshold level uplink for rapid field drop

DB Name handover_control.ho_th_rapid_lev_ul


13.116 threshold level uplink Nx (LUN)

Parameter name Threshold Level Uplink Nx

Abbreviated name hoTLUlNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal strengthuplink measurements for triggering the handover process. Nx:Number of averages that have to be taken into account whenmaking a handover decision.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LUN

MML Full Name threshold level uplink Nx

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_lev_dl.nx


13.117 threshold level uplink Px (LUP)

Parameter name Threshold Level Uplink Px

Abbreviated name hoTLUlPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal strengthuplink measurements for triggering the handover process. Px:Number of averages that have to be upper/lower than thethreshold.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online


13/04/2007




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LUP

MML Full Name threshold level uplink Px

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_lev_ul.px


13.118 threshold level uplink Rx level (LUR)

Parameter name Threshold Level Uplink Rx Level

Abbreviated name hoTLUlRxLevel

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal strengthuplink measurements for triggering the handover process.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name LUR

MML Full Name threshold level uplink Rx level

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_lev_ul.rx_level


13.119 threshold qual downlink Nx (QDN)

Parameter name Threshold Qual Downlink Nx

Abbreviated name hoTQDlNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the handover process. Nx:Number of averages that have to be taken into account whenmaking a handover decision.



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EHC, EHO, EHQ

MML Abbreviated Name QDN

MML Full Name threshold qual downlink Nx

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_qual_dl.nx



13/04/2007


13.120 threshold qual downlink Px (QDP)

Parameter name Threshold Qual Downlink Px

Abbreviated name hoTQDlPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the handover process. Px:Number of averages that have to be upper/lower than thethreshold.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QDP

MML Full Name threshold qual downlink Px

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_qual_dl.px


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.121 threshold qual downlink Rx qual (QDR)

Parameter name Threshold Qual Downlink Rx Qual

Abbreviated name hoTQDlRxQual

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the handover process.

Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QDR

MML Full Name threshold qual downlink Rx qual

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_qual_dl.rx_qual



13/04/2007


13.122 threshold qual uplink Nx (QUN)

Parameter name Threshold Qual Uplink Nx

Abbreviated name hoTQUlNx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the handover process. Nx:Number of averages that have to be taken into account whenmaking a handover decision.



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QUN

MML Full Name threshold qual uplink Nx

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_qual_ul.nx


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



13.123 threshold qual uplink Px (QUP)

Parameter name Threshold Qual Uplink Px

Abbreviated name hoTQUlPx

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the handover process. Px:Number of averages that have to be upper/lower than thethreshold.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QUP

MML Full Name threshold qual uplink Px

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_qual_ul.px


13.124 threshold qual uplink Rx qual (QUR)

Parameter name Threshold Qual Uplink Rx Qual

Abbreviated name hoTQUlRxQual

Managed object HOC


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the handover process.

Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QUR

MML Full Name threshold qual uplink Rx qual

DB Name handover_control.ho_thresholds_qual_ul.rx_qual


13.125 threshold ul Rx qual AMR FR (QURF)

Parameter name Threshold Ul Rx Qual AMR FR

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name amrHoFrThrUlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the signalquality uplink measurements for triggering the handover. Definedfor the default AMR FR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QURF

MML Full Name threshold ul Rx qual AMR FR

DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_handover.rx_qual_ul_thres



13/04/2007


13.126 threshold ul Rx qual AMR HR (QURH)

Parameter name Threshold Ul Rx Qual AMR HR

Abbreviated name amrHoHrThrUlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the signalquality uplink measurements for triggering the handover. Definedfor the default AMR HR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



References -


MML Abbreviated Name QURH

MML Full Name threshold ul Rx qual AMR HR

DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_handover.rx_qual_ul_thres


13.127 triggering ratio for WCDMA RAN cell penalty (TRW)

Parameter name Triggering Ratio For WCDMA RAN Cell Penalty

Abbreviated name failMoveThreshold

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the triggering ratio for an adjacentWCDMA RAN cell penalty on a serving GSM cell. If the ratio ofunsuccessful outgoing Inter-System Handover attempts towards acertain adjacent WCDMA RAN cell exceeds the penalty triggeringratio during a measurement period, the adjacent WCDMA RANcell-specific penalty timer is triggered on the serving GSM cell.(While the adjacent WCDMA RAN cell penalty timer is ticking, theBSC is not allowed to initiate an Inter-System Handover from theserving GSM cell towards the adjacent WCDMA RAN cell.However, an Inter-System Handover may occur from anotherserving GSM cell towards the adjacent WCDMA RAN cell.)



Default value 50 %



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -


13/04/2007


References -


MML Abbreviated Name TRW

MML Full Name triggering ratio for WCDMA RAN cell penalty

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.fail_move_threshold


13.128 upper speed limit (USL)

Parameter name Upper Speed Limit

Abbreviated name upperSpeedLimit

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the upper speed threshold for anMS. If the speed of the MS is higher than this threshold, the MSwill be handed over to a upper layer adjacent cell (if any). Oneparameter step equals the speed of 2 km/h. If the value is zero,the upper speed verifying is not made.



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name USL

MML Full Name upper speed limit

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name handover_control.upper_speed_limit


13.129 WCDMA RAN cell penalty time (WCP)

Parameter name WCDMA RAN Cell Penalty Time

Abbreviated name wcdmaRanCellPenalty

Managed object HOC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the duration of a handover penaltytimer that has been triggered on a serving GSM cell for anadjacent WCDMA RAN cell. While the WCDMA RAN cell penaltytimer is ticking, the BSC is not allowed to initiate an Inter-SystemHandover attempt from the serving GSM cell towards the WCDMARAN cell. However, Inter-System Handovers towards the adjacentWCDMA RAN cell may occur from another serving GSM cell thatdoes not have a penalty timer for the WCDMA RAN cell.



Default value 127



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name WCP

MML Full Name WCDMA RAN cell penalty time

DB Name handover_control.s11_prms.utran_cell_penalty



13/04/2007


14 Text input and output (IO_TEXT/TID)radio network object parameters

14.1 text ID (TID)

Parameter name TID ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object TID

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the text ID number of a text string.

NOTE:

MML Range:

1 .. 200

0 removes the text ID



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Text input and output (IO_TEXT/TID) radio network objectparameters

MML Commands EFE, EFP, EFX, EFO

MML Abbreviated Name TID

MML Full Name text ID



14.2 text string (TEXT)

Parameter name Text String

Abbreviated name ioTextValue

Managed object TID

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the text string associated withexternal outputs and inputs.

Allowed characters are: A-Z 0-9 < > _ - / ( ) , . ! # $ @ % & * + ' =and space.

You can delete a text string by leaving the text field empty insidethe quotation marks. The delete operation removes the text stringconnection from the BCF(s).

NOTE:

The parameter is valid only for Nokia 2nd Generation, Nokia Talk-family, and Nokia PrimeSite site types.

NOTE:

MML range:

0..80 characters



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -


13/04/2007


Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EFE, EFP

MML Abbreviated Name TEXT

MML Full Name text string

DB Name io_text.text()


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Text input and output (IO_TEXT/TID) radio network objectparameters


13/04/2007


15 Location area code to signalling pointcode (LAC to SPC) radio network objectparameters


Parameter name Location Area Code

Abbreviated name locationAreaCode

Managed object SPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the location area code which willbe mapped with a signalling point code.



Default value -



Special value Not allowed (65535)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Location area code to signalling point code (LAC to SPC) radionetwork object parameters

MML Commands EEC, EEF, EED, EES



DB Name spc.lac


15.2 mapping entry index (MEI)

Parameter name SPC ID

Abbreviated name lacToSpcId

Managed object SPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a mapping entry index which is anindication of a mapping relation between a location area code anda signalling point code in the LAC to SPC mapping info.



Default value -

Default value notes If you do not give this parameter then the smallest free mappingentry index value is searched and used.


Related functions -





Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EEC, EEF, EED, EES

MML Abbreviated Name MEI

MML Full Name mapping entry index



13/04/2007



15.3 signaling point code (SPC)

Parameter name Signaling Point Code List

Abbreviated name spcList

Managed object SPC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 6

Description With this parameter you define the signalling point code which willbe mapped with a location area code.



Default value -




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EEC, EEF, EES

MML Abbreviated Name SPC

MML Full Name signaling point code

DB Name spc.spc_list.spc(x)


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Location area code to signalling point code (LAC to SPC) radionetwork object parameters


13/04/2007


16 Location Services Element (LCSE) radionetwork object parameters

16.1 altitude of ground level (AL)

Parameter name Altitude Of Ground Level

Abbreviated name altitude

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the ground level altitude forcoordinates, in metres.

Range and step 0...10000 m, step 1 m


Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Lb interface to BSC (Lb Usage) (63) (optional) AND Lb interfaceto BSC (Lb Plus) (64) (optional) OR PBS (Position BasedServices) in BSC (55) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EXC, EXM, EXA, EXB, EXH, EXT, EXO

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Location Services Element (LCSE) radio network object parameters

MML Abbreviated Name AL

MML Full Name altitude of ground level

DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.altitude


16.2 antenna bearing (ABE)

Parameter name Antenna Bearing

Abbreviated name antBearing

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the antenna direction in degrees,referred to North direction.



Default value -



Special value Not Defined (65535)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EXC, EXM, EXO

MML Abbreviated Name ABE

MML Full Name antenna bearing

DB Name lcse.antenna_bearing



13/04/2007


16.3 antenna height (AHE)

Parameter name Antenna Height

Abbreviated name antHeight

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you specify the height of the antenna inmetres, measured above the ground level.



Default value 40



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AHE

MML Full Name antenna height

DB Name lcse.antenna_height


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



16.4 antenna horizontal half power beam width (AHB)

Parameter name Antenna Horizontal Half Power Beam Width

Abbreviated name antHorHalfPwrBeam

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the half power beam width (3 dBangle) of the antenna in the horizontal plane.



Default value 360



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AHB

MML Full Name antenna horizontal half power beam width

DB Name lcse.horiz_half_pwr_beam


16.5 BCCH frequency (FREQ)

Parameter name BCCH Frequency

Abbreviated name bCCHFrequency


13/04/2007


Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the frequency of the BCCH. BCCHFrequency is used to identify frequency which will be used byLMU and MS to measure RIT / OTD between segments.

MML NOTE:

Obligatory in creation when LCSE is not connected to anysegment, otherwise read from the corresponding cell.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name BCCH frequency

DB Name lcse.bcch




Abbreviated name bsicBcc

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description BSIC = Bs Identity Code

With this parameter you define the BTS colour code which is partof the base transceiver station identity code (BSIC).

MML NOTE:




Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -




DB Name lcse.bs_identity_code.bcc


16.7 cell identification (CI)

Parameter name Cell Identification

Abbreviated name cellIdentification

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the cell identification for the LCSelement.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . PBS (Position Based Services) in BSC (55) (optional) OR ( Lbinterface to BSC (Lb Usage) (63) (optional) AND Lb interface toBSC (Lb Plus) (64) (optional) )

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EXC, EXD, EXM, EXO


MML Full Name cell identification

DB Name lcse.lcse_id.ci


16.8 city type (CIT)

Parameter name City Type

Abbreviated name cityType

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter indicates the landscape value of the cell. Theparameter is used in location calculation.

Range and step Urban (1), Suburban (2), Open-rural (3)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Urban ==> 1

Suburban ==> 2

Open-rural ==> 3

Default value Suburban (2)



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features . BSS20070: BSC Integrated SMLC Enhancement

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name CIT

MML Full Name city type

DB Name lcse.city_type


16.9 latitude degrees (LAD)

Parameter name Latitude Degrees

Abbreviated name latDegrees

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the degrees of latitude for theBCCH BTS TX-antenna.



Default value 0


13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LAD

MML Full Name latitude degrees

DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.latitude.degrees


16.10 latitude fractions (LAF)

Parameter name Latitude Fractions

Abbreviated name latFractions

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the fractions of latitude seconds forthe BCCH BTS TX-antenna.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LAF

MML Full Name latitude fractions

DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.latitude.fractions


16.11 latitude minutes (LAM)

Parameter name Latitude Minutes

Abbreviated name latMinutes

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minutes of latitude for theBCCH BTS TX-antenna.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -


13/04/2007


References -


MML Abbreviated Name LAM

MML Full Name latitude minutes


DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.latitude.minutes


16.12 latitude seconds (LAS)

Parameter name Latitude Seconds

Abbreviated name latSeconds

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the seconds of latitude for theBCCH BTS TX-antenna.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LAS

MML Full Name latitude seconds

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.latitude.seconds


16.13 latitude sign (LADS)

Parameter name Latitude Sign

Abbreviated name latSign

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the sign of latitude for the BCCHBTS TX-antenna.

Range and step + (positive) (0), - (negative) (1)


+ (positive) ==> 0

- (negative) ==> 1

Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LADS

MML Full Name latitude sign

DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.latitude.sign



13/04/2007



Parameter name Location Area Code

Abbreviated name locationAreaCode

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the location area code for the LCSelement.



Default value -



Special value Not allowed (65535)

Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . PBS (Position Based Services) in BSC (55) (optional) OR ( Lbinterface to BSC (Lb Usage) (63) (optional) AND Lb interface toBSC (Lb Plus) (64) (optional) )

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EXC, EXD, EXM, EXO



DB Name lcse.lcse_id.lac


16.15 longitude degrees (LOD)

Parameter name Longitude Degrees

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name lonDegrees

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the degrees of longitude for theBCCH BTS TX-antenna.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LOD

MML Full Name longitude degrees

DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.longitude.degrees


16.16 longitude fractions (LOF)

Parameter name Longitude Fractions

Abbreviated name lonFractions

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the fractions of longitude secondsfor the BCCH BTS TX-antenna.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LOF

MML Full Name longitude fractions

DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.longitude.fractions


16.17 longitude minutes (LOM)

Parameter name Longitude Minutes

Abbreviated name lonMinutes

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minutes of longitude for theBCCH BTS TX-antenna.



Default value -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LOM

MML Full Name longitude minutes

DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.longitude.minutes


16.18 longitude seconds (LOS)

Parameter name Longitude Seconds

Abbreviated name lonSeconds

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the seconds of longitude for theBCCH BTS TX-antenna.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LOS

MML Full Name longitude seconds

DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.longitude.seconds


16.19 longitude sign (LODS)

Parameter name Longitude Sign

Abbreviated name lonSign

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the sign of longitude for the BCCHBTS TX-antenna.

Positive sign means degrees in east hemisphere and negativesign means degrees in west hemisphere.

Range and step + (positive) (0), - (negative) (1)


+ (positive) ==> 0

- (negative) ==> 1

Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LODS

MML Full Name longitude sign

DB Name lcse.lcs_coordinates.longitude.sign


16.20 maximum radiated power (MRP)

Parameter name Maximum Radiated Power

Abbreviated name maxRadiatedPwr

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum power radiated at

the output of the transmit antenna.

Range and step -100...100 dBm, step 1 dBm






Related functions -

Modification Online






13/04/2007


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MRP

MML Full Name maximum radiated power

DB Name lcse.max_rad_power




Abbreviated name bsicNcc

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description BSIC = Bs Identity Code

With this parameter you define the network colour code which ispart of the base transceiver station identity code (BSIC).

MML NOTE:




Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



References -




DB Name lcse.bs_identity_code.ncc


16.22 predicted back serving radius (BSR)

Parameter name Predicted Back Serving Radius

Abbreviated name predBckServRad

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the distance from the repeaterbelow which the repeater is serving in 99% of the cases in thedirection outside the main beam of the transmit antenna.

NOTE:

Default value: ND (not defined (4294967295))



Default value -1



Special value Not Defined (-1)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007


MML Commands EXC, EXM, EXH, EXT, EXO

MML Abbreviated Name BSR

MML Full Name predicted back serving radius

DB Name lcse.back_serv_rad


16.23 predicted front serving radius (FSR)

Parameter name Predicted Front Serving Radius

Abbreviated name predFrtServRad

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the distance from the BTS belowwhich the BTS is serving in 99% of the cases.

NOTE:

Default value: ND (not defined (4294967295))



Default value -1



Special value Not Defined (-1)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EXC, EXM, EXH, EXT, EXO

MML Abbreviated Name FSR

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name predicted front serving radius

DB Name lcse.front_serv_rad


16.24 Rx levels allowed for positioning (RXA)

Parameter name Rx Levels Allowed For Positioning

Abbreviated name rxAllowed

Managed object LCSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter indicates the allowed Rx levels when calculating aposition estimate for a location request. When the parameter is on,the Rx levels are used (if available) in estimate calculation.

Range and step 0 (Rx levels are not allowed for positioning in cell (N)), 1 (Rxlevels are allowed for positioning in cell (Y))


Rx levels are not allowed for positioning in cell (N) ==> 0

Rx levels are allowed for positioning in cell (Y) ==> 1

Default value Rx levels are allowed for positioning in cell (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . PBS (Position Based Services) in BSC (55) (optional) ANDCitarx Usage (95) (optional)


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name RXA

MML Full Name Rx levels allowed for positioning

DB Name lcse.rx_allowed


13/04/2007



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


17 Location Measurement Unit Area (LMUA)radio network object parameters

17.1 base control function identification (BCF)

Parameter name BCF ID

Abbreviated name lmuEquipBcfId

Managed object LMUA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the base control function of theLMU equipment.

NOTE:

MML Range:

The range depends on the BSC hardware configuration and thecorresponding options.

NOTE:

LMU Equipment BCF ID cannot be modified. If you want tochange the LMU Equipment BCF ID, you must first delete theLMUA and then create it again with the new LMU Equipment BCFID that needs to be an existing BCF ID.



Default value -



Related functions -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Location Measurement Unit Area (LMUA) radio network objectparameters


Related options -


Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EXA, EXB, EXI

MML Abbreviated Name BCF

MML Full Name base control function identification

DB Name lmua.lmu_equip_id.bcf_id


17.2 frame number offset (FNO)

Parameter name Frame Number Offset

Abbreviated name fnOffset

Managed object LMUA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the frame number offset for FNphasing used in BSS synchronisation.

NOTE:

When modifying a Frame Number Offset for FN phasing, themodification can be made online if synchronization of lmu area'sBCF is disabled. See also synch enabled (SENA) parameter.



Default value 255




Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified If synch is not enabled in the chain.

Related parameters synchEnabled of BCF



13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name FNO

MML Full Name frame number offset

DB Name lmua.fn_offset


17.3 LMU area identification (LMUA)

Parameter name LMUA ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object LMUA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the identification for the LMU areato be created. LMU area is used for Synchronised BSS and/orPosition Based Services.



Default value -



Related functions -


Modified If synch is not enabled in the chain.



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EXA, EXR, EXB, EXI

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name LMUA

MML Full Name LMU area identification

DB Name lmua.lmu_area_id


17.4 LMU TSL fn offset (LTO)

Parameter name LMU TSL FN Offset

Abbreviated name lmuTslFnOffset

Managed object LMUA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Time Slot Offset for FNphasing, which is used in BSS synchronisation.

NOTE:

When modifying the time slot offset for FN phasing, themodification can be made online if synchronisation of LMU area'sBCF is disabled. See also parameters Synch Enabled (SENA) andFrame Number Offset (FNO).



Default value 0



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters synchEnabled of BCF


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LTO

MML Full Name LMU TSL fn offset


13/04/2007


DB Name lmua.lmu_tsl_fn_offset


17.5 transmission equipment (TRE)

Parameter name TRE ID

Abbreviated name lmuEquiptransmissionEquipment_ID

Managed object LMUA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the transmission equipment indexand type. The equipment type is always 'Unspecified transmissionequipment'.

NOTE:

Value 1 is not allowed in case of Nokia MetroSite, Nokia UltraSite,and Nokia Flexi EDGE. In addition, value 18 is the only possibleone for Nokia 2nd generation BTS. The parameter is obligatory.

NOTE:

Value range for the transmission equipment index: 1...254



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EXA, EXI

MML Abbreviated Name TRE

MML Full Name transmission equipment

DB Name lmua.lmu_equip_id.au_index

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





13/04/2007


18 Mobile allocation frequency list (MA/MAL) radio network object parameters

18.1 DFCA MA list state (MALS)

Parameter name DFCA MA List State

Abbreviated name maListState

Managed object MALD

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description DFCA MA list state indicates if the list is ready for use or if it isonly created but not yet employed by the DFCA algorithm.

NOTE:

Cannot be given in creation, but modification allowed aftercreation.

NOTE:

NetAct managed object class: MAL

MML managed object class: MA

Range and step 1 (DFCA In Use (IN)), 2 (DFCA Out Of Use (OUT))


DFCA In Use (IN) ==> 1

DFCA Out Of Use (OUT) ==> 2

Default value DFCA Out Of Use (OUT) (2)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified For DFCA MA lists 2001..2032: Online, when DFCA MA list is notattached to any BTS.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Mobile allocation frequency list (MA/MAL) radio network objectparameters





Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EBT, EBI

MML Abbreviated Name MALS

MML Full Name DFCA MA list state

DB Name ma.list_state


18.2 frequency (FREQ)


Abbreviated name frequency

Managed object MAL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 63

Description MML description:

With this parameter you define the frequency to be added to themobile allocation frequency list or to be removed from it. Themaximum number of frequencies in one mobile allocationfrequency list is 63. The maximum number of frequencies in oneDFCA MA frequency list is 32.

NetAct description:

With this parameter you define the frequencies belonging to themobile allocation frequency list.

NOTE:

Range:

GSM 800: 128..251

GSM 900: 1..124 and 975..1023, 0

GSM 1800: 512..885

GSM 1900: 512..810

MML Note: BCCH frequency must not be included in the list.


13/04/2007




Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified When the BTS is locked, if used in an RF hopping BTS.



Related options -

Related features -



MML Commands EBE, EBT, EBI



DB Name ma.freq_list.list(x)


18.3 identification of mobile allocation frequency list

Parameter name MAL ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object MAL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you identify the mobile allocation frequency listor the DFCA MA frequency list you are creating.

NOTE:

MML Range:

1... 2000 (MA frequency list)

2001 ... 2032 (DFCA MA frequency list, with DFCA activated)

NetAct NOTE:

With this parameter you identify the mobile allocation frequency listor the DFCA unsyncronised MA frequency list you are creating.

MAL ID range 2001...2032 in BSC MML corresponds to MALDobject range 2001...2032 in NetAct.



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -




MML Commands EBE, EBR, EBT, EBI


MML Full Name identification of mobile allocation frequency list




13/04/2007


18.4 type of mobile allocation frequency list

Parameter name Type Of Mobile Allocation Frequency List


Managed object MAL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the type of the mobile allocationfrequency list. The value depends on the frequency band used inthe BTS. The band is either GSM 800, GSM 900, GSM 1800, orGSM 1900.

Range and step GSM 900 (0), GSM 1800 (1), GSM 1900 (2), GSM 800 (5)


GSM 900 ==> 0

GSM 1800 ==> 1

GSM 1900 ==> 2

GSM 800 ==> 5

Default value -

Default value notes


Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References . I-ETS 300 022-1 (GSM 04.08). I-ETS 300 030 (GSM 05.02)

MML Commands EBE, EBI


MML Full Name type of mobile allocation frequency list

DB Name ma.freq_band


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


19 Network service entity (NSE) radionetwork object parameters

19.1 local UDP port number (LPNBR)

Parameter name Local UDP Port

Abbreviated name localUdpPort

Managed object NSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the local user datagram protocol(UDP) port number.

NOTE: Range 50000...65535 is highly recommended, but alsolower values can be given.

This parameter can be given only when creating the first NS-VL tothe NSE.



Default value 50000



Related functions -




Related options -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Network service entity (NSE) radio network object parameters


MML Commands FXC

MML Abbreviated Name LPNBR

MML Full Name local UDP port number

DB Name



Parameter name NSEI

Abbreviated name nsEntityId

Managed object NSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the network service entity. TheNSEI is used in the BSS and SGSN to determine the NS-VCs thatprovide services to BVCIs.

NOTE:

Range:

The value must be the same in the BSS and in the SGSN andalso unique within the BSC.



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -




MML Commands FXC, FXI, FXK, FXO, FXR


13/04/2007




DB Name


19.3 NSE type

Parameter name NSE Type

Abbreviated name nseType

Managed object NSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate transmission type of NSE in Gbinterface. Type can be IP or Frame Relay which is beingdetermined according to type of the first NS-VS created to theNSE by the user.

Range and step Frame Relay Connection To SGSN (0), Dynamic IP Connection ToSGSN (1), Static IP Connection To SGSN (2)


Frame Relay Connection To SGSN ==> 0

Dynamic IP Connection To SGSN ==> 1

Static IP Connection To SGSN ==> 2

Default value Frame Relay Connection To SGSN (0)



Related functions -




Related options -



References -

MML Commands


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name NSE type

DB Name





Managed object NSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1






Default value -




Related functions -







References -

MML Commands FXA, FXK, FXL



DB Name



13/04/2007


19.5 PFC feature mode

Parameter name PFC Feature Mode

Abbreviated name pfcFeatureMode

Managed object NSE

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define if the Enhanced Quality of Service(EQoS) feature is enabled for an NSE.






Related functions -


Modified The value is updated internally after PFC feature negotiation withSGSN for a NSE. Visible, but not changeable by the operator.



Related options -



References -

MML Commands


MML Full Name PFC feature mode

DB Name


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


20 Network service virtual connection(NS_VC) radio network objectparameters




Managed object NSVC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter defines the administrative state of the object. Thelast NSVCI of the NSEI can be locked only if there are no GPRS-enabled cells related to the NSEI (unless forced parameter is notused).



Unlocked ==> 1

Locked ==> 3

Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Network service virtual connection (NS_VC) radio network objectparameters

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands FXS



DB Name bsc_ns_vc.user_status


20.2 bearer channel identifier (BCI)

Parameter name Bearer Channel Identifier

Abbreviated name frBearerChannelId

Managed object NSVC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the bearer channel with anidentifier. Parameter is alternative with parameter bearer channelname.

Note! Range:

0..95 for BSC3i 660

0..399 for BSC3i 2000

0..63 for other BSCs



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features . Gb interface for BSS

Interfaces -



13/04/2007


MML Commands FXC, FXO

MML Abbreviated Name BCI

MML Full Name bearer channel identifier

DB Name


20.3 bearer channel name (BCN)

Parameter name Bearer Channel Name

Abbreviated name frBearerChannelName

Managed object NSVC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the bearer channel with a name.The name can contain from 1 to 10 characters (A-Z, 0-9). Thename starts with a character A-Z and is unique within networkelement. Parameter is alternative with parameter bearer channelidentification.



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features . Gb interface for BSS

Interfaces -

References

MML Commands FXC, FXO

MML Abbreviated Name BCN

MML Full Name bearer channel name

DB Name

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




20.4 committed information rate (CIR)

Parameter name Committed Information Rate

Abbreviated name committedInfoRate

Managed object NSVC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the committed information rate.

NOTE: MML RANGE:

ETSI: 16..1984 (kbit/s, steps of 16 kbit/s)

ANSI: 16..1536 (kbit/s, steps of 16 kbit/s)



Default value -



Related functions -


Modified When the NS-VC is locked. NOTE: When modifying committedinformation rate, other NSVC parameter values cannot be modifiedat the same time.




Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands FXC

MML Abbreviated Name CIR

MML Full Name committed information rate

DB Name GBADMI



13/04/2007


20.5 data link connection identifier (DLCI)

Parameter name Data Link Connection Identifier

Abbreviated name dataLinkConnectionId

Managed object NSVC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the data link connection identifier.



Default value -



Related functions -





Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands FXC

MML Abbreviated Name DLCI

MML Full Name data link connection identifier

DB Name



Parameter name NSEI

Abbreviated name nsEntityId

Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the network service entity. TheNSEI is used in the BSC and SGSN to determine the NS-VLs thatprovide services to BSSGP layer. The value has to be the sameand unique in the BSC and SGSN.

NOTE: BSS Radio Network Parameter object class: NSVC



Default value -



Related functions -





Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands FXC



DB Name


20.7 network service virtual connection identifier(NSVCI)

Parameter name NSVC ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object NSVC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you identify the permanent virtual circuit.

The value must be the same and unique in both BSS and SGSNin FR. In IP dynamic confirmation the automatically created NSVCIvalues do not have to be the same nor unique in the BSS andSGSN.



Default value -



Related functions -





Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands FXC, FXD, FXM, FXS, FXO

MML Abbreviated Name NSVCI

MML Full Name network service virtual connection identifier

DB Name


20.8 network service virtual connection name (NAME)

Parameter name Network Service Virtual Connection Name

Abbreviated name nwName

Managed object NSVC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you give a name to the network service virtualconnection. The name must be unique in the BSC.

The value has to be given as a character string includingcharacters A-Z, 0-9, hyphen (-), and underscore (_).

NOTE:

The first character must be a letter.

Default: No name



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands FXC, FXD, FXM, FXS, FXO


MML Full Name network service virtual connection name

DB Name


20.9 Network Service Virtual Link Identifier (NSVLI)

Parameter name Network Service Virtual Link Identifier

Abbreviated name ipNsVirtualConnectionId

Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you identify the network service virtual link.

NOTE: The value must be unique in the BSC.




Default value -



Related functions -






Interfaces -


MML Commands FXH, FXI, FXJ, FXK

MML Abbreviated Name NSVLI

MML Full Name Network Service Virtual Link Identifier

DB Name


20.10 network service virtual link name

Parameter name Network Service Virtual Link Name

Abbreviated name nsVirtualConnectionName

Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you give a name to the network service virtuallink.

Note: The first character must be a letter. The name has to beunique in the BSC. As a default, the parameter NS-VL does nothave a name.


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands FXH, FXI, FXJ, FXK


MML Full Name network service virtual link name

DB Name





Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Default value -


13/04/2007





Related functions -






Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands FXK, FXI



DB Name


20.12 preconfigured SGSN IP endpoint (PRE)

Parameter name Pre-configured SGSN IP Endpoint

Abbreviated name preconfSgsnIpEpInd

Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify whether the SGSN IP endpoint isdynamic (preconfigured) or static. If the parameter is set to Yes,the configuration is dynamic. If the parameter is set to No, theconfiguration is static. This parameter can be given only whencreating the first NS-VL to the NSE.




Default value -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related functions -





Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands FXK

MML Abbreviated Name PRE

MML Full Name preconfigured SGSN IP endpoint

DB Name


20.13 remote data weight (RDW)

Parameter name Remote Data Weight

Abbreviated name dataWeight

Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the remote data weight for staticconfiguration.

Data Weight can be present at instance creation and is modifiableonly when the Pre-configured SGSN IP Endpoint parameter valueis "false".




Default value -



Special value Cannot be 0 if there is only one NS-VL in NSE (0)

Related functions -


13/04/2007


Modification Online

Modified Modifiable only when Pre-configured SGSN IP Endpoint(preconfSgsnIpEpInd) is FALSE.




Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands FXJ, FXK

MML Abbreviated Name RDW

MML Full Name remote data weight

DB Name


20.14 remote host name (RHOST)

Parameter name Remote Host Name

Abbreviated name dnsName

Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the Remote DNS name. Theparameter is alternative with IP Address.

The value has to be given as a character string includingcharacters A-Z, 0-9 , hyphen (-) and dot (.) The maximum lengthof the name is 110 characters.

MML NOTE: Parameter is entered inside quotation marks.




Default value -



Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007







Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name RHOST

MML Full Name remote host name

DB Name


20.15 Remote IP Address Value

Parameter name Remote IP Address Value

Abbreviated name ipAddressValue

Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter represents the IP address.

For IPv4 value range and format is “0..255.0..255.0..255.0..255"and for IPv6 (note: hexadecimal values) “0..FFFF:0..FFFF:0..FFFF:0..FFFF:0..FFFF:0..FFFF:0..FFFF:0..FFFF”.

Embedded IPv4 addresses are not supported with IPv6.Parameter is alternative with parameter Remote Host Name.

NOTE: both IP address types are entered in quotation marks.




Default value -



Related functions -



13/04/2007


Related parameters ipAddressVersion of NSVL



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name Remote IP Address Value

DB Name


20.16 remote signalling weight (RSW)

Parameter name Remote Signalling Weight

Abbreviated name signWeight

Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the remote signalling weight forstatic configuration.

Signalling Weight can be present at instance creation and ismodifiable only when the Pre-configured SGSN IP Endpointparameter value is "false".




Default value -



Special value Cannot be 0 if there is only one NS-VL in NSE. (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified Modifiable only when Pre-configured SGSN IP Endpoint(preconfSgsnIpEpInd) is FALSE.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands FXJ, FXK

MML Abbreviated Name RSW

MML Full Name remote signalling weight

DB Name


20.17 Remote UDP Port Number (RPNBR)

Parameter name Remote UDP Port

Abbreviated name udpPort

Managed object NSVL

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the remote user datagram protocol(UDP) port number. The UDP Port field is modifiable only whenthe Network Service Virtual Link is located at the SGSN. Theparameter cannot be modified in the BSC.

NOTE: Range 50000...65535 is highly recommended, but alsolower values can be given. If the parameter is not given, thesystem will set it as 50000.




Default value 50000



Related functions -





13/04/2007



Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name RPNBR

MML Full Name Remote UDP Port Number

DB Name


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


21 Packet Control Unit (PCU) radio networkobject parameters

21.1 BCSU ID (BCSU)

Parameter name BCSU ID

Abbreviated name bcsuID

Managed object PCU

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the base station signalling unitwhere the physical PCU card is installed and which you want toattach to the logical PCU object to be created.

Note:



Range 0..8 for other BSCs



Default value -



Related functions -






DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Packet Control Unit (PCU) radio network object parameters

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands FXA, FXL

MML Abbreviated Name BCSU

MML Full Name BCSU ID

DB Name





Managed object PCU

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1




NOTE:

This parameter is used to attach PCU object to Packet ControlPool (PCP, related object PSE, Packet Service Entity) or to movesingle PCU object (PCU using Gb over IP) to the existing PCP.PCU attached to pool containing several PCUs cannot be movedto the new pool by modifying this parameter but PCU deletion /creation scenarios have to be used.



Default value -




Related functions -





13/04/2007




Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands FXA, FXI, FXK, FXL , ESE, ESM, EQC, EQV, EQO



DB Name


21.3 PCU identifier (PCU ID)

Parameter name PCU Identifier

Abbreviated name pcuIdentifier

Managed object PCU

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter identifies the PCU object in the BSC.



Default value -



Related functions -






Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands FXL

MML Abbreviated Name PCU ID

MML Full Name PCU identifier

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name


21.4 PCU Index (PCU)

Parameter name PCU Index

Abbreviated name pcuID

Managed object PCU

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the packet control unit logicalindex of physical card.

NOTE: Parameter old Full name has been PCU ID.



Default value -



Related functions -






Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands FXA, FXL, ESE, ESM, ESI

MML Abbreviated Name PCU

MML Full Name PCU Index

DB Name



13/04/2007


21.5 plug-in unit type

Parameter name Plug-in Unit Type

Abbreviated name piuType

Managed object PCU

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description This parameter describes the plug-in unit type.

Range and step pcu_c (276), pcu_s_c (365), pcu_t_c (379), pcu2_u_c (398),pcu_b_c (979), pcu2_d_c (985), no_piu_type_info_c (1023)


pcu_c ==> 276

pcu_s_c ==> 365

pcu_t_c ==> 379

pcu2_u_c ==> 398

pcu_b_c ==> 979

pcu2_d_c ==> 985

no_piu_type_info_c ==> 1023

Default value no_piu_type_info_c (1023)



Related functions -






Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands


MML Full Name plug-in unit type

DB Name


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


22 Power control (POC) radio networkobject parameters

22.1 ALA enabled (AENA)

Parameter name ALA Enabled

Abbreviated name enableAla

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you switch on and off the automatic linkadaptation function where the channel coding is changed between14.4 kbit/s and 9.6 kbit/s.

Range and step 0 (automatic link adaptation is disabled (N)),

1 (automatic link adaptation is enabled (Y))

Formula for getting internal value . automatic link adaptation is disabled (N) => 0. automatic link adaptation is enabled (Y) => 1

Default value automatic link adaptation is disabled (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Power control (POC) radio network object parameters

MML Commands EUC, EUG, EUO

MML Abbreviated Name AENA

MML Full Name ALA enabled

DB Name poc.enable_ala


22.2 binary representation ALPHA (ALPHA)

Parameter name Binary Representation ALPHA

Abbreviated name alpha

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you describe the binary representation of theparameter α.

MML Range:

0: α=0.0

1: α=0.1

2: α=0.2

3: α=0.3

.

.

.

10: α=1.0

NOTE:

MML DEFAULT:

7: α=0.7 for GSM 800 and GSM 900 band

8: α=0.8 for GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 band



Default value 7



Related functions -

Modification Online


13/04/2007





Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands EUC, EUM, EUO

MML Abbreviated Name ALPHA

MML Full Name binary representation ALPHA

DB Name poc.gprs_alpha


22.3 binary representation TAU (GAMMA)

Parameter name Binary Representation TAU

Abbreviated name gamma

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you describe the binary representation of theparameter τ ch for MS output power control.

NOTE:

MML Default:

34 (GSM 800 and GSM 900)

36 (GSM 1800 and GSM 1900)



Default value 34



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name GAMMA

MML Full Name binary representation TAU

DB Name poc.gprs_gamma


22.4 bit error probability filter averaging period (BEP)

Parameter name Bit Error Probability Filter Averaging Period

Abbreviated name bepPeriod

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the bit error probability filteraveraging period for EGPRS channel quality measurements.

Range and step 1 (0), 2 (1), 3 (2), 4 (3), 5 (4), 7 (5), 10 (6), 12 (7), 15 (8), 20 (9),25 (10)


1 ==> 0

2 ==> 1

3 ==> 2

4 ==> 3

5 ==> 4

7 ==> 5

10 ==> 6

12 ==> 7

15 ==> 8

20 ==> 9

25 ==> 10




13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . BSC GPRS Param Enabled (GPRS O&M in BSC) (39) (optional)AND Enhanced GPRS (EGPRS) Usage (51) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name BEP

MML Full Name bit error probability filter averaging period

DB Name poc.bep_period


22.5 BS TX pwr max (PMAX1)

Parameter name BS Tx Pwr Max

Abbreviated name bsTxPwrMax

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the maximum transmission powerof the BTS as an attenuation from the peak power of the TRX.This parameter is used for frequency bands GSM 800 and GSM900.

The total attenuation for GSM 800 and GSM 900 band TRXs isBS TX pwr max (PMAX1) + BS TX pwr offset (POFF).

NOTE:

If Nokia InSite base station's transmission power has beenattenuated more than its maximum output power (18dB), the BTSwill use its minimum transmission power.



Default value 0

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters bsTxPwrOffset of POC


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References . GSM reference: I-ETS 300 033 (GSM 05.05). GSM reference: I-ETS 300 034-1 (GSM 05.08)



MML Full Name BS TX pwr max

DB Name poc.power_control_bts.bs_txpwr_max


22.6 BS TX pwr max1x00 (PMAX2)

Parameter name BS TX Pwr Max1x00

Abbreviated name bsTxPwrMax1x00

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the maximum transmission powerof the BTS as an attenuation from the peak power of the TRX.This parameter is used for frequency bands GSM 1800 and GSM1900.

The total attenuation for GSM 1800 and GSM 1900 band TRXs isBS TX pwr max1x00 (PMAX2) + BS TX pwr offset (POFF).

NOTE:

If Nokia InSite base station's transmission power has beenattenuated more than its maximum output power (22dB), the BTSwill use its minimum transmission power.




13/04/2007


Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters bsTxPwrMax of POC, bsTxPwrOffset of POC


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -




MML Full Name BS TX pwr max1x00

DB Name poc.power_control_bts.bs_txpwr_max_1x00


22.7 BS TX pwr min (PMIN)

Parameter name BS Tx Pwr Min

Abbreviated name bsTxPwrMin

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the minimum transmission powerof the BTS as an attenuation from the peak power of the TRX.The total attenuation (bs tx pwr max (PMAX1) + bs tx pwr offset(POFF) or bs tx pwr max1x00 (PMAX2) + bs tx pwr offset (POFF))must be lower than the value of this parameter or equal to it.

NOTE:

If the InSite base station's transmission power is attenuated morethan the maximum output power of the InSite BTS (GSM900=18dB, GSM 1800/1900=22dB), the BTS will use its minimumtransmission power.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 30 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online

Related parameters bsTxPwrMax of POC


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name PMIN

MML Full Name BS TX pwr min

DB Name poc.power_control_bts.bs_txpwr_min


22.8 BS TX pwr offset (POFF)

Parameter name BS TX Pwr Offset

Abbreviated name bsTxPwrOffset

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you identify a transmission power attenuationoffset for non-BCCH Super-Reuse TRXs of the segment if FRT ofTRX is 16 and Handover Support for Coverage Enhancement(HSCE) feature is active in the segment.

With this parameter you identify a transmission power attenuationoffset for non-BCCH Super-Reuse TRXs of the segment.The totalattenuation is (bs tx pwr max (PMAX1) + bs tx pwr offset (POFF)or bs tx pwr max1x00 (PMAX2) + bs tx pwr offset(POFF)).

NOTE:

If Nokia InSite base station's transmission power has beenattenuated more than its maximum output power (GSM 900=18dB,GSM 1800/1900=22dB),, the BTS will use its minimumtransmission power.



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . BSR Support In BSC (79) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name POFF

MML Full Name BS TX pwr offset

DB Name poc.power_control_bts.bs_txpwr_super_offset


22.9 idle mode signal strength filter period (IFP)

Parameter name Idle Mode Signal Strength Filter Period

Abbreviated name tAvgW

Managed object POC

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you control the signal strength filter period forpower control in the packet idle mode.



Default value 9



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name IFP

MML Full Name idle mode signal strength filter period

DB Name poc.gprs_tavgw


22.10 min int between ALA (AMIN)

Parameter name Min Int Between ALA

Abbreviated name minIntBetweenAla

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the time interval between twoconsecutive automatic link adaptation procedures where thechannel coding is changed between 14.4 kbit/s and 9.6 kbit/s.




13/04/2007


Default value 10



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name AMIN

MML Full Name min int between ALA

DB Name poc.min_int_betw_ala


22.11 pc averaging lev dl weighting (LDW)

Parameter name PC Averaging Lev DL Weighting

Abbreviated name pcALDlWeighting

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting factor for calculatingthe averaged values from the signal strength downlinkmeasurements for the power control procedure.


NOTE:

Range:

Value 1 indicates the DTX measurements for the weighting factor.

Value 3 indicates the highest weighting factor



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EUA, EUC, EUO

MML Abbreviated Name LDW

MML Full Name pc averaging lev dl weighting

DB Name poc.pc_averaging_lev_dl.weighting


22.12 pc averaging lev dl window size (LDS)

Parameter name PC Averaging Lev DL Window Size

Abbreviated name pcALDlWindowSize

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter calculates averaged values from signal strengthdownlink measurements for the power control process. Theparameter includes the averaging window size in SACCH periods.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online



13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LDS

MML Full Name pc averaging lev dl window size

DB Name poc.pc_averaging_lev_dl.window_size


22.13 pc averaging lev ul weighting (LUW)

Parameter name PC Averaging Lev UL Weighting

Abbreviated name pcALUlWeighting

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting factor for calculatingthe averaged values from the signal strength uplink measurementsfor the power control procedure.


NOTE:

Range:





Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LUW

MML Full Name pc averaging lev ul weighting

DB Name poc.pc_averaging_lev_ul.weighting


22.14 pc averaging lev ul window size (LUS)

Parameter name PC Averaging Lev UL Window Size

Abbreviated name pcALUlWindowSize

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter calculates averaged values from signal strengthuplink measurements for the power control process. Theparameter includes the averaging window size in SACCH periods.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



13/04/2007


MML Abbreviated Name LUS

MML Full Name pc averaging lev ul window size

DB Name poc.pc_averaging_lev_ul.window_size


22.15 pc averaging qual dl weighting (QDW)

Parameter name PC Averaging Qual DL Weighting

Abbreviated name pcAQLDlWeighting

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting factor for calculatingthe averaged values from the signal quality downlinkmeasurements for the power control procedure.


NOTE:

Range:





Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name QDW

MML Full Name pc averaging qual dl weighting

DB Name poc.pc_averaging_qual_dl.weighting


22.16 pc averaging qual dl window size (QDS)

Parameter name PC Averaging Qual DL Window Size

Abbreviated name pcAQLDlWindowSize

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter calculates averaged values from signal strengthdownlink measurements for the power control process. Theparameter includes the averaging window size in SACCH periods.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QDS

MML Full Name pc averaging qual dl window size

DB Name poc.pc_averaging_qual_dl.window_size



13/04/2007


22.17 pc averaging qual ul weighting (QUW)

Parameter name PC Averaging Qual UL Weighting

Abbreviated name pcAQLUlWeighting

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the weighting factor for calculatingthe averaged values from the signal quality uplink measurementsfor the power control procedure.


NOTE:

Range:





Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QUW

MML Full Name pc averaging qual ul weighting

DB Name poc.pc_averaging_qual_ul.weighting


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



22.18 pc averaging qual ul window size (QUS)

Parameter name PC Averaging Qual UL Window Size

Abbreviated name pcAQLUlWindowSize

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter calculates averaged values from signal strengthuplink measurements for the power control process. Theparameter includes the averaging window size in SACCH periods.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name QUS

MML Full Name pc averaging qual ul window size

DB Name poc.pc_averaging_qual_ul.window_size


22.19 pc lower threshold dl Rx qual AMR FR (LDRF)

Parameter name PC Lower Threshold Dl Rx Qual AMR FR

Abbreviated name amrPocFrPcLThrDlRxQual

Managed object BTS


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the downlinksignal quality measurements for the BTS power increase. Definedfor the default FR AMR set.

NOTE:


MML managed object class: POC

Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EUB, EUC, EUO

MML Abbreviated Name LDRF

MML Full Name pc lower threshold dl Rx qual AMR FR


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_power_control.lower_thr_dl_rx_qual


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



22.20 pc lower threshold dl Rx qual AMR HR (LDRH)

Parameter name PC Lower Threshold Dl Rx Qual AMR HR

Abbreviated name amrPocHrPcLThrDlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the downlinksignal quality measurements for the BTS power increase. Definedfor the default HR AMR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EUC, EUB, EUO

MML Abbreviated Name LDRH


13/04/2007


MML Full Name pc lower threshold dl Rx qual AMR HR


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_power_control.lower_thr_dl_rx_qual


22.21 pc lower threshold ul Rx qual AMR FR (LURF)

Parameter name PC Lower Threshold Ul Rx Qual AMR FR

Abbreviated name amrPocFrPcLThrUlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the downlinksignal quality measurements for the MS power increase. Definedfor the default FR AMR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LURF

MML Full Name pc lower threshold ul Rx qual AMR FR


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_power_control.lower_thr_ul_rx_qual


22.22 pc lower threshold ul Rx qual AMR HR (LURH)

Parameter name PC Lower Threshold Ul Rx Qual AMR HR

Abbreviated name amrPocHrPcLThrUlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the downlinksignal quality measurements for the BTS power increase. Definedfor the default HR AMR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


13/04/2007



< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LURH

MML Full Name pc lower threshold ul Rx qual AMR HR


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_power_control.lower_thr_ul_rx_qual


22.23 pc lower thresholds lev dl Nx (LDN)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Nx

Abbreviated name pcLTLevDlNx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Nx: The total number of averages that have to be taken intoaccount before a power increase decision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EUC, EUO, EUS


MML Full Name pc lower thresholds lev dl Nx

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_lev_dl.nx


22.24 pc lower thresholds lev dl Px (LDP)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Px

Abbreviated name pcLTLevDlPx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Px: Number of averages that have to be lower than the thresholdbefore making a power increase decision.




13/04/2007


Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name pc lower thresholds lev dl Px

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_lev_dl.px


22.25 pc lower thresholds lev dl Rx level (LDR)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level

Abbreviated name pcLowerThresholdsLevDLRxLevel

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Rx level: Threshold level for a downlink power increase.






Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name pc lower thresholds lev dl Rx level

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_lev_dl.rx_level


22.26 pc lower thresholds lev ul Nx (LUN)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Nx

Abbreviated name pcLTLevUlNx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process. Nx:The total number of averages that have to be taken into accountbefore a power increase decision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007




MML Full Name pc lower thresholds lev ul Nx

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_lev_ul.nx


22.27 pc lower thresholds lev ul Px (LUP)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Px

Abbreviated name pcLTLevUlPx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process. Px:Number of averages that have to be lower than the thresholdbefore making a power increase decision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name pc lower thresholds lev ul Px

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_lev_ul.px


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



22.28 pc lower thresholds lev ul Rx level (LUR)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level

Abbreviated name pcLowerThresholsLevULRxLevel

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process. Rxlevel: Threshold level for an uplink power increase.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name pc lower thresholds lev ul Rx level

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_lev_ul.rx_level


22.29 pc lower thresholds qual dl Nx (LDN)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Nx


13/04/2007


Abbreviated name pcLTQualDlNx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Nx: The total number of averages that have to be taken intoaccount before a power increase decision.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EUC, EUO, EUQ


MML Full Name pc lower thresholds qual dl Nx

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_qual_dl.nx


22.30 pc lower thresholds qual dl Px (LDP)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Px

Abbreviated name pcLTQualDlPx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Px: Number of averages that have to be lower than the thresholdbefore making a power increase decision.



Default value 3



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name pc lower thresholds qual dl Px

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_qual_dl.px


22.31 pc lower thresholds qual dl Rx qual (LDR)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual

Abbreviated name pcLTQualDlRxQual

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Rx qual: Threshold level for a downlink power increase.

Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


13/04/2007



< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name pc lower thresholds qual dl Rx qual

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_qual_dl.rx_qual


22.32 pc lower thresholds qual ul Nx (LUN)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Nx

Abbreviated name pcLTQualUlNx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process. Nx:The total number of averages that have to be taken into accountbefore a power increase decision.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name pc lower thresholds qual ul Nx

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_qual_ul.nx


22.33 pc lower thresholds qual ul Px (LUP)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Px

Abbreviated name pcLTQualUlPx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process. Px:Number of averages that have to be lower than the thresholdbefore making a power increase decision.




13/04/2007


Default value 3



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name pc lower thresholds qual ul Px

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_qual_ul.px


22.34 pc lower thresholds qual ul Rx qual (LUR)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual

Abbreviated name pcLTQualUlRxQual

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process. Rxqual: Threshold level for an uplink power increase.

Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name pc lower thresholds qual ul RX qual

DB Name poc.pc_lower_thresholds_qual_ul.rx_qual


22.35 pc lower thresholds qual144 Nx (LQN)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Qual144 Nx

Abbreviated name pcLTQual144Nx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description The parameter is used for comparing the averaged values of thesignal quality uplink and downlink measurements for triggering thepower control procedure for 14.4 kbit/s connections. Nx: Numberof averages taken into account before a power increase decisionis possible.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EUC, EUQ, EUO

MML Abbreviated Name LQN

MML Full Name pc lower thresholds qual144 Nx

DB Name poc.pc_low_thres_qual.nx


22.36 pc lower thresholds qual144 Px (LQP)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Qual144 Px

Abbreviated name pcLTQual144Px

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the averaged values of thesignal quality uplink and downlink measurements for triggering thepower control procedure for 14.4 kbit/s connections. Px: Numberof averages out of total averages that have to be greater than orequal to the threshold before a power increase decision ispossible.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value 3



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LQP

MML Full Name pc lower thresholds qual144 Px

DB Name poc.pc_low_thres_qual.px


22.37 pc lower thresholds qual144 Rx level (LQR)

Parameter name PC Lower Thresholds Qual144 Rx Level

Abbreviated name pcLTQual144RxQual

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameter is used for comparing the averaged values of thesignal quality uplink and downlink measurements for triggering thepower control procedure for 14.4 kbit/s connections. Rx qual:Threshold level for power increase.

Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


13/04/2007



< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LQR

MML Full Name pc lower thresholds qual144 Rx level

DB Name poc.pc_low_thres_qual.rx_qual


22.38 pc upper threshold dl Rx qual AMR FR (UDRF)

Parameter name PC Upper Threshold Dl Rx Qual AMR FR

Abbreviated name amrPocFrPcUThrDlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the downlinksignal quality measurements for the BTS power decrease. Definedfor the default FR AMR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UDRF

MML Full Name pc upper threshold dl Rx qual AMR FR


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_power_control.upper_thr_dl_rx_qual



13/04/2007


22.39 pc upper threshold dl Rx qual AMR HR (UDRH)

Parameter name PC Upper Threshold Dl Rx Qual AMR HR

Abbreviated name amrPocHrPcUThrDlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the downlinksignal quality measurements for the BTS power decrease. Definedfor the default HR AMR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UDRH

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name pc upper threshold dl Rx qual AMR HR


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_power_control.upper_thr_dl_rx_qual


22.40 pc upper threshold ul Rx qual AMR FR (UURF)

Parameter name PC Upper Threshold Ul Rx Qual AMR FR

Abbreviated name amrPocFrPcUThrUlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the downlinksignal quality measurements for the MS power decrease. Definedfor the default FR AMR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online



13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UURF

MML Full Name pc upper threshold ul Rx qual AMR FR


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_fr_power_control.upper_thr_ul_rx_qual


22.41 pc upper threshold ul Rx qual AMR HR (UURH)

Parameter name PC Upper Threshold Ul Rx Qual AMR HR

Abbreviated name amrPocHrPcUThrUlRxQual

Managed object BTS

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the threshold level of the downlinksignal quality measurements for the MS power decrease. Definedfor the default HR AMR set.

NOTE:



Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UURH

MML Full Name pc upper threshold ul Rx qual AMR HR


DB Name base_station.s10_prms.amr_hr_power_control.upper_thr_ul_rx_qual


22.42 pc upper thresholds lev dl Nx (UDN)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Nx

Abbreviated name pcUTLevDlNx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Nx: The total number of averages that have to be taken intoaccount before the power reduction decision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UDN

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds lev dl Nx

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_lev_dl.nx


22.43 pc upper thresholds lev dl Px (UDP)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Px

Abbreviated name pcUTLevDlPx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Px: Number of averages that have to be lower than the thresholdbefore making a power reduction decision.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UDP

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds lev dl Px

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_lev_dl.px


22.44 pc upper thresholds lev dl Rx level (UDR)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Lev DL Rx Level

Abbreviated name pcUpperThresholdsLevDLRxLevel

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Rx level: Threshold level for a downlink power reduction.






Related functions -

Modification Online



13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UDR

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds lev dl Rx level

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_lev_dl.rx_level


22.45 pc upper thresholds lev ul Nx (UUN)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Nx

Abbreviated name pcUTLevUlNx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process.Nx:The total number of averages that have to be taken into accountbefore the power reduction decision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




MML Abbreviated Name UUN

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds lev ul Nx

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_lev_ul.nx


22.46 pc upper thresholds lev ul Px (UUP)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Px

Abbreviated name pcUTLevUlPx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process.Px:Number of averages that have to be lower than the thresholdbefore making a power reduction decision.



Default value 1



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UUP

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds lev ul Px

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_lev_ul.px



13/04/2007


22.47 pc upper thresholds lev ul Rx level (UUR)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Lev UL Rx Level

Abbreviated name pcUpperThresholdsLevULRxLevel

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process.Rxlevel: Threshold level for an uplink power reduction.

Range and step -110...-47, step 1


Default value -70



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UUR

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds lev ul Rx level

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_lev_ul.rx_level


22.48 pc upper thresholds qual dl Nx (UDN)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Nx

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Abbreviated name pcUTQualDlNx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Nx: The total number of averages that have to be taken intoaccount before the power reduction decision.



Default value 32



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UDN

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds qual dl Nx

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_qual_dl.nx


22.49 pc upper thresholds qual dl Px (UDP)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Px

Abbreviated name pcUTQualDlPx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Px: Number of averages that have to be lower than the thresholdbefore making a power reduction decision.



Default value 32



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UDP

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds qual dl Px

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_qual_dl.px


22.50 pc upper thresholds qual dl Rx qual (UDR)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Qual DL Rx Qual

Abbreviated name pcUTQualDlRxQual

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualitydownlink measurements for triggering the power control process.Rx qual: Threshold level for a downlink power reduction.

Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UDR

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds qual dl Rx qual

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_qual_dl.rx_qual


22.51 pc upper thresholds qual ul Nx (UUN)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Nx

Abbreviated name pcUTQualUlNx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process. Nx:The total number of averages that have to be taken into accountbefore the power reduction decision.



Default value 32



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UUN

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds qual ul Nx

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_qual_ul.nx


22.52 pc upper thresholds qual ul Px (UUP)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Px

Abbreviated name pcUTQualUlPx

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process. Px:Number of averages that have to be lower than the thresholdbefore making a power reduction decision.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 32



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UUP

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds qual ul Px

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_qual_ul.px


22.53 pc upper thresholds qual ul Rx qual (UUR)

Parameter name PC Upper Thresholds Qual UL Rx Qual

Abbreviated name pcUTQualUlRxQual

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description The parameters compare the averaged values of signal qualityuplink measurements for triggering the power control process.Rxqual: Threshold level for an uplink power reduction.

Range and step < 0.2% (0), 0.2% - 0.4% (1), 0.4% - 0.8% (2), 0.8% - 1.6% (3),1.6% - 3.2% (4), 3.2% - 6.4% (5), 6.4% - 12.8% (6), > 12.8% (7)


13/04/2007



< 0.2% ==> 0

0.2% - 0.4% ==> 1

0.4% - 0.8% ==> 2

0.8% - 1.6% ==> 3

1.6% - 3.2% ==> 4

3.2% - 6.4% ==> 5

6.4% - 12.8% ==> 6

> 12.8% ==> 7




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name UUR

MML Full Name pc upper thresholds qual ul Rx qual

DB Name poc.pc_upper_thresholds_qual_ul.rx_qual


22.54 power control interval (INT)

Parameter name Power Control Interval

Abbreviated name pcControlInterval

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the minimum interval between thechanges in the radio frequency power level.

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Default value 2



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name INT

MML Full Name power control interval

DB Name poc.power_control_bts.p_con_interval


22.55 power ctrl enabled (PENA)

Parameter name Power CTRL Enabled

Abbreviated name pcControlEnabled

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate whether the BTS power control isenabled.

Range and step power control is disabled (N) (0), power control is enabled (Y) (1)


power control is disabled (N) ==> 0

power control is enabled (Y) ==> 1

Default value power control is enabled (Y) (1)



13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name PENA

MML Full Name power ctrl enabled

DB Name poc.power_control_bts.enable_bs_rfpwr_ctrl


22.56 power decr limit band 0 (PD0)

Parameter name Power Decr Limit Band 0

Abbreviated name pwrDecrLimitBand0

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum allowed powerdecrease step size. This step size limit is used when a powerdecrease of a MS is performed due to high uplink quality, and theaveraged uplink signal quality (bit error rate) is lower than 0.2%.



Default value 38



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PD0

MML Full Name power decr limit band 0

DB Name poc.pwr_decr_limit_band_0





Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum allowed powerdecrease step size. This step size limit is used when a powerdecrease of a MS is performed due to high uplink quality, andaveraged uplink signal quality (bit error rate) is between 0.2% and0.4%.



Default value 38



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007










Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the maximum allowed powerdecrease step size. This step size limit is used when a powerdecrease of a MS is performed due to high uplink quality, andaveraged uplink signal quality (bit error rate) is higher than 0.4%.



Default value 38



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -






DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



22.59 power decr qual factor (PDF)

Parameter name Power Decr Qual Factor

Abbreviated name powerDecrQualFactor

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you enable or disable the MS power decreasedue to signal quality with the defined variable power change stepsize. This is done when the uplink signal level is lower than theoptimum uplink RF signal level and the averaged signal qualityequals the quality threshold. The parameter also has an effect onthe size of the power decrease step.

Range and step Disabled (0), Enabled (1)


Disabled ==> 0

Enabled ==> 1

Default value Enabled (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PDF

MML Full Name power decr qual factor

DB Name poc.power_decr_qual_factor



13/04/2007


22.60 power incr step size (INC)

Parameter name Power Incr Step Size

Abbreviated name pcIncrStepSize

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the step size for increasing thetransmission power of the mobile station.



Default value 4



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name INC

MML Full Name power incr step size

DB Name poc.power_control_bts.pow_incr_step_size


22.61 power limit ALA (ALIM)

Parameter name Power Limit ALA

Abbreviated name powerLimitAla

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you determine the MS and BTS power levelsfor automatic link adaptation function, where the channel coding ischanged between 14.4 kbit/s and 9.6 kbit/s.



Default value 6



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ALIM

MML Full Name power limit ALA

DB Name poc.power_limit_ala


22.62 power red step size (RED)

Parameter name Power Red Step Size

Abbreviated name pcRedStepSize

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the step size for reducing thetransmission power of the mobile station.



Default value 2


13/04/2007




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name RED

MML Full Name power red step size

DB Name poc.power_control_bts.pow_red_step_size


22.63 transfer mode signal strength filter period (TFP)

Parameter name Transfer Mode Signal Strength Filter Period

Abbreviated name tAvgT

Managed object POC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you control the signal strength filter period forpower control in the packet transfer mode.



Default value 13



Related functions -

Modification Online



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related features -

Interfaces -



MML Abbreviated Name TFP

MML Full Name transfer mode signal strength filter period

DB Name poc.gprs_tavgt



13/04/2007


23 Routing area (RA) radio network objectparameters


Parameter name LAC

Abbreviated name routingAreaIdLac

Managed object RA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:

Routing Area Identification (RAI = MCC + MNC + LAC + RAC) isused for identifying GPRS cells.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands EBF, EBG, EBH, EBP

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Routing area (RA) radio network object parameters



DB Name rout_area.rai.location_area_code



Parameter name MCC

Abbreviated name routingAreaIdMcc

Managed object RA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the mobile country code number.

NOTE: Routing Area Identification (RAI = MCC + MNC + LAC +RAC) is used for identifying GPRS cells.

NOTE:

Range: 0..999



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -






13/04/2007



DB Name rout_area.rai.mobile_country_code



Parameter name MNC

Abbreviated name routingAreaIdMnc

Managed object RA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the mobile network code number.

NOTE:


NOTE:

Range:

0...99

0...999 OPTIONAL (Three Digit MNC)




Default value -



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007








DB Name rout_area.rai.mobile_network_code



Parameter name NSEI List

Abbreviated name nseiList

Managed object RA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 16

Description With this parameter you define the network service entityidentifiers of the routing area.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified When no cell uses the NSEI.




Related features -

Interfaces -


MML Commands EBF, EBH, EBP


13/04/2007




DB Name rout_area.nsei_list.id_list(x)





Managed object RA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1






Default value -




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Gb Over IP (82) (optional) AND Multipoint Gb (98) (optional)


Interfaces -

References

MML Commands FXA, EBF, EBH, EBP



DB Name

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





Parameter name RAC

Abbreviated name routingAreaIdRac

Managed object RA

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the routing area code number.

NOTE:




Default value 255



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -






DB Name rout_area.rai.routing_area_code



13/04/2007


24 Radio timeslot (RTSL) radio networkobject parameters

24.1 Abis speech circuit/PCM (PCMTSL)

Parameter name Channel 0 PCM

Abbreviated name channel0Pcm

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Abis speech channel allocationof the TRX. Parameter defines the ET-PCM number. In MML theparameter consists of the ET-PCM number and the timeslotnumber. The system allocates the radio timeslots to a subslot.

NetAct modification: Modifiable when provisioning plan with CMOperations Manager or command line interface and not havingUse File Based Activation Method for S12 BSC -option selected inGSM Options. Not modifiable when using send to network in CMEditor.

MML modification: Not modifiable.

NOTE: 2048..3391 is reserved for OC-3/T1 administration area



Default value -



Related functions -




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Radio timeslot (RTSL) radio network object parameters

Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ERC, ERO

MML Abbreviated Name PCMTSL

MML Full Name Abis speech circuit/PCM

DB Name radio_tsl.terr_traf_channel.circuit.pcm





Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Default value -



Related functions -





13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Default value -



Related functions -




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Default value -



Related functions -





13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Default value -



Related functions -




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Default value -



Related functions -





13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Default value -



Related functions -




DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1







Default value -



Related functions -





13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -






24.9 Abis speech circuit/TSL (PCMTSL)

Parameter name Channel 0 TSL

Abbreviated name channel0Tsl

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Abis speech channel allocationof the TRX. Parameter defines the time slot number. In MML theparameter consists of the ET-PCM number and the time slotnumber. The system allocates the radio time slots to a subslot.

NOTE: MML allows the user to give maximum value 30 in ETSIand maximum value 23 in ANSI for the time slot. However,maximum value is 31 in ETSI and 24 in ANSI, since TRX allocatesalways two channel timeslots.

NOTE: MML Range:

TSL: in ETSI 1..30, in ANSI 1..23





Default value -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -



MML Full Name Abis speech circuit/TSL

DB Name radio_tsl.terr_traf_channel.circuit.tsl





Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007




NOTE: MML Range:






Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -






DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1



NOTE: MML Range:






Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -



13/04/2007









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1



NOTE: MML Range:






Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Related features -


References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1



NOTE: MML Range:






Default value -



13/04/2007



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





NOTE: MML Range:






Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -







13/04/2007





Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1



NOTE: MML Range:






Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007










Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1



NOTE: MML Range:






Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -


13/04/2007


Related features -


References -







Parameter name Channel 0 Administrative State

Abbreviated name channel0AdminState

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the state into which theadministrative state of the object will be changed.

NOTE:

MML range:

U (unlocked)

L (locked)

MML default: U

Range and step Locked (0), Unlocked (1)


Locked ==> 0

Unlocked ==> 1

Default value Unlocked (1)

Default value notes Unlocked


Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands ERO, ERS



DB Name radio_tsl.adm_state





Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:

MML range:

U (unlocked)

L (locked)

MML default: U



Locked ==> 0

Unlocked ==> 1





13/04/2007


Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:

MML range:

U (unlocked)

L (locked)

MML default: U



Locked ==> 0

Unlocked ==> 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:

MML range:

U (unlocked)

L (locked)

MML default: U



13/04/2007



Locked ==> 0

Unlocked ==> 1




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -









Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




NOTE:

MML range:

U (unlocked)

L (locked)

MML default: U



Locked ==> 0

Unlocked ==> 1




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -










13/04/2007


Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:

MML range:

U (unlocked)

L (locked)

MML default: U



Locked ==> 0

Unlocked ==> 1




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -






DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:

MML range:

U (unlocked)

L (locked)

MML default: U



Locked ==> 0

Unlocked ==> 1




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -






13/04/2007






Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:

MML range:

U (unlocked)

L (locked)

MML default: U



Locked ==> 0

Unlocked ==> 1




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -


References -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007







24.25 RTSL type 0 (CH0)

Parameter name Channel 0 Type

Abbreviated name channel0Type

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the logical channel combinationthat has to be mapped onto the basic physical channel.

NOTE:

The values 1 and 2 can be present only if option Half Rate (17) issupported or the AMR HR licence state is ON or CONFIG.

The value 10 (ERACH) can be present only if the Extended CellRadius (10) option is ON and the BTS is Talk-family or theExtended Cell For US (88) option is ON and the BTS is UltraSite.

The value 10 (ERACH) can be present in TRX creation if the TRXis an Extended area TRX (ETRX).

NOTE: Value explanation:

TCHF (traffic channel (full rate) (TCH/F + SACCH + FACCH))

TCHH (traffic channel (half rate) (TCH/H + SACCH + FACCH)<option>)

TCHD (traffic channel (dual rate) (TCH/F or TCH/H + SACCH +FACCH) <option>)

MBCCB (combined broadcast control channel with cell broadcast(BCCH+CCCH+SDCCH+CBCH))

MBCCH (broadcast control channel)

MBCCHC (combined broadcast control channel (BCCH + SDCCH/4) channel)

SDCCH (stand-alone dedicated control channel (SDCCH/8))

ERACH (random access channel of an extended area <option>)

NOTUSED (RTSL does not have a radio definition or an Abisallocation) <option>


13/04/2007


Range and step TCHF (0), TCHH (1), TCHD (2), SDCCH (3), MBCCH (4),MBCCHC (5), MBCCB (7), Not allowed in CH0 (8), Not In Use (9),ERACH (10), Not allowed in CH0 (13)


TCHF ==> 0

TCHH ==> 1

TCHD ==> 2

SDCCH ==> 3

MBCCH ==> 4

MBCCHC ==> 5

MBCCB ==> 7

Not allowed in CH0 ==> 8

Not In Use ==> 9

ERACH ==> 10


Default value TCHF (0)



Related functions -


Modified When the TRX is locked.



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. RAC <-> BSC. BSC <-> RAC. Planner <-> RAC

References . GSM reference: I-ETS 300 030 (GSM 05.02)

MML Commands ERC, ERM, ERO, EEI

MML Abbreviated Name CH0

MML Full Name RTSL type 0

DB Name radio_tsl.radio_tsl_type


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:


Value 13 can be present only if option BSC GPRS Param Enabled(GPRS O&M in BSC) (39) is supported.





SDCCB (stand-alone dedicated control channel with cell broadcastchannel (SDCCH+CBCH))


NOTUSED (RTSL does not have a radio definition or an Abisallocation)

MPBCCH (packet control channel (PBCCH + PCCCH + PTCCH)<option>)

Range and step TCHF (0), TCHH (1), TCHD (2), SDCCH (3), Not allowed in CH1(4), Not allowed in CH1 (5), Not allowed in CH1 (7), SDCCB (8),Not In Use (9), Not allowed in CH1 (10), MPBCCH (13)


13/04/2007



TCHF ==> 0

TCHH ==> 1

TCHD ==> 2

SDCCH ==> 3




SDCCB ==> 8

Not In Use ==> 9


MPBCCH ==> 13




Related functions -





Related options -

Related features -








DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:













13/04/2007



TCHF ==> 0

TCHH ==> 1

TCHD ==> 2

SDCCH ==> 3




SDCCB ==> 8

Not In Use ==> 9


MPBCCH ==> 13




Related functions -





Related options -

Related features -








DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:













13/04/2007



TCHF ==> 0

TCHH ==> 1

TCHD ==> 2

SDCCH ==> 3




SDCCB ==> 8

Not In Use ==> 9


MPBCCH ==> 13




Related functions -





Related options -

Related features -








DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007






Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:









Range and step TCHF (0), TCHH (1), TCHD (2), SDCCH (3), Not allowed in CH4(4), Not allowed in CH4 (5), Not allowed in CH4 (7), Not allowed inCH4 (8), Not allowed in CH4 (9), Not allowed in CH4 (10),MPBCCH (13)


TCHF ==> 0

TCHH ==> 1

TCHD ==> 2

SDCCH ==> 3







MPBCCH ==> 13


13/04/2007





Related functions -





Related options -

Related features -











Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




NOTE:











TCHF ==> 0

TCHH ==> 1

TCHD ==> 2

SDCCH ==> 3







MPBCCH ==> 13




Related functions -






13/04/2007


Related options -

Related features -











Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:









DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007





TCHF ==> 0

TCHH ==> 1

TCHD ==> 2

SDCCH ==> 3







MPBCCH ==> 13




Related functions -





Related options -

Related features -









13/04/2007





Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:







Range and step TCHF (0), TCHH (1), TCHD (2), SDCCH (3), Not allowed in CH7(4), Not allowed in CH7 (5), Not allowed in CH7 (7), Not allowed inCH7 (8), Not allowed in CH7 (9), Not allowed in CH7 (10), Notallowed in CH7 (13)


TCHF ==> 0

TCHH ==> 1

TCHD ==> 2

SDCCH ==> 3











Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007







Related options -

Related features -









13/04/2007


25 Subscriber group (SG) radio networkobject parameters

25.1 authorised networks identification (ANE)

Parameter name Ane ID

Abbreviated name relatedAne

Managed object SG

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the Authorised Networks which theSubscriber Group is using.



Default value -



Special value All networks are permitted (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E4C, E4D, E4M, E4O, E4E, E4H, E4I, E4S

MML Abbreviated Name ANE

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Subscriber group (SG) radio network object parameters

MML Full Name authorised networks identification

DB Name *) relation


25.2 home mobile country code (HMCC)

Parameter name Home MCC

Abbreviated name homeMcc

Managed object SG

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define Home Mobile Country Code of theSubscriber Group.

NOTE:

Range: 0…999



Default value



Related functions -

Modification online

Related parameters homeMnc of SG

Parameter relationships home mobile country code (HMCC)



Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E4E, E4H, E4I, E4S, E4O

MML Abbreviated Name HMCC

MML Full Name home mobile country code

DB Name subsc_group.home_mcc



13/04/2007


25.3 home mobile network code (HMNC)

Parameter name Home MNC

Abbreviated name homeMnc

Managed object SG

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define Home Mobile Network Code of theSubscriber Group.

NOTE:

If single-digit MNC is given, the preceding digits will have value0xF which means "not defined".

If 2-digit MNC is given, the preceding digit will have value 0xFwhich means "not defined".

3-digit MNC is stored such as it has been given.


NOTE:

Range: 0…999



Default value



Related functions -

Modification online

Related parameters homeMcc of SG

Parameter relationships home mobile network code (HMNC)



Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name HMNC

MML Full Name home mobile network code

DB Name subsc_group.home_mnc


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



25.4 subscriber group identification (SG)

Parameter name SG ID

Abbreviated name sgId

Managed object SG

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a unique identifier number for aSubscriber Group.



Default value -



Related functions -






Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E4E, E4G, E4H, E4I, E4S, E4O

MML Abbreviated Name SG

MML Full Name subscriber group identification



25.5 subscriber group name (NAME)

Parameter name Subscriber Group Name


13/04/2007


Abbreviated name sgName

Managed object SG

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define a unique name for a SubscriberGroup.

Note: Input of both numeric and alphabetic characters is possible.



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online





Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands E4E, E4G, E4H, E4I, E4S, E4O


MML Full Name subscriber group name

DB Name subsc_group.sg_name


25.6 WCDMA RAN access (WA)

Parameter name WCDMA RAN Access

Abbreviated name wcdmaRanAccess

Managed object SG

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define whether all neighbour WCDMAcells are filtered out from mobile specific handover target cell listsor not.

NOTE: MML Range:

Y (IMSI based handovers to neighbour WCDMA cells are allowedfor the mobiles of the Subscriber Group)

N (IMSI based handovers to neighbour WCDMA cells are notallowed for the mobiles of the Subscriber Group)

MML default: N






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Inter System HO (ISHO Support In BSC) (56) (optional). IBHO (IMSI Based Handover) in BSC (80) (optional)


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name WA

MML Full Name WCDMA RAN access

DB Name subsc_group.wcdma_access_permitted



13/04/2007


26 Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC)radio network object parameters

26.1 high response time (RTH)

Parameter name High Response Time

Abbreviated name responseTimeHigh

Managed object SMLC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the highest response time. Thehighest response time is the total amount of time given for locationcalculation when the requested response time given by MSC is setto “delay tolerant” or “not given”.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . PBS (Position Based Services) in BSC (55) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands EXN, EXQ

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Serving Mobile Location Center (SMLC) radio network objectparameters

MML Abbreviated Name RTH

MML Full Name high response time

DB Name smlc.resp_time_hi


26.2 LCS ignore limit (LIL)

Parameter name LCS Ignore Limit

Abbreviated name lcsIgnoreLimit

Managed object SMLC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the LCS ignore limit in percents. Ifthe processor average load is equal or over this limit, the locationrequest from the MSC are ignored.



Default value 90 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . PBS (Position Based Services) in BSC (55) (optional) OR Lbinterface to BSC (Lb Usage) (63) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LIL

MML Full Name LCS ignore limit

DB Name smlc.ignore_lmt



13/04/2007


26.3 low response time (RTL)

Parameter name Low Response Time

Abbreviated name responseTimeLow

Managed object SMLC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the lowest response time. Thelowest response time is the total amount of time given for locationcalculation when the requested response time given by MSC is setto “low delay”.






Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . PBS (Position Based Services) in BSC (55) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name RTL

MML Full Name low response time

DB Name smlc.resp_time_lo


26.4 PBS halfrate limit (PHF)

Parameter name PBS Halfrate Limit

Abbreviated name pbsHalfRateLimit

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Managed object SMLC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the PBS half rate limit in percents.If the average load of the processor is equal or over this limit, theamount of the location requests in the PBS is halved.



Default value 70 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . PBS (Position Based Services) in BSC (55) (optional) AND Lbinterface to BSC (Lb Usage) (63) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PHF

MML Full Name PBS halfrate limit

DB Name smlc.halfrate_lmt


26.5 PBS stop limit (PSL)

Parameter name PBS Stop Limit

Abbreviated name pbsStopLimit

Managed object SMLC

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the PBS stop limit in percents. Ifthe processor average load is equal or over this limit, the locationrequests are no longer sent to the PBS.


13/04/2007




Default value 80 %



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . PBS (Position Based Services) in BSC (55) (optional) AND Lbinterface to BSC (Lb Usage) (63) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PSL

MML Full Name PBS stop limit

DB Name smlc.pbs_stop_lmt


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




13/04/2007


27 Trunk reservation decision thresholdtable (TRK_TBL/TRKT) radio networkobject parameters

27.1 decision threshold values (T1-T16)

Parameter name Decision Threshold Values

Abbreviated name decisionThrValue

Managed object TRKT

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 16

Description Decision Threshold values are used in the Trunk Reservationservice request acceptance procedure.



Default value 65535



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Trunk reservation decision threshold table (TRK_TBL/TRKT) radionetwork object parameters

References -

MML Commands ETC, ETM

MML Abbreviated Name T1-T16

MML Full Name decision threshold values

DB Name trk_tbl.th_table(x)


27.2 random value upper limit

Parameter name Random Value Upper Limit

Abbreviated name randomValueLimit

Managed object TRKT

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Upper limit for the random value that is used in the TrunkReservation algorithm.



Default value 65535



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -


References -

MML Commands ETC, ETM, ETO


MML Full Name random value upper limit


13/04/2007


DB Name trk_tbl.random_value_limit


27.3 table identification (TBL)

Parameter name TRKT ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object TRKT

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description Identification of a Trunk Reservation Decision Threshold Table in aBSC.



Default value -



Related functions -





Related features -


References -

MML Commands ETC, ETD, ETM, ETO, EQT

MML Abbreviated Name TBL

MML Full Name table identification



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Trunk reservation decision threshold table (TRK_TBL/TRKT) radionetwork object parameters


13/04/2007


28 Transceiver (TRX) radio network objectparameters




Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


NOTE:

MML range:

U (unlocked)

L (locked)

MML default:

L



Unlocked ==> 1

Locked ==> 3




Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007


Transceiver (TRX) radio network object parameters


Related options -

Related features -


References -




DB Name tranceiver.adm_state


28.2 autoconfigure (AC)

Parameter name Autoconfigure

Abbreviated name autoConfig

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the TRX is created to beautoconfigured.

NOTE:

The parameter is only allowed for Nokia MetroSite, Nokia InSite,Nokia UltraSite, and Nokia Flexi EDGE.

Range and step TRX is not created to be autoconfigured (N) (0), TRX is created tobe autoconfigured (Y) (1)


TRX is not created to be autoconfigured (N) ==> 0

TRX is created to be autoconfigured (Y) ==> 1

Default value TRX is not created to be autoconfigured (N) (0)



Related functions -



13/04/2007




Related options . Abis Auto Configuration (32) (optional)

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ERC

MML Abbreviated Name AC

MML Full Name autoconfigure

DB Name


28.3 background C/I estimation type 1-10 (BT1-BT10)

Parameter name Background C/I Estimation Type

Abbreviated name bgIntfCellEstType

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define the estimation type of theinterfering cell signal level used as background data.

MML description: In background data activation (EE commandgroup), background data is swapped with active data.

Range and step Measured interference level (0), Interference level estimate (1)


Default value



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ERY, ERO

MML Abbreviated Name BT1-BT10

MML Full Name background C/I estimation type 1-10

DB Name


28.4 background C/I estimation weight 1-10 (BW1-BW10)

Parameter name Background C/I Estimation Weight

Abbreviated name bgIntfCellCiEstWeight

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define the weighting coefficient of theinterfering cell used as background data.

MML description: In background activation (EE command group),background data is swapped with active data.

MML NOTE:

MML range: 0..10 and ND (not defined)

Value 0 detaches the interfering cell from the transceiver.

Value 10 indicates the highest weighting.

Value ND removes the background values from the interfering cell.



Default value



Related functions -

Modification online





13/04/2007


Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BW1-BW10

MML Full Name background C/I estimation weight 1-10

DB Name


28.5 background cell identification of interfering cell 1-10 (BCI1-BCI10)

Parameter name Background CI Of Interfering Cell

Abbreviated name bgIntfCellCI

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define the cell identification used asbackground data.




Default value



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Abbreviated Name BCI1-BCI10

MML Full Name background cell identification of interfering cell 1-10

DB Name


28.6 background direct access level (BDAL)

Parameter name Background Direct Access Level

Abbreviated name bg_directAccessLevel

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the direct access level used asbackground data.


NOTE:

MML range:

N (disabled)

ND (not defined)

Range and step -109...-47, step 1


Default value -



Special value disabled (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


13/04/2007


MML Commands ERM, ERO

MML Abbreviated Name BDAL

MML Full Name background direct access level

DB Name


28.7 background frequency (BFREQ)

Parameter name Background Frequency

Abbreviated name bg_initialFrequency

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the frequency used as backgrounddata.


The value range of Primary GSM is 1...124.

The value range of Extended GSM is 975...1023, 0.

Extended GSM is not supported by Nokia 2nd Generation sitetype.

NOTE:

The range depends on the frequency band in use.

GSM 800: 128..251

GSM 900: 0..124, 975..1023

GSM 1800: 512..885

GSM 1900: 512..810

ND (not defined)



Default value -



Special value not defined (65535)

Related functions -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BFREQ

MML Full Name background frequency

DB Name


28.8 background level adjustment 1-10 (BL1-BL10)

Parameter name Background Level Adjustment

Abbreviated name bgIntfCellLevelAdj

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define the level adjustment used asbackground data.




Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -


13/04/2007


Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BL1-BL10

MML Full Name background level adjustment 1-10

DB Name


28.9 background location area code of interfering cell 1-10 (BLAC1-BLAC10)

Parameter name Background LAC of Interfering Cell

Abbreviated name bgIntfCellLAC

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the location are of the interferingcell used as background data.




Default value



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BLAC1-BLAC10

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name background location area code of interfering cell 1-10

DB Name


28.10 background mobile country code of interfering cell(BMCC1-BMCC10)

Parameter name Background MCC Of Interfering Cell

Abbreviated name bgIntfCellMCC

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the mobile country code of theinterfering cell used as background data.


NOTE:

MML range: 0..999




Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BMCC1-BMCC10

MML Full Name background mobile country code of interfering cell


13/04/2007


DB Name


28.11 background mobile network code of interfering cell(BMNC1-BMNC10)

Parameter name Background Mobile Network Code Of Interfering Cell

Abbreviated name bgIntfCellMNC

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the mobile network code of theinterfering cell used as background data.


NOTE:

MML range: 0..999





Default value



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BMNC1-BMNC10

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



MML Full Name background mobile network code of interfering cell

DB Name


28.12 background optimum RX level uplink (BLEV)

Parameter name Background Optimum Rx Level Uplink

Abbreviated name bg_optimumRxLevUL

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the optimum RX uplink level usedas background data.


NOTE:

MML range:

N (not used)

ND (not defined)



Default value -



Special value Not Used (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BLEV


13/04/2007


MML Full Name background optimum RX level uplink

DB Name


28.13 background training sequence code (BTSC)

Parameter name Background TSC

Abbreviated name bg_tsc

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the training sequence code usedas background data.


NOTE:

MML range:

0..7 and ND (not defined)



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BTSC

MML Full Name background training sequence code

DB Name

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




28.14 background TRX frequency type (BFRT)

Parameter name Background TRX Frequency Type

Abbreviated name bg_trxFrequencyType

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the TRX frequency type used asbackground data.


NOTE:

MML range:

0..16 and ND (Not defined)



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name BFRT

MML Full Name background TRX frequency type

DB Name


13/04/2007



28.15 binary outputs (ON/OFF)

Parameter name Binary Outputs

Abbreviated name bcfOutputs

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 4

Description With this parameter you indicate which binary outputs are in theON and OFF state. The outputs are identified by a number.

Note! The parameter exists only for Nokia PrimeSite.

NOTE:

MML range: 4 ON/OFF type outputs.

Default: all outputs OFF



Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options . Remote Interrogation of Serial and Version Numbers (6)(optional)

Related features -

Interfaces . RACApp <-> RAC. Planner <-> RAC. BSC <-> RAC

References -

MML Commands ERT, ERO

MML Abbreviated Name ON/OFF

MML Full Name binary outputs

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



DB Name


28.16 bit rate (BR)

Parameter name Bit Rate

Abbreviated name bitRate

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the bit rate of the D-channeltelecom signalling link of the TRX. The parameter is only allowedfor Nokia MetroSite, Nokia InSite and Nokia UltraSite.

Range and step (8 kbps) (8), (16 kbps) (16), (32 kbps) (32), (64 kbps) (64)


(8 kbps) ==> 8

(16 kbps) ==> 16

(32 kbps) ==> 32

(64 kbps) ==> 64

Default value -



Related functions -


Related parameters autoConfig of TRX

Parameter relationships You can give this parameter only if parameter autoConfig is set toY.

Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ERC

MML Abbreviated Name BR

MML Full Name bit rate

DB Name


13/04/2007



28.17 C/I estimation weight 1-10 (W1-W10)

Parameter name C/I Estimation Weight

Abbreviated name ciEstWeight

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you indicate the weighting coefficient of theinterfering cell.

MML description: The value 0 detaches the correspondinginterfering cell from the transceiver.

NOTE:

Value 10 is the highest weighting.



Default value



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name W1-W10

MML Full Name C/I estimation weight 1-10

DB Name tranceiver.trx_intf_cell(0...9).ci_est_weight


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



28.18 C/I estimation type 1-10 (T1-T10)

Parameter name C/I Estimation Type

Abbreviated name estType

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you indicate whether the signal level of theinterfering cell is considered as a directly measured interferencelevel, or if the signal level of the interfering cell is a referencevalue which is used for calculating an estimation of theinterference level.

Range and step Measured interference level (0), Interference level estimate (1)


Default value Measured interference level (0)



Related functions -

Modification online



Related options -

Related features . Intelligent Underlay Overlay (14) (optional)

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name T1-T10

MML Full Name C/I estimation type 1-10

DB Name tranceiver.trx_intf_cell(0...9).ci_est_type


28.19 cell identification of interfering cell 1-10 (CI1-CI10)

Parameter name CI Of Interfering Cell

Abbreviated name adjIdCi


13/04/2007


Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define which interfering cell you wantto handle.



Default value



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name CI1-CI10

MML Full Name cell identification of interfering cell 1-10

DB Name tranceiver.trx_intf_cell(0...9).adj_id.ci


28.20 combi link (CL)

Parameter name Combi Link

Abbreviated name combinedSignalling

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define whether the D-channel O&M andtelecom signalling links are combined.

NOTE! The parameter is only allowed for Nokia MetroSite andNokia InSite.

NetAct NOTE: Related features: Abis Auto Configuration (32)(optional)

Range and step O&M and telecom sign. links are not combined (N) (0), O&M andtelecom sign. links are combined (Y) (1)


O&M and telecom sign. links are not combined (N) ==> 0

O&M and telecom sign. links are combined (Y) ==> 1

Default value O&M and telecom sign. links are not combined (N) (0)



Related functions -


Related parameters id (TRX ID) of TRX, autoConfig (Autoconfigure) of TRX

Parameter relationships Parameter can be given only if the value of parameter transceiveridentification is 1 and the value of parameter autoconfigure is (Y).

Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ERC

MML Abbreviated Name CL

MML Full Name combi link

DB Name tranceiver.combi_link_used


28.21 D-channel O&M link set name (ONAME)

Parameter name O&M LAPD Link Name

Abbreviated name omLapdLinkName

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you indicate the D-channel O&M link set nameof the TRX.

NOTE!

The parameter exists only for Nokia PrimeSite. Changing theparameter causes a temporary break in O&M signalling.

MML range:




Default value -



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name ONAME

MML Full Name D-channel O&M link set name

DB Name


28.22 D-channel O&M link set number (ONBR)

Parameter name O&M LAPD Link Number

Abbreviated name omLapdLinkNumber

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you indicate the D-channel O&M link setnumber of the TRX.

NOTE!

The parameter exists only for Nokia PrimeSite. Changing theparameter causes a temporary break in O&M signalling.



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -

MML Commands ERC, ERM, ERO

MML Abbreviated Name ONBR

MML Full Name D-channel O&M link set number

DB Name


28.23 D-channel telecom link set name (DNAME)

Parameter name LAPD Link Name

Abbreviated name lapdLinkName

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you indicate the D-channel telecom link setname of the signalling link of the TRX.

NetAct modification: Modifiable when provisioning plan with CMOperations Manager or command line interface and not havingUse File Based Activation Method for S12 BSC -option selected inGSM Options. Not modifiable when using send to Network in CMEditor.


MML range:




Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DNAME

MML Full Name D-channel telecom link set name



28.24 D-channel telecom link set number (DNBR)

Parameter name LAPD Link Number

Abbreviated name lapdLinkNumber

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you indicate the D-channel telecom link setnumber of the signalling link of the TRX.



Default value -



Related functions -




Related options -

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name DNBR

MML Full Name D-channel telecom link set number

DB Name


28.25 DFCA indication (DFCA)

Parameter name DFCA Indication

Abbreviated name dfcaIndication

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the TRX belongs to thenon-DFCA or to the DFCA layer when the DFCA mode of the BTSis “DFCA hopping”.

NOTE:

If DFCA Mode attribute of BTS is 'Off' or 'Standby', DFCAmodification can be made online. If the DFCA Mode attribute ofthe BTS is 'DFCA hopping', the modification requires TRX locking.


13/04/2007


Range and step TRX is a non-DFCA TRX (N) (0), TRX is a DFCA TRX (Y) (1)


TRX is a non-DFCA TRX (N) ==> 0

TRX is a DFCA TRX (Y) ==> 1

Default value TRX is a non-DFCA TRX (N) (0)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified If the site type of the BCF is not Nokia UltraSite or NokiaMetroSite, then the ‘DFCA indication’ parameter of a TRX is notshown to the user in command via MML/OCH and the parametermodification is not possible.

Related parameters dfcaMode of BTS



Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ERC, ERM, ERO, EEI, EFL

MML Abbreviated Name DFCA

MML Full Name DFCA indication

DB Name tranceiver.s11_prms.dfca_trx


28.26 direct access level (DAL)

Parameter name Direct Access Level

Abbreviated name directAccessLevel

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you indicate whether direct access to a super-reuse TRX is enabled. The parameter also determines the levelwhich the downlink signal level on the super-reuse TRX mustexceed in order for the direct access procedure to becomepossible.

NOTE:

MML default: N (Disabled)



Default value 0 dBm



Special value Disabled (0)

Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DAL

MML Full Name direct access level

DB Name tranceiver.direct_access_lev


28.27 dynamic abis pool ID (DAP)

Parameter name DAP ID

Abbreviated name daPool_ID

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you indicate the Dynamic Abis Pool ID. Thiscan be given only if the site type is Nokia MetroSite, NokiaUltraSite, or Nokia Flexi EDGE.



Default value 65535




Related functions -


Modified The TRX has to be locked if at least one of the BTS-specificparameters egprsEnabled or cs3cs4Enabled is active in the BTS.




Related features . BSS11088: Coding Schemes CS-3 and CS-4. BSS20118: High Capacity BSC3i O&M

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name DAP

MML Full Name dynamic abis pool ID

DB Name tranceiver.dap_id


28.28 E-TRX type (ETRX)

Parameter name E-TRX Type

Abbreviated name eTrxInd

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Description With this parameter you define whether the TRX is working as anextended TRX (E-TRX) or a normal TRX (N-TRX).

NOTE! Only site types Nokia Talk-family and Nokia UltraSite canhave the value E.

Range and step The TRX is a normal TRX (N) (0), The TRX is an extended TRX(Y) (1)


The TRX is a normal TRX (N) ==> 0

The TRX is an extended TRX (Y) ==> 1

Default value The TRX is a normal TRX (N) (0)



Related functions -





Related options . Extended Cell Radius (10) (optional) OR Extended Cell For US(88) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name ETRX

MML Full Name E-TRX type

DB Name tranceiver.ext_trx


28.29 frequency (FREQ)


Abbreviated name initialFrequency

Managed object TRX


13/04/2007


Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you assign the ARFCN (absolute radiofrequency number) to the transceiver.

NOTE!

Check adjacent cell parameters if the TRX is a BCCH TRX.Frequency must be unique within the BTS.

NOTE!

Range:

GSM 800: 128 .. 251

GSM 900: 1..124 and 975..1023, 0

GSM 1800: 512..885

GSM 1900: 512..810



Default value -



Related functions -





Related options -

Related features -


References -




DB Name tranceiver.initial_frequency


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



28.30 GPRS enabled TRX (GTRX)

Parameter name GPRS Enabled TRX

Abbreviated name gprsEnabledTrx

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the GPRS capability isenabled or disabled for the current TRX.

When GPRS is enabled in the cell (GENA=Y), the parametermodification requires locking of the TRX.

Range and step GPRS is disabled for the current TRX (N) (0), GPRS is enabledfor the current TRX (Y) (1)


GPRS is disabled for the current TRX (N) ==> 0

GPRS is enabled for the current TRX (Y) ==> 1

Default value GPRS is enabled for the current TRX (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online

Modified When GPRS is enabled in the cell (GENA=Y), the parametermodification requires TRX locking. If EGPRS Enabled or Codingschemes CS3 and CS4 parameter of the BTS is enabled, themodification to value Yes requires TRX or BTS locking.




Related features -


References -

MML Commands ERM, ERO, ERC

MML Abbreviated Name GTRX

MML Full Name GPRS enabled TRX

DB Name tranceiver.gprs_enabled_of_trx


13/04/2007



28.31 level adjustment 1-10 (L1-L10)

Parameter name Level Adjustment

Abbreviated name levelAdj

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you can affect the adjustment levels of theinterfering cells. On the basis of this parameter, the systemcalculates an estimation of the interference level from the signallevel of the interfering cell.



Default value 0 dB



Related functions -

Modification online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -



MML Full Name level adjustment 1-10

DB Name tranceiver.trx_intf_cell(0...9).level_adjustment


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



28.32 location area code of interfering cell 1-10 (LAC1-LAC10)

Parameter name LAC Of Interfering Cell

Abbreviated name adjIdLac

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define in which area the interfering cell inquestion is located.



Default value



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LAC1-LAC10

MML Full Name location area code of interfering cell 1-10

DB Name tranceiver.trx_intf_cell(0...9).adj_id.lac


28.33 mobile country code of interfering cell (MCC1-MCC10)

Parameter name MCC Of Interfering Cell

Abbreviated name adjIdMCC


13/04/2007


Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define in which country the interferingcell in question is located.

NOTE!

MML Range: 0..999




Default value



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MCC1-MCC10

MML Full Name mobile country code of interfering cell

DB Name tranceiver.trx_intf_cell(0...9).adj_id.mcc


28.34 mobile network code of interfering cell (MNC1-MNC10)

Parameter name MNC Of Interfering Cell

Abbreviated name adjIdMNC

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Multiplicity 1

Description With these parameters you define the network in which theinterfering cell in question is located.

NOTE:

MML Range: 0..999





Default value



Related functions -

Modification Online




Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name MNC1-MNC10

MML Full Name mobile network code of interfering cell

DB Name tranceiver.trx_intf_cell(0...9).adjc_id.mnc


28.35 optimum RX level downlink (LEVD)

Parameter name Optimum RX Level Downlink

Abbreviated name optimumRxLevDL

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1


13/04/2007


Description With this parameter you define the optimum downlink RF signallevel. The optimum level ensures that both speech and dataquality are sufficient simultaneously, and that there is no downlinkinterference.



Default value 0 dBm




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name LEVD

MML Full Name optimum RX level downlink

DB Name tranceiver.dl_rxlev_opt_trx


28.36 optimum RX level uplink (LEV)

Parameter name Optimum RX Level Uplink

Abbreviated name optimumRxLevUL

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the optimum uplink RF signal level.The optimum level ensures that both speech and data quality aresufficient simultaneously, and that there is no uplink interference.



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007



Default value 0 dBm




Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ERM, ERO, ERC

MML Abbreviated Name LEV

MML Full Name optimum RX level uplink

DB Name tranceiver.rxlev_opt_trx


28.37 preferred BCCH TRX (PREF)

Parameter name Preferred BCCH TRX

Abbreviated name preferredBcchMark

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you mark one or more TRXs as preferredTRXs where the BCCH is reconfigured, if possible.

Range and step 0 (The TRX is a normal TRX (N)),

1 (The TRX is a preferred TRX (P))


The TRX is a normal TRX (N) ==> 0

The TRX is a preferred TRX (P) ==> 1

Default value The TRX is a normal TRX (N) (0)



13/04/2007



Related functions -

Modification Online



Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name PREF

MML Full Name preferred BCCH TRX

DB Name tranceiver.preferred_bcch_trx


28.38 subslots for signalling (SIGN)

Parameter name Subslots For Signalling

Abbreviated name subslotsForSignalling

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define how many subslots from thebeginning of the TRX Abis allocation (Abis speech allocation) arereserved for signalling when you create a TRX. One subslotequals one radio time slot or two bits in the ET-PCM.



Default value 0

Default value notes System template value 0 will be send to NW in creation if no userdefined value has been entered.


Related functions -



DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related options -

Related features -

Interfaces -

References -


MML Abbreviated Name SIGN

MML Full Name subslots for signalling

DB Name tranceiver.subslots_for_sign


28.39 training sequence code (TSC)

Parameter name TSC

Abbreviated name tsc

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the training sequence code (TSC)of a carrier.

When baseband hopping is used in the BTS, then TCC of allhopping layer TRXs in the BTS must be the same.



Default value -

Default value notes BCC of the segment


Related functions -



Related parameters bsIdentityCodeBCC of BTS

Parameter relationships BCCH TRX TSC = BTS BSIC BCC

Related options -

Related features -


13/04/2007



References . GSM reference: I-ETS 300 022-1 (GSM 04.08). GSM reference: I-ETS 300 030 (GSM 05.02)


MML Abbreviated Name TSC

MML Full Name training sequence code

DB Name tranceiver.tsc


28.40 transceiver identification (TRX)

Parameter name TRX ID

Abbreviated name id

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the transceiver. The value youenter for this parameter must be unique for each transceiver withinone BCF.



Default value -



Related functions -


Related parameters trxIdentificationWithFrequency of TRX

Parameter relationships If you enter a value for parameter TRX, you cannot enter anyvalue for parameter IFREQ.

Related options -

Related features -

DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




References -

MML Commands ERC, ERD, ERO

MML Abbreviated Name TRX

MML Full Name transceiver identification

DB Name tranceiver.trx_id


28.41 TRX frequency type (FRT)

Parameter name TRX Frequency Type

Abbreviated name trxFrequencyType

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define the type of the TRX's radiofrequency used with the optional Intelligent Underlay-Overlayfeature. Values from 1 to 16 indicate that the radio frequency issuper-reused. They also show the number of a super-reusefrequency group where the super-reused frequency belongs. If thetype of radio frequency is regular, the value is 0.



Default value 0

Default value notes regular


Related functions -


Modified If the TRX is BCCH TRX and HOP=BB, the BTS must be locked.If the TRX is BCCH TRX and UHOP=BB, the BTS must belocked. In other cases, the TRX must be locked. The modificationrequires BTS locking if the frequency layer of the TRX is RFhopping and the modification is made from regular to super-reusefrequency layer or vice versa.



13/04/2007




Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name FRT

MML Full Name TRX frequency type

DB Name tranceiver.trx_freq_type


28.42 TRX half rate support (HRS)

Parameter name TRX Half Rate Support

Abbreviated name halfRateSupport

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you define whether the TRX hardwaresupports half rate. The parameter is a flag for statistics.

Range and step TRX HW does not support half rate (N) (0), TRX HW supports halfrate (Y) (1)


TRX HW does not support half rate (N) ==> 0

TRX HW supports half rate (Y) ==> 1

Default value TRX HW supports half rate (Y) (1)



Related functions -

Modification Online


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007




Related options . AMR HR (72) (optional) OR Half Rate (17) (optional)

Related features -


References -


MML Abbreviated Name HRS

MML Full Name TRX half rate support

DB Name tranceiver.trx_hr_support


28.43 TRX identification with frequency (IFREQ)

Parameter name TRX Identification With Frequency

Abbreviated name trxIdentificationWithFrequency

Managed object TRX

Parameter group -

Multiplicity 1

Description With this parameter you identify the transceiver.

NOTE:

The value range of the parameter depends on the band type in thefollowing way:

GSM 800: 128..251

GSM 900: 0..124, 975..1023

GSM 1800: 512..885

GSM 1900: 512..810

Range and step -


Default value -



Related functions -


13/04/2007



Related parameters id of TRX

Parameter relationships If you enter a value for parameter IFREQ, you cannot enter anyvalue for parameter TRX.


Related features -

Interfaces -

References -

MML Commands ERD, ERM, ERY, ERO, ERS

MML Abbreviated Name IFREQ

MML Full Name TRX identification with frequency

DB Name


DN9813866Issue 25-3 en13/04/2007

